Feature Guide

Feature Guide
Pure IP-PBX
KX-TDE100
Model No.
KX-TDE200/KX-TDE600
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 3.0000 or later

KX-TDE600: PGMPR Software File Version 3.0000 or later
Introduction
Introduction
About this Feature Guide
This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.
It explains what this PBX can do, and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities.
This manual contains the following sections:
Section 1, Call Handling Features

Provides details about the call handling features.
Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features

Provides details about the system configuration and administration features.
Section 3, Appendix
Provides tables listing capacity of system resources, exclusive features for each PBX model, tone and ring
tone tables, and the revision history of this Feature Guide.
Index
Provides feature titles and important words to help you access the required information easily.
References Found in the Feature Guide

Installation Manual References
The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference.
PC Programming Manual References

The PC Programming titles and parameters described in the PC Programming Manual are noted for your
reference.
PT Programming Manual References

The PT Programming titles described in the PT Programming Manual are noted for your reference.
Feature Guide References

The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference.
User Manual References

The operation required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is noted for your reference.
Abbreviations
There are many abbreviations used in this manual (e.g., "PT", for proprietary telephone). Please refer to the
list in the next section for the meaning of each abbreviation.
About the other manuals

Along with this Feature Guide, the following manuals are available to help you install, and use this PBX:
Installation Manual
Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX.
PC Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PC.
2 Feature Guide
Introduction
PT Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PT.
User Manual
Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs, SLTs, PSs, or DSS Consoles.
Safety Notices
Please observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and prevent
damage to property.
The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:
WARNING This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to
property.
The KX-TDE100UK/KX-TDE200UK, KX-TDE100NE/KX-TDE200NE, KX-TDE100GR/KX-TDE200GR,

and KX-TDE100CE/KX-TDE200CE are designed to interwork with the:
Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)
The KX-TDE600UK, KX-TDE600NE, and KX-TDE600GR are designed to interwork with the:
Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that this
equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio &
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for
download by visiting:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact to Authorised Representative:

Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Feature Guide 3
Introduction
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Panasonic Corporation is under licence.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Note
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover
of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, refer to How do I confirm the software
version of the PBX or installed cards? in 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) of the PC
Programming Manual, or [190] Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference in the PT
Programming Manual.
• Some optional service cards, PTs, and features are not available in some areas. Please consult your
certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Product specifications are subject to change without notice. In some cases, additional information,
including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the Maintenance Console’s Information
before programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance Console to view this information.
• Throughout this manual, PT displays and other displays are shown in English. Other languages may
be available, depending on the country or area.
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-TDE100NE) is omitted unless necessary.
• All system programming can be performed through PC programming (® 2.3.1 PC Programming).
However, only a subset can be performed through PT programming (® 2.3.2 PT Programming).
In Section 1 Call Handling Features and Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features,
programming references that include a three-digit number, such as "000" indicate that system
programming can be performed through PT programming.
PC Programming
The number within the brackets indicates the system menu number for the Maintenance Console.
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
PT Programming
The number within the brackets indicates the programming number that is entered when performing
PT programming.
® [001] System Speed Dialling Number
For further details, please refer to the PC Programming Manual and PT Programming Manual.
4 Feature Guide
List of Abbreviations
A COLR
Connected Line Identification Restriction
AA
Automated Attendant CONP
Connected Name Identification Presentation
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution CONR
Connected Name Identification Restriction
ANI
Automatic Number Identification COS
Class of Service
AOC
Advice of Charge CPC
Calling Party Control
APT
Analogue Proprietary Telephone CS
Cell Station
ARS
Automatic Route Selection CT
Call Transfer—by ISDN
B CTI
Computer Telephony Integration
BGM
Background Music
D
BRI
Basic Rate Interface DDI
Direct Dialling In
C DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
CA
Communication Assistant DID
Direct Inward Dialling
CCBS
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber DIL
Direct In Line
CDPG
Call Distribution Port Group DISA
Direct Inward System Access
CF
Call Forwarding—by ISDN DND
Do Not Disturb
CLI
Calling Line Identification DPT
Digital Proprietary Telephone
CLIP
Calling Line Identification Presentation DSS
Direct Station Selection
CLIR
Calling Line Identification Restriction DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
CNIP
Calling Name Identification Presentation
E
CNIR
Calling Name Identification Restriction EFA
External Feature Access
COLP
Connected Line Identification Presentation
Feature Guide 5
F OPX
Off Premise Extension
FWD
Call Forwarding
P
G PDN
Primary Directory Number
G-CO
Group-CO PIN
Personal Identification Number
I PING
Packet Internet Groper
ICD
Incoming Call Distribution P-MP
Point-to-multipoint
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol P-P
Point-to-Point
IP-PT
IP Proprietary Telephone PRI
Primary Rate Interface
IRNA
Intercept Routing—No Answer PS
Portable Station
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network PT
Proprietary Telephone
L
S
L-CO
Loop-CO S-CO
Single-CO
LCS
Live Call Screening SDN
Secondary Directory Number
LED
Light Emitting Diode SIP
Session Initiation Protocol
M SLT
Single Line Telephone
MCID
Malicious Call Identification SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
MSN
Multiple Subscriber Number SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
N SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
NDSS
Network Direct Station Selection SVM
Built-in Simplified Voice Message
O
T
OGM
Outgoing Message TAFAS
Trunk Answer from Any Station
OHCA
Off-hook Call Announcement TEI
Terminal Endpoint Identifier
6 Feature Guide
TRG
Trunk Group
TRS/Barring
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
U
UCD
Uniform Call Distribution
V
VM
Voice Mail
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
VPN
Virtual Private Network
VPS
Voice Processing System
X
XDP
EXtra Device Port
Feature Guide 7
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Call Handling Features ..........................................................................13
1.1 Incoming Call Features ...................................................................................................14
1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features ........................................................................................14
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY ...............................................................14
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) ......................................................................................................18
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) ....................................................20
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service ...................................................23
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution .................................................................26
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing .........................................................................................................28
1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination ..............................................................................33
1.1.2 Internal Call Features .....................................................................................................34
1.1.2.1 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY ............................................................................34
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block ........................................................................................................36
1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features ..................................................................................38
1.1.3.1 Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY .........................................................38
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection ........................................................................................39
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting .................................................................................................................41
1.2 Receiving Group Features .............................................................................................43
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting ...................................................................................................43
1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features ....................................................................45
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY ............................................45
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution ................................................................................................49
1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group ...........................................53
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature ..........................................................................................................55
1.2.2.5 VIP Call ........................................................................................................................58
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature .........................................................................................................59
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out .............................................................................................................61
1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature ....................................................................................................64
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features ..............................................66
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) ...............................................................66
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY ......................................66
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) ................................................................................................67
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) ..................................................................................................71
1.3.1.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button ........................................................................73
1.4 Answering Features ........................................................................................................76
1.4.1 Answering Features .......................................................................................................76
1.4.1.1 Answering Features—SUMMARY ...............................................................................76
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming .........................................................................................77
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup ...................................................................................................................78
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback ..............................................................................................80
1.5 Making Call Features ......................................................................................................82
1.5.1 Predialling .......................................................................................................................82
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release ........................................................................................83
1.5.3 Intercom Call ..................................................................................................................84
1.5.4 Trunk Call Features ........................................................................................................86
1.5.4.1 Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY ...............................................................................86
1.5.4.2 Emergency Call ...........................................................................................................87
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry .....................................................................................................88
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection ......................................................................................................90
1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit ............................................................................................................92
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out ............................................................................................................93
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion ............................................................................................................94
8 Feature Guide
Table of Contents
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host
PBX) ............................................................................................................................95
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code .......................................................................................97
1.5.5 Seizing a Line Features ..................................................................................................98
1.5.5.1 Seizing a Line Features—SUMMARY .........................................................................98
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing .........................................................................................99
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access .............................................................................................................100
1.6 Memory Dialling Features ............................................................................................102
1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features ............................................................................................102
1.6.1.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY ....................................................................102
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling .....................................................................................................104
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling ....................................................................................105
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial ...................................................................................................106
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System .............................................................................108
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling .............................................................................................................110
1.6.1.7 Hot Line .....................................................................................................................111
1.7 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
Features .........................................................................................................................112
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
Extension ......................................................................................................................112
1.8 Busy Line/Busy Party Features ...................................................................................118
1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) ...........................................................................118
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override ..............................................................................................119
1.8.3 Call Monitor ..................................................................................................................120
1.8.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension .................................................................122
1.8.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY .........................................122
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone ......................................................................................................124
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) .......................................................................125
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA ..........................................................................................................126
1.9 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features ..............................................127
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) ................................................................127
1.9.2 Budget Management ....................................................................................................135
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock ......................................................................................................136
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer ........................................................................................................137
1.9.5 Walking COS ................................................................................................................138
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry .................................................................................................140
1.10 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features ...............................................................142
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ................................................................................142
1.11 Conversation Features .................................................................................................148
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation ...................................................................................................148
1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor ...........................................................................................................149
1.11.3 Mute .............................................................................................................................150
1.11.4 Headset Operation .......................................................................................................151
1.11.5 Data Line Security ........................................................................................................152
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate ................................................................................................153
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) ....................................................................................155
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation .....................................................................................................157
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone ...................................................................................................159
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ..............................................................162
1.12 Transferring Features ...................................................................................................163
1.12.1 Call Transfer .................................................................................................................163
1.13 Holding Features ...........................................................................................................167
1.13.1 Call Hold .......................................................................................................................167
1.13.2 Call Park .......................................................................................................................170
1.13.3 Call Splitting .................................................................................................................172
Feature Guide 9
Table of Contents
1.13.4 Music on Hold ...............................................................................................................173

1.14 Conference Features ....................................................................................................176
1.14.1 Conference Features ....................................................................................................176
1.14.1.1 Conference Features—SUMMARY ...........................................................................176
1.14.1.2 Conference ................................................................................................................177
1.14.1.3 Privacy Release .........................................................................................................179
1.15 Conference Group Call Features .................................................................................180
1.15.1 Conference Group Call .................................................................................................180
1.16 Paging Features ............................................................................................................183
1.16.1 Paging ..........................................................................................................................183
1.17 Optional Device Features .............................................................................................186
1.17.1 Doorphone Call ............................................................................................................186
1.17.2 Door Open ....................................................................................................................188
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ...................................................................189
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM) ............................................................................................190
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) ...........................................................................................192
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ...........................................................................195
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) .....................................................................204
1.17.8 External Sensor ............................................................................................................211
1.17.9 External Relay Control .................................................................................................213
1.18 Caller ID Features ..........................................................................................................214
1.18.1 Caller ID .......................................................................................................................214
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log .........................................................................................................219
1.19 Message Features .........................................................................................................221
1.19.1 Message Waiting ..........................................................................................................221
1.19.2 Absent Message ...........................................................................................................225
1.20 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features ..........................................................................227
1.20.1 Fixed Buttons ...............................................................................................................227
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons ............................................................................................................230
1.20.3 LED Indication ..............................................................................................................233
1.20.4 Display Information .......................................................................................................236
1.21 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ..................................238
1.21.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) .................................................................238
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY ........................................238
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) .............................243
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC) ............................................................................................246
1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) ....................................................................247
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) .......................................................................249
1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN ......................................................................................251
1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN .....................................................................................252
1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN ...............................................................253
1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ...........................................................................254
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) .......................................................255
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension .........................................................................................................256
1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol ................................................................258
1.22 E1 Line Service Features ..............................................................................................259
1.22.1 E1 Line Service ............................................................................................................259
1.23 T1 Line Service Features ..............................................................................................261
1.23.1 T1 Line Service ............................................................................................................261
1.24 Voice Mail Features .......................................................................................................263
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group .................................................................................................263
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration ........................................................................................266
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration .............................................................................273
1.25 Portable Station (PS) Features ....................................................................................278
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection ................................................................................278
10 Feature Guide
Table of Contents
1.25.2 PS Ring Group .............................................................................................................280

1.25.3 PS Directory .................................................................................................................284
1.25.4 PS Feature Buttons ......................................................................................................285
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode ........................................................................................286
1.25.6 Virtual PS .....................................................................................................................289
1.26 Administrative Information Features ..........................................................................291
1.26.1 Record Log Features ....................................................................................................291
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ..............................................................291
1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management .....................................................................................300
1.26.2 Printing Message ..........................................................................................................301
1.26.3 Call Charge Services ....................................................................................................302
1.27 Hospitality Features ......................................................................................................305
1.27.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY ................................................................................305
1.27.2 Room Status Control ....................................................................................................306
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room ..........................................................................................308
1.28 Extension Controlling Features ...................................................................................311
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) ..........................................................311
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear ...............................................................................................313
1.28.3 Walking Extension Features .........................................................................................315
1.28.3.1 Walking Extension .....................................................................................................315
1.28.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension ....................................................................................316
1.28.4 Timed Reminder ...........................................................................................................318
1.29 Audible Tone Features .................................................................................................319
1.29.1 Dial Tone ......................................................................................................................319
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone ........................................................................................................321
1.30 Networking Features .....................................................................................................323
1.30.1 TIE Line Service ...........................................................................................................323
1.30.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call ..............................................................................................324
1.30.1.2 TIE Line and Trunk Connection .................................................................................326
1.30.1.3 TIE Line Programming ...............................................................................................339
1.30.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs ..............................................................348
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network ................................................................349
1.30.2.1 Gateway Groups ........................................................................................................353
1.30.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs ....................................................354
1.30.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group .......................................................................................355
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) ......................................................................................357
1.30.4 QSIG Standard Features ..............................................................................................359
1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY .....................................................................359
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG ......................................361
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG ................................................................................363
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG ....................................................................................365
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG .....................................367
1.30.5 QSIG Enhanced Features ............................................................................................368
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) ..................................................................368
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail ...............................................................................................373
1.30.6 Network ICD Group ......................................................................................................377
1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group .........................................................................379
1.31 IP Telephone Features ..................................................................................................381
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) .................................................................................381
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension ..................................................................383
1.31.3 Peer-to-Peer Connection ..............................................................................................385
1.31.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only) ....................................................................................386
1.32 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features .......................................................388
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) .........................................................................388
Feature Guide 11
Table of Contents
1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console .................................................................................................390

1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant) ....................................................................................392
1.33 Cellular Phone Features ...............................................................................................393
1.33.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY .........................................................................393
2 System Configuration and Administration Features ........................395
2.1 System Configuration—Hardware ...............................................................................396
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration ........................................................................................396
2.2 System Configuration—Software ................................................................................398
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) ................................................................................................398
2.2.2 Group ...........................................................................................................................400
2.2.3 Tenant Service .............................................................................................................404
2.2.4 Time Service ................................................................................................................408
2.2.5 Operator Features ........................................................................................................412
2.2.6 Manager Features ........................................................................................................413
2.3 System Data Control .....................................................................................................415
2.3.1 PC Programming ..........................................................................................................415
2.3.2 PT Programming ..........................................................................................................418
2.3.3 Password Security ........................................................................................................420
2.3.4 Quick Setup ..................................................................................................................422
2.3.5 Automatic Setup ...........................................................................................................423
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering ..........................................................................425
2.3.7 Floating Extension ........................................................................................................432
2.3.8 Software Upgrading ......................................................................................................434
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics .........................................................................................435
2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer .................................................................................................435
2.4.2 Power Failure Restart ...................................................................................................437
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information ...............................................................................................438
2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor ................................440
2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment .........................................442
2.4.6 Packet Internet Groper (PING) Confirmation ...............................................................443
3 Appendix ...............................................................................................445
3.1 Capacity of System Resources ....................................................................................446
3.2 Tones/Ring Tones .........................................................................................................450
3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones ........................................................................................................450
3.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table ............................................452
3.4 Revision History ............................................................................................................457
3.4.1 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx .................................457
3.4.2 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx .................................458
3.4.3 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx .................................459
3.4.4 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx .....................................................460
Index............................................................................................................461
12 Feature Guide
Section 1
Call Handling Features
Feature Guide 13
1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Description
Incoming calls via a trunk (public line) are distributed to their destinations according to one of several distribution
methods.
1. Available Networking Type for Each Card Type

Each trunk port of an optional trunk card or the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card can be assigned a networking
type: Public, Private, or VPN (Virtual Private Network).
® 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property
® 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Trunk Property
® 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Trunk Property
® 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Trunk Property
Networking Type
Channel/
Card Type
Protocol Type Public (DIL/DID/ Virtual Private
Private (TIE)*1
DDI/MSN) Network (VPN)*2
IPCMPR/ H.323
IPCEMPR ü*
(V-IPGW)
IPCMPR/ SIP
IPCEMPR ü*
(V-SIPGW)
IP-GW H.323 ü*
ELCOT/LCOT — ü*
DID — ü*
T1 LCOT ü*
GCOT ü*
DID ü*
TIE (E & M) ü ü*
OPX (EXTN.)
E1 DR2 ü* ü
E & M-C ü ü*
E & M-P ü ü*
E&M — ü ü*
14 Feature Guide
Networking Type
Channel/
Card Type
Protocol Type Public (DIL/DID/ Virtual Private
Private (TIE)*1
DDI/MSN) Network (VPN)*2
BRI/PRI CO ü* ü
Extension
QSIG-Master ü*
QSIG-Slave ü*
ü*: Enable (default); ü: Enable

*1
® 1.30.1 TIE Line Service
*2
® 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)
2. Distribution Method
One of the following methods can be assigned to each trunk port:
Method Description & Reference
Direct In Line (DIL) Directs a call to a preprogrammed single destination (e.g., the
operator).
® 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialling (DID) Directs a call with a DID number from a DID line to a preprogrammed
destination.
DID is also known as Direct Dialling In (DDI).
® 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Multiple Subscriber Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to a preprogrammed
Number (MSN) Ringing destination.
Service
® 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
3. Destination Change with the Caller’s Identification Number

The Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL/DID/DDI/MSN
features.
Feature Description & Reference
Calling Line Identification Directs a call to a CLI destination if the caller’s identification number
(CLI) Distribution has been assigned in the Caller ID Table.
® 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
4. Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type

Feature
Trunk Card
Channel Type
Type
DIL DID/DDI MSN
ELCOT/LCOT — ü*
DID — ü ü*
Feature Guide 15
Feature
Trunk Card
Channel Type
Type
DIL DID/DDI MSN
T1 LCOT ü*
GCOT ü*
DID ü ü*
TIE (E & M) ü* ü
E1 DR2 ü ü*
E & M-C ü* ü
E & M-P ü* ü
E&M — ü*
BRI CO ü ü* ü
PRI CO ü ü*
ü*: Enable (default); ü: Enable

5. Available Destinations
Destination Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) ü

PS ü
Incoming Call Distribution Group ü
PS Ring Group ü
Floating Extension no. for SVM ü
VM Group (DTMF/DPT) ü
External Pager (TAFAS) ü
DISA ü
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance ü
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) ü
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
6. Intercept Routing
After setting distribution, it may also be necessary to set the following features.
16 Feature Guide
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) If a called party does not answer a call within a
preprogrammed time period (Intercept time), it is
redirected to the preprogrammed destination.
® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Busy/DND If a called party is busy or in DND mode, the call is
redirected to the preprogrammed destination.
® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

No Destination If a destination is not assigned, the call is redirected to
the operator.
® 1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Trunk Property
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Trunk Property
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Trunk Property
Feature Guide 17
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Description
Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination. Each trunk has a
destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
[Method Flowchart]
A trunk call is received.
Does the call have its CLI* No

information and is CLI mode enabled
for the trunk and the time mode?
Yes
CLI works.
Yes Is the CLI destination

assigned?
No
Is the DIL destination of No

the time mode assigned?
Yes
The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the
CLI destination. DIL destination. operator (Intercept Routing
—No Destination).
*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:

If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID
Table, the call will not be routed to the DIL destination, but routed to the CLI destination.
[Programming Example of DIL Table]

The table can be programmed for each trunk.
CLI Destination*1
Trunk No.
Day Lunch ... Day Lunch ...
01 Enable Disable ... 101 100 ...

02 Enable Disable ... 102 100 ...
: : : : : : :
*1
® 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [450] DIL 1:1 Destination
18 Feature Guide
Note
Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be assigned in the DIL table. Tenant number is used
to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding trunk. VM trunk group number
is used in Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration.
Explanation:
If a trunk call is received from trunk 01;
In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination.
In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DIL destination, extension 100.

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
→ DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ Tenant Number
→ VM Trunk Group No.

[421] BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection
[450] DIL 1:1 Destination

1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
3.1 Capacity of System Resources
Feature Guide 19
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Description
Provides automatic direction of an incoming call with a DID/DDI number to a preprogrammed destination. Each
DID/DDI number has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Incoming calls with DID/DDI numbers that match extension numbers at this PBX will be sent to the
corresponding extension. Incoming calls with DID/DDI numbers that match extensions at other PBXs or trunk
access numbers will be sent to the corresponding TIE line or trunk.
[Method Flowchart]
Is the DID/DDI number found in No

the DID/DDI table?
Yes Does the DID/DDI Yes

number match an
extension number?
Does the call have its CLI*
information and is CLI mode
enabled for the time mode? No No
The call is routed
to the extension.
Yes
CLI works. Does the DID/DDI

number match an extension Yes
number at another PBX or
Yes Trunk Access no.?
Is the CLI destination assigned?
No
No
Is the DID/DDI destination No The call is routed

for the time mode assigned? to the TIE line or
trunk.
Yes
The call is routed to the
The call is routed to the The call is routed to the
operator (Intercept
CLI destination. DID/DDI destination.
Routing—No Destination).

Table, the call will not be routed to the DID/DDI destination, but routed to the CLI destination.
[Programming Example of DID/DDI Table]

DDI can be programmed as DID.
20 Feature Guide
CLI*3 Destination*4
Location No. *1
Name *2
0001 123-4567 John Enable Disable ... 105 100 ...

White
0002 123-2468 Tom Enable Disable ... 102 100 ...
Smith
0003 123-456 A Enable Disable ... 101 101 ...
company
: : : : : : : : :
*1
® 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Number
® [451] DID Number
*2
® 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Name
® [452] DID Name
*3
® 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
*4
® 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [453] DID Destination
Note
Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be assigned in the DID/DDI table. Tenant number is
used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding DID/DDI number. VM trunk
group number is used in Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration (® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
Explanation:
If the DID/DDI number is "123-4567":
1. Checks the number in the table.
® Matches the number in location 0001.
2. Checks the time mode.
In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DID/DDI destination, extension 100.
Conditions
• To use this feature, DID/DDI service must be assigned as the distribution method for a trunk port.
• DID/DDI Number Modification
It is possible to modify a received DID/DDI number, which may be convenient when programming the DID/
DDI table. The modification method (removed number of digits/added number) can be programmed on a
trunk port basis.
[Modification Example]
Removed number of digits: 6 Modified DID/DDI number: 876543 21 = 1021

Added number: 10
Received DID/DDI number: 87654321
1) Remove the 2) Add "10".
first 6 digits.
• Inter-digit Time
When the Inter-digit time expires, the PBX stops receiving the DID/DDI number and starts to check the
DID/DDI table. (Refer to the [Programming Example of DID/DDI Table] above).
Feature Guide 21
Even if the Inter-digit time does not expire, the PBX stops receiving the DID/DDI number when the received
number is found in the DID/DDI table. The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding destination. If the
received number matches several entries in the table, the call is directed to the destination of the first
matching entry.
[Example]
If a call is received in Lunch mode;
Received Number Destination Explanation
123-4567 Extn. 100 The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table
after receiving "7". So the call is routed to extension
100.
123-456 Extn. 101 The Inter-digit time expired after receiving "6". The PBX
finds the match in location 0003 in the table. So the call
is routed to extension 101.

3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
→ Distribution Method
→ DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
→ DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

[451] DID Number
[452] DID Name
[453] DID Destination

2.2.4 Time Service
22 Feature Guide
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Description
Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line call with an MSN to a
preprogrammed destination. One ISDN-BRI port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs. Each MSN has a
destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Point-to-multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration.
[Method Flowchart]
Are any MSNs assigned No

in the MSN table?
The call is routed to the

Yes operator (Intercept
Is the MSN found in the No

MSN table?
Yes The call is ignored.
Does the call have its CLI* No

information and is CLI mode
enabled for the time mode?
Yes
CLI works.
Yes Is the CLI destination

assigned?
No
Is the MSN destination for No

the time mode assigned?
Yes
The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the
CLI destination. MSN destination. operator (Intercept
Table, the call will not be routed to the MSN destination, but routed to the CLI destination.
[Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1]

A table can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations.
® 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Feature Guide 23
CLI Destination
Location No. Name
123- A
01 Enable Disable ... 101 100 ...
4567 Company
123- C
02 Enable Disable ... 102 100 ...
2468 Company
: : : : : : : : :
10 : : : : : : : :
Note
Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be assigned in the MSN table. Tenant number is
used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding MSN. VM trunk group
number is used in Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration.
® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Explanation:
If the MSN "123-4567" is received from BRI port 1:
2. Checks the time mode.
In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to MSN destination, extension 100.
Conditions
• To use this feature, the MSN service must be assigned as the distribution method for a trunk port.
• MSN Modification
It is possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter, which may be convenient when programming
the MSN table. The modification method (removed number of digits/added number) can be programmed
on a trunk port basis.
[Modification Example]
Removed number of digits: 6 Modified MSN: 876543 21 = 1021

Added number: 10
Received MSN: 87654321
1) Remove the first 2) Add "10".
6 digits.
• When using point-to-multipoint configuration with a BRI, do not connect another ISDN terminal device in
parallel with the PBX. As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI, the other ISDN terminal
device may monopolise both channels.

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
→ Distribution Method
→ DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
→ DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
24 Feature Guide
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table

[426] BRI Configuration

2.2.4 Time Service
Feature Guide 25

Description
Directs an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination when the caller’s identification number (e.g.,
Caller ID) matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table that is used as the Caller ID Table. Each
Caller ID number (telephone number for each System Speed Dialling number) can have its own destination.
CLI Feature Description & Reference
Caller ID Caller’s number is sent from an analogue trunk.
® 1.18.1 Caller ID
Calling Line Identification Caller’s number is sent from an ISDN line.
Presentation (CLIP)
® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Automatic Number Identification Caller’s number is sent from an E1 or T1 line.
(ANI)
® 1.22.1 E1 Line Service
® 1.23.1 T1 Line Service
CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods:
a. DIL
b. DID/DDI
c. MSN Ringing Service
Each trunk (for DIL) and the DID/DDI/MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service).
When the call has Caller ID information and the CLI is enabled for the time mode, the call will be handled by
the CLI method.
[Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI]

Location
System Speed
(System Speed Telephone No.*2 CLI Destination*3
Dialling Name*1
Dialling No.)
000 ABC Company 901234567890 200
001 : : :
: : : :
*1
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— Name
® [002] System Speed Dialling Name
*2
*3
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CLI Destination
Explanation:
If the caller’s number is "0123-456-7890" (The Trunk Access number is disregarded):
2. The call is routed to the CLI destination, extension 200.
26 Feature Guide
Conditions
• Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number Modification. (®
1.18.1 Caller ID)

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table— CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→ Name
→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→ CLI Destination

[001] System Speed Dialling Number
[002] System Speed Dialling Name

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Feature Guide 27
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Description
Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk and intercom calls. There are three types of Intercept Routing
as follows:
Feature Description
Intercept Routing—No Answer If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time
(IRNA) period (IRNA Timer), the call is redirected to the preprogrammed
destination.
Intercept Routing—Busy If a called party is already handling a call, new calls are handled as
follows:
– The call is redirected to the preprogrammed Intercept Routing—
Busy destination.
– If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not enabled, the
caller will hear a busy tone. However, if the call is made through
an ELCOT/LCOT or T1 [LCOT/GCOT] card, the caller hears a
ringback tone.
Intercept Routing—DND If a called party is in DND mode, the call is redirected to the
preprogrammed destination.
Intercept destinations can be assigned to extension ports.

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
® [604] Extension Intercept Destination
When the original destination is: The Available Intercept Destination is:
• Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/ The destination assigned to the original extension.
T1-OPX)
• PS 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Intercept Destination
→ Intercept Destination—When called party
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
→ Intercept Destination—When called party
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy
28 Feature Guide
When the original destination is: The Available Intercept Destination is:
• ICD Group The ICD Group Overflow destination assigned to the

group. (® 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature)
® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—

Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out
& Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
• VM Group (DTMF/DPT) The destination assigned to the first extension of the
VM group.
• DISA*1 If all DISA ports are busy when a call is made using
DISA, one of the following can be selected through
system programming:
• Disable: Busy tone is sent to the caller. When
using an analogue trunk, a ringback tone is sent.
• Operator: The call will be redirected to the
operator.
• AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the
destination assigned to that AA number.
® 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—
Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when all
DISA ports are busy
• PS Ring Group*2 Not assignable (Intercept Routing is not available.)
• External Pager (TAFAS)*2
• Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
• Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
*1
Intercept Routing for DISA will redirect a call only if all of the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ports are busy. Once the call
reaches the destination extension by using the DISA feature, the Intercept Routing feature of the extension is used.
*2
By assigning the forward destination of a Virtual PS to a PS Ring Group or external pager, and assigning Intercept Routing destinations
to the Virtual PS, calls to these destinations will be redirected to the Intercept Routing destination of the Virtual PS.
Feature Guide 29
Programming Example
"600" is an example of a
<Forward Destination of Virtual PS> Floating Extension No.
for the External Pager
Ext. No. of the Virtual PS FWD Destination
2001 600
... ...
<Intercept Destination of Virtual PS>

Ext. No. of the Virtual PS ...
Day Lunch Break Night
2001 1001 1001 1001 1001 ...
... ... ... ... ... ...
When extension 2001 is called from another extension or is the first destination
of an incoming trunk call, etc., the call will ring at extension 600 (external pager)
first, and then ring at the intercept destination (extension 1001) after the IRNA
Timer expires.
Different intercept destinations can be programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
[Available Intercept Destinations]

Intercept Destination Availability

PS ü
PS Ring Group ü
DISA ü
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no. ü
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no. ü
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) ü
Conditions
• Intercept Routing—DND on/off
Intercept Routing—DND can be enabled or disabled system programming.
If disabled, one of the following is activated depending on the type of line that a call arrives through:
30 Feature Guide
a. ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) Card: The incoming trunk call will ring at the original destination
while the caller hears a ringback tone.
b. Other Trunk Cards: A busy tone will be sent to the caller.
• If the intercept destination cannot receive the call:
a. Intercept Routing—No Answer: Intercept timer will restart at the original destination, until the call is
answered.
b. Intercept Routing—Busy/DND: The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call
arrives through the ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card. When the call arrives through other trunk
cards the caller will hear a busy tone.
• Idle Extension Hunting
If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group, calls to that extension will not be redirected
by Intercept Routing—Busy/DND. If the extension is busy or in DND mode, calls to that extension will be
redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group.
• Intercept Routing for intercom calls can be enabled or disabled on a system basis.
® 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
• IRNA Timer
The IRNA timer can be set on a system basis and an extension basis for each time mode (day, lunch,
break, night).
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time— Intercept No Answer
Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• The Intercept Routing destination for each time mode will not apply for Intercept Routing—Busy. When the
original destination is busy, the call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination assigned
through system programming. If no destination is assigned the caller will hear a busy tone.
• The time modes that are selected for trunk calls arriving at extensions and VM groups are decided on a
tenant basis.
• When an intercom, trunk, or DISA call is received by an extension and forwarded (e.g., FWD—All Calls)
to an outside destination, and the outside destination is busy or does not answer, the Intercept Routing
feature can be used. This can be useful when calls are forwarded to cellular phones.
This feature may not be available depending on the specifications of some trunks. Also, this feature is not
available when the original call was made from a SIP extension.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out & Manual
Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Intercept Destination
→Intercept No Answer Time
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→Intercept Destination
→Intercept No Answer Time
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are
busy
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
→ Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)
→ Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)
→ Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
Feature Guide 31

[203] Intercept Time
[604] Extension Intercept Destination
[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
32 Feature Guide
1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Description
Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls that do not have a destination assigned. The intercept
destination is an operator (tenant/PBX).
Conditions
• Intercept Routing—No Destination on/off
The Intercept Routing—No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming.
If disabled, a reorder tone will be sent to the caller. However, the Intercept Routing—No Destination feature
always functions for calls through the ELCOT/LCOT, or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card even when disabled.
• If an operator (tenant/PBX) is not assigned:
The extension connected to the lowest-numbered jack will be the intercept destination.
• Intercept Routing—No Destination also applies to calls from doorphones.

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not
programmed.)

[006] Operator Assignment

2.2.5 Operator Features
Feature Guide 33
1.1.2 Internal Call Features
1.1.2.1 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY

Description
The following types of internal calls are available:
Intercom Call A call from one extension to another.
® 1.5.3 Intercom Call

Doorphone Call When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination, the recipient
can talk to the visitor.
® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call
[Available Destination]
The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (®
2.2.4 Time Service) on a doorphone port basis.
Calling from
Destination
Extension Doorphone
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/ISDN Extension/ ü ü

T1-OPX)
PS ü ü
Incoming Call Distribution Group ü ü
PS Ring Group ü ü
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT) ü ü
External Pager (TAFAS) ü ü
DISA
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no. ü ü
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no. ü ü
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) ü ü
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) ü ü
ü: Available

7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
34 Feature Guide

[720] Doorphone Call Destination
Feature Guide 35
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Description
Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis. This is done by specifying which COS destinations are blocked
for each COS.
[Programming Example]
Called Party
Caller
COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 ...
COS 1
COS 2 ü ü ü
COS 3 ü ü ü
: : : : :
ü: Block
Explanation:
a. COS 1 extensions can make calls to all extensions.
b. COS 2 extensions can make calls to COS 1 destinations only. (COS 2 extensions cannot make calls to
COS 2 destinations.)
c. COS 3 extensions can make calls to COS 3 destinations only.
COS 1
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
COS 2 COS 3
Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106
Conditions
• Restricted extension numbers cannot be used as the parameter of a feature setting (e.g., FWD).
• All extensions can make an Operator Call (® 2.2.5 Operator Features) regardless of Internal Call Block.
• This feature can also restrict calling a doorphone from an extension on the basis of the COSs assigned to
the extension and doorphone port. (® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call)
36 Feature Guide

4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block— COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call
from Other Extension 1–64
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS
7.6 [5-4] External Relay— COS Number

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Feature Guide 37
1.1.3 Incoming Call Indication Features
1.1.3.1 Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY

Description
Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows:
Type Feature Description & Reference
Ring Tone Ring Tone Pattern A telephone rings when receiving a call. The ring
Selection tone patterns can be changed for each incoming
call type.
® 1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Voice-calling Alternate Receiving— A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by
Ring/Voice ring tone or by voice, through personal
programming.
® 1.5.3 Intercom Call

LED LED Indication The light shows line conditions with a variety of light
(Light Emitting Diode) patterns.
® 1.20.3 LED Indication

Display (Caller’s Display Information The display shows the caller’s information.
Information)
® 1.20.4 Display Information
External Pager Trunk Answer from The external pager sends a ring tone when
Any Station (TAFAS) receiving a call.
® 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Tone/Voice during a Call Waiting A busy extension hears a tone, or voice from the
Conversation handset/built-in speaker indicating that another
incoming call is waiting.
® 1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
38 Feature Guide
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Description
It is possible to select the type of ring tone pattern that arrives at an extension for each type of incoming call,
etc.
[Ring Tone Patterns]

1 280 ms*
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
* The duration of a ring tone may vary by country/area.
[Ring Tone Pattern Table]

The ring tone pattern table is categorised into three parts, each containing a specified number of pattern plans.
The ring tone pattern table is categorised as follows:
• Incoming Trunk Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each trunk group.
® 4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
• Incoming Doorphone Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each doorphone.
® 4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
• Others: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls as well as ring tones
assigned to certain features (e.g., timed reminder).
® 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
The ring tone patterns that arrive at an extension are determined by the pattern plan that is assigned to that
extension through system programming.
[Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table]

Trunk Call/ Doorphone
Intercom
Table Hold Recall Call Timed Call External
Call/Hold LCS
No. Reminder Back Sensor
Recall TRG1 ... Port 1 ...
1 Double Single Single

2 Single Double Double
: : : : : : : : : :
Conditions
• "PT Ring Off Setting" can be enabled or disabled through system programming. If disabled, PT users
cannot turn incoming call ringing off for their extension.
• For the S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, PDN and SDN buttons, one of 30 ring tones can be
assigned through personal programming.
Feature Guide 39

4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
→Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
→Option 6— ICM Tone
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop
CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group
CO, ICD Group, SDN)


3.1.3 Customising the Buttons—To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or
INTERCOM button (Digital proprietary telephone only)
40 Feature Guide
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Description
Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting. The busy extension user can answer
the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. This feature is also known as Busy Station
Signalling (BSS).
The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the
telephone type:
a. Call Waiting Tone: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
b. OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
c. Whisper OHCA: Voice from the handset
d. Off: No notification.
Notification Method
Call Type
DPT IP-PT Other Telephone
Intercom Call Call Waiting tone/ Call Waiting tone/ Call Waiting tone/Off
OHCA/Whisper Whisper OHCA/Off
OHCA/Off
Trunk Call*1 Call Waiting tone/Off
*1
Including a doorphone call, call via an incoming call distribution group, and a trunk call transferred from another extension.
Conditions
• Automatic Call Waiting
Through system programming, it is possible to select whether a call waiting tone is automatically sent to
the extension when receiving trunk calls, doorphone calls, external sensor calls and hold-recall calls.
Through system programming, it is also possible to select whether extensions will receive Automatic Call
Waiting from intercom calls.
• Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group (DPT/DTMF) is not available.
• Data Line Security
Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting. (® 1.11.5 Data Line Security)
• Call Waiting Tone
A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for trunk call and intercom call if "Tone 2" has been selected
through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). If "Tone 1" has been selected, the
same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both trunk call and intercom call.
All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default (® 3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).
• Caller Information
With the Call Waiting tone, the caller’s information flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a
10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
• Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX, the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from
the telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting. He can
answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold using EFA. For details, consult
your telephone company.
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID):
When using the call waiting tone supplied by the telephone company over analogue lines, the waiting
caller’s telephone number can be received. The number will flash on the display for five seconds, followed
by a 10-second pause, then flash again for five seconds.
Feature Guide 41
Note that the received caller information will not be displayed on telephones or wireless phones connected
to SLT ports.

3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
→ Automatic Call Waiting
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call
→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

1.8.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
1.8.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
42 Feature Guide
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
1.2 Receiving Group Features

Description
If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle
member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming.
Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type. This feature is also
known as Station Hunting.
Type Description
Circular Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle
extension hunting group in a circular way.
Incoming call
Busy
Extn. Extn. Extn.
Extn.
Assigned order
Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle
extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension.
Incoming call
Busy
Extn. Extn. Extn.
Extn.
Assigned order
Conditions
• Idle Extension Hunting applies to:
Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls to a single destination.
• An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group.
• If all the searched extensions are busy:
The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting
group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service).

PS ü
PS Ring Group ü
Feature Guide 43
DISA ü
• FWD/DND Mode
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set
FWD—All Calls or DND feature will be skipped, and the call will go to the next extension in the group.

5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List

[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member

44 Feature Guide
1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Description
An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming.
® 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
® [620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group. Each incoming call distribution group
has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group number).
Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the
group using a distribution method. When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy, the
incoming calls can wait in a queue.
Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle
incoming calls. Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor.
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
® Main
® Overflow Queuing Busy
® Overflow No Answer
® Miscellaneous
Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with

Diagram
A through F in the table are described in the following diagram.
A B C D E F
Group Floating Group Distribution Max. No. of Queuing Hurry-up Overflow Overflow Destination*8 Tenant
Busy Call
No. Extn. No.*1 Name*2 Method*3 Capacity*5 Level*6 Time*7 Day ... ... Night No.*9
Extensions*4
1 601 Sales Ring 3 5 3 60 100 ... ... 100 1
2 602 Engineering UCD Max. 11 8 90 200 ... ... 200 5
3
:
*1
® [622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
*2
® [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
*3
® [624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
*4
® [632] Maximum Number of Agents
*5
® [628] Queuing Call Capacity
*6
® [629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
*7
® [626] Overflow Time
*8
® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration/[627] Destination When All Busy
*9
The tenant number is required to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service) and the music source
(for Music on Hold) for each group.
Feature Guide 45
Calls arriving at incoming call

distribution group 1.
9 F Overflow Feature
a) Sends a busy tone (Busy on Busy), or
8 b) Redirects to the overflow destination.
7
6
D Queuing Feature
Five calls are 5
waiting in a queue. 4 E Manual Queue Redirection *1
The longest waiting call in a queue
B Group Call Distribution 3 can be redirected to the overflow
Calls are distributed by the destination by pressing the Hurry-up
2 button. The button shows the Hurry-
assigned method.
(Only three extensions 1 up status.
[agents] can answer the
call for C Busy on Busy.)
Supervisor Extension*2
Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn.
100 101 102 103 104 105 105
Monitors or controls the A Incoming Call Log-in Log-out *3

incoming call distribution Distribution Group 1
(Floating extension no.: 601;
group status.
Name: Sales)
*1
® 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
*2
® 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature
*3
® 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
1. Group Call Distribution [® 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution]

Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods:
Distribution Method Description
Uniform Call Distribution Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time
(UCD) a call is received.
Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the specified order, always
starting from the same location.
Ring All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring
simultaneously.
2. Queuing Feature [® 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature]

If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, a
preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue.
While calls are waiting in the queue, an outgoing message (OGM) or Music on Hold can be sent to the
waiting callers.
3. VIP Call [® 1.2.2.5 VIP Call]
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that incoming calls can be received
in priority order.
4. Overflow Feature [® 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature]
46 Feature Guide
A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued (Intercept

Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group). It is also possible to send a busy tone
(Busy on Busy) or disconnect the line.
5. Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature
Log-in/Log-out Member extensions can join the group to handle

calls (Log-in) or leave the group for a break
(Log-out).
They can leave the group temporarily when they
are away from their desks, to prevent calls being
sent to their extensions.
® 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Supervisory Feature Incoming Call Queue The supervisor extension can monitor various
Monitor information about the incoming calls for each
incoming call distribution group on his display.

Log-in/Log-out Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor
Monitor and Remote the log-in/log-out status of the group members.
Control Remote Control: The supervisor extension can
change the status of the members.
Conditions
• One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups.
• ICD Group button
An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming
call distribution group. It receives the incoming calls to the group.
One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution
groups (Multiple ICD Group). If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are
occupied, the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow. If the ICD Group button is not
assigned, incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM, CO or PDN button.
The mode of ICD Group buttons can be selected through system programming, as follows:
– Standard Mode (Group DN Button Mode)
An extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension
does not belong to through system programming. However, the ICD Group button will not receive calls
to that group.
– Enhanced Phantom Button Mode
An extension can join an ICD Group just by creating a button for that group, even if the extension was
not previously registered as a member. When the button is created, the extension will be automatically
registered in the lowest-numbered available member slot for the group. Calls to the group can be
received at the extension with no further programming. If no member slots are available for that group,
the button cannot be created and an alarm tone will be heard.
When creating an ICD Group button in this mode, the user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.
If an extension user deletes the last ICD Group button at his extension for a certain group, he will also
be deregistered as a member from that group.
• Group FWD
Feature Guide 47
The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis.
• COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups
Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number. Group FWD to an outside party can be
enabled or disabled for each COS. The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the
Internal Call Block feature; when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group, the PBX
checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group (®
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block).

→Main
→Overflow Queuing Busy
→Overflow No Answer
→Miscellaneous
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—ICD Group Key Mode
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
[626] Overflow Time
[627] Destination When All Busy
[628] Queuing Call Capacity
[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
[630] Queuing Time Table
[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
[632] Maximum Number of Agents

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons
48 Feature Guide
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Description
Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using
the selected distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions (agents) are busy with calls.
When incoming calls exceed the number of available extensions, calls enter a queue (® 1.2.2.4 Queuing
Feature).
1. Distribution Method
One of the three distribution methods below can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group.
Distribution Method Description
Uniform Call Distribution Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is
(UCD) received. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the
preprogrammed order for the group, starting at the extension after the
extension that received the last call.
Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn.

A B C D
Received Starts searching from

the last call. extn. B. (Skips extn. A.)
Depending on system programming, calls can be directed to the longest

idle extension. This is known as Automatic Call Distribution (ACD).
Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for
the group.
1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd ....
A B C D
Always starts searching from

the first assigned extension.
Ring All extensions in the group ring simultaneously.

Delayed Ringing:
Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension
in the group. The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button
even if no ring or a delayed time is set.

A B C D
Rings immediately simultaneously. Delayed Ringing:

Rings after a
specified time delay.
2. Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group Call Waiting)
Feature Guide 49
When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group, the group members can
receive the Call Waiting tone. To use this feature:
• Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming. This determines the distribution
method for waiting calls.
• Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually, or they will not be notified. (®
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting)
[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]

Programming Conditions Result
Group Call Group Call Group Call Waiting Capable
Waiting Mode Distribution Method Distribution Method Telephone
Distribution UCD UCD PT/PS with idle
Priority Hunting Priority Hunting ICD Group button
Ring Not available* Any telephone
All UCD/Priority Hunting/ Ring
Ring
* Incoming calls enter the queue immediately. Member extensions do not receive the Call Waiting tone.
[Example]
• Group Call Waiting mode: All

All extensions hear the Call
• Group call distribution method
Waiting tone (Ring).
for idle extensions: UCD
[ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting]

The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method
as follows:
a. Ring: The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions (even when the
extensions do not have ICD Group buttons) simultaneously for only one incoming call—additional calls
will wait in a queue.
b. UCD/Priority Hunting: The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD Group button located
on busy member extensions in a certain order. (This order depends on the type: UCD or Priority
Hunting.) Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied—additional calls will
wait in a queue.
50 Feature Guide
Note
In method b), if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call distribution
group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied, the Group Call Waiting feature
for the group will not work at the extension.
Incoming Call Incoming Call

Distribution Distribution
Group 1 3 Group 2
(Floating (Floating 1
extension 2 extension
no.: 601) no.: 602)
ICD Group 1; 601 (Call Waiting)

ICD Group 1; 601 (Call Waiting)
ICD Group 2; 602 (Answering the Call)
3. No Reply Redirection (UCD or Priority Hunting Method)

If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (No Answer
time), the call will be redirected to the next member extension. If there is no idle group member, the call
queues at the target extension until a group member becomes available.
Conditions
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
– When a KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is
installed in the PBX, and the distribution type is set to Uniform Call Distribution, it is possible to select
whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that
has been idle the longest (ACD).
– ACD does not work for ISDN extensions or PS Ring Groups.
• FWD/DND Extension
System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring extensions which
have the FWD or DND feature set. If set to ring, the FWD/DND settings are ignored. (® 1.3.1 Call
Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))
• The Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature (® 1.2.2.5 VIP Call) and/or
Wrap-up feature (® 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out). To use the VIP Call feature and/or Wrap-up feature, Call
Waiting mode on each extension should be off.

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
→Main— Distribution Method
→Main— Call Waiting Distribution
→Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
→Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
→ Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
→ Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required)
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring
Feature Guide 51

[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
52 Feature Guide
1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

Description
Up to 4 outside parties or destinations at another PBX can be assigned as members of an Incoming Call
Distribution (ICD) Group, using the following method: A virtual PS is registered as a member of the ICD Group.
Then, the telephone number of the outside destination is specified as the FWD—All Calls destination. Calls to
the ICD Group will also ring at the outside destination as if that destination were an extension within the PBX.
This is useful in situations such as the following:
• An extension user can have his PT and multiple cellular phones ring together for calls.
• An employee who is not in the office, but is still available to answer calls, can receive calls to an ICD Group.
Cellular
Company
Telephone Company
PBX-2 PBX-1
TIE
ICD Group
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 4
Virtual PS 2
Virtual PS 3
Cellular Phone XDP Parallel

The extension registered first in an ICD Group can programme the Forward settings for trunk calls to up to 4
virtual PSs through PT programming. Using this feature, an extension user can assign his cellular phone to
ring with his PT, so that he can easily receive trunk calls even when not at his desk.
Conditions
• The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required
to use this feature.
• For this feature to be activated, the following conditions must be met:
– A virtual PS is assigned as a member of the ICD Group. (® 1.25.6 Virtual PS)
– The forwarding type of the virtual PS is set to All Calls. (® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
– The forwarding destination is an outside party, including an extension at another PBX in the network.
Feature Guide 53
– FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming for the virtual PSs.
– The distribution method for the ICD Group is set to Ring. (® 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution)
• Up to 4 virtual PSs can be assigned to a single ICD Group. If more than 4 are assigned, the 4 virtual PSs
with the lowest member numbers are available.
• ELCOT/LCOT trunks without reverse circuit detection (® 1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit) and channels of a T1
trunk set to LCOT type do not support this feature.
• Calls to an ICD Group will ring at a virtual PS even if all of the other extensions assigned to the group are
busy.
• If all members of an ICD Group are virtual PSs, and trunk lines are available but the called parties are all
busy, neither the queuing or overflow features will operate. Therefore, it is recommended that at least one
PT or SLT is also assigned to an ICD Group.
• To log in to or out of a group, a virtual PS user can access the PBX through DISA, enter the Walking COS
feature number (if required), and access log-in/log-out settings.
• Delayed ringing can be assigned for virtual PSs in the same way as for other extensions.
• The wrap-up time feature is not available for virtual PSs.
• When forwarding calls to a public trunk, system programming selects whether the CLIP number of the
calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the forward destination.
When calling using a private network, the CLIP number of the calling party will always be sent.
• DSS button for Cellular Phone XDP Parallel
The DSS button light of the extension registered first in an ICD Group will turn red if the parallel cellular
phone:
– is on a trunk call that was received via the ICD Group.
– is on a trunk call that was made using the Walking COS Through DISA feature. (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward
System Access (DISA))

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

1.25.6 Virtual PS
1.30.6 Network ICD Group
54 Feature Guide
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Description
When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional
incoming calls can wait in a queue. The number of calls which can wait in the queue is programmable.
While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned
for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service). This PBX supports a specified number
of Queuing Time Tables which each have a specified number of sequences (specific commands which are
performed when a caller enters a queue). The following commands can be assigned to each sequence when
making a Queuing Time Table:
[Command Table]
Command Description Condition
OGM xx An outgoing message is sent to the After the OGM, Music on Hold will be sent
caller. "xx" applies to the OGM and the next event in the sequence will
number. be activated.
b´5s Puts the caller in the waiting queue for If an OGM has not been sent to the caller,
b (01-16) ´ 5 seconds. the caller hears a ringback tone.
If an OGM has been sent to the caller, the
caller hears Music on Hold.
Sequence c Redirects to sequence c. "c" applies None
to the sequence number.
Overflow Redirects to the overflow destination. None
Disconnect Disconnects the line. None
None Redirects to the next sequence. If assigned as sequence 01, the Queuing
(No command) Time Table will not be activated.
[Programming Example of Queuing Time Table]

Sequence*1
Queuing Time Table No.
Sequence 01 Sequence 02 Sequence 03 Sequence 04 ...
01 OGM 01 6´5s OGM 03 Overflow

02*2 OGM 02 6´5s OGM 04 None
03
: : : : : :
*1
® 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table— Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
® [631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
*2
If a call has not reached a destination by the time the final sequence is completed, the call will be disconnected.
Feature Guide 55
Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01:

Queuing Time Table 01
Sequence 01 Sequence 02 Sequence 03 Sequence 04 Overflow

The call
OGM 01 is sent. Music on Hold OGM 03 is sent. Redirects to destination
queues.
is sent for 30 the overflow answers.
Thank you for We are sorry to
seconds. destination.
calling Panasonic. keep you holding.
The department you The department
are calling is busy. is still busy. We
Please hold the line. are transferring
We will answer your you to the
call shortly. operator.
The call is connected to the member

extension as soon as the extension
becomes available.
Conditions
• If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing Time
Table:
Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires.
• Manual Queue Redirection
It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the
Hurry-up button. (If the call is already ringing at an extension, it will not be redirected.) This feature is also
known as Hurry-up Transfer.
• Hurry-up Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry-up button. The number of calls queuing before Manual
Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable. The button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern Calls in the Waiting Queue
Off No queued call

Red on At or under the assigned number for Hurry-up
Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry-up

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation
→Queuing Time Table
→Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
→Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Call Waiting on VM Group
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
56 Feature Guide
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type

[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
[630] Queuing Time Table

1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

1.9.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection)
Feature Guide 57
1.2.2.5 VIP Call

Description
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups
and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.
Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode. When multiple groups enable
the VIP Call mode, the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority.
When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode, queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly.
[Example]
In the call centre, incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode, while incoming call
distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode.
Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/DDI/CLI.

(The number in the circle is the queuing order.)
Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call

Distribution Distribution Distribution Distribution
Group 1 6 Group 2 5 Group 3 4 Group 4 8
(for VIP) (for general (for special (for general
1 3 2 7
customers) customers) customers)
3rd
1st Priority 2nd
Priority Priority 3rd
Priority
Extn. Extn. Extn.

101 102 103
Distribution order: 1 6 2 4 3 7 5 8
From: Group 1 Group 3 Groups 2 and 4

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— VIP Call Mode
58 Feature Guide

Description
When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity, they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination
or a busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features:
1. Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group
2. Busy on Busy
1. Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group

Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions:
a. There is no space in the waiting queue.
b. The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in.
c. An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table.
d. The Overflow time expires.
e. Manual Queue Redirection is performed.
The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service). The destination can be assigned as follows, depending
on the above conditions.
• For a) and b):
® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow Queuing Busy—
Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [627] Destination When All Busy
• For c), d), and e):
® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out
& Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration

PS ü
PS Ring Group ü
DISA ü
2. Busy on Busy
Feature Guide 59
The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming
Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions:
a. There is no space in the Waiting queue.
b. The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in.
[Example of a)]
There are five assistants in a shop. When the answering agent number is "2", and the queuing call number
is "0":
If two of the assistants are talking on the phone, the next caller will hear a busy tone to prevent the caller
from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed.
Conditions
[Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group]
• If the Overflow time expires, and the overflow destination is unavailable:
a. If the trunk call arrives through the ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card:
(1) If the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message (OGM) was sent to it, or the call reached
an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)): The line is disconnected.
(2) In all other cases: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.
b. If the call arrives through another card: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.
[Busy on Busy]
• If a trunk call arrives through the ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card, a busy tone will not be sent to
the caller.

5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

[626] Overflow Time
[627] Destination When All Busy

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
60 Feature Guide
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Description
Members of an incoming call distribution group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the group manually.
They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their
extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls.
Wrap-up:
While logged in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls
after completing the previous call (Wrap-up time). While the Wrap-up timer is active, calls to all incoming call
distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that the extension user can perform
necessary tasks such as reporting on the previous call.
Wrap-up mode can also be activated manually (Not Ready) by pressing the Wrap-up button.
[Log-in/Log-out and Wrap-up Status Example]

<When the incoming call distribution group is in Priority Hunting distribution method>
Incoming call Ready

Log-in Waiting for a call
Press the
Wrap-up button.
Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Extn. Not Ready

Answering a call The Wrap-up Making a report/
101 102 103 104 105 106 time expires. temporary break
Ready Ready Not Ready Wrap-up Ready
After
completing Press the
the call Wrap-up button.
Wrap-up
Extn. Making a report
102
Log-out
Conditions
• It is programmable whether the last remaining logged-in extension can log out.
• Log-in/Log-out Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Log-in/Log-out button with the following parameters:
Light Pattern
Parameter Usage
Red on Off
No parameter Used with an ICD Group — —

button, or with the floating
extension number of an
incoming call distribution
group, or with (All).
Floating extension number of a Used to log in to or out of the Log-out Log-in Status
specified incoming call specified incoming call Status
distribution group distribution group.
Feature Guide 61
Light Pattern
Parameter Usage
Red on Off
(All) Used to log in to or out of all After Log-out After Log-in

incoming call distribution Operation Operation
groups to which the extension
user belongs.
• If an ICD Group button is assigned, it also shows the log-in/log-out status of the corresponding group.
The light pattern is the same as the Log-in/Log-out button that includes the group number.
• Wrap-up Timer
– Two wrap-up timers can be programmed, an ICD Group member wrap-up timer and an extension
wrap-up timer. System programming selects which timer is used. When the ICD Group member
wrap-up timer is selected, the timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.
When the extension wrap-up timer is selected, the timer is activated after all calls to or from the
extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
– Only calls from ICD Groups cannot be received during the wrap-up time. Other calls are received as
normal.
– The wrap-up timer does not work for SIP extensions, ISDN extensions, or PS Ring Groups.
• Wrap-up Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap-up button. It shows the current status as follows:
Light pattern Status
Slow red flashing Wrap-up

Red on Not Ready
Off Ready (Wrap-up mode cancel)
• When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call, neither the PS nor its wired telephone can
have Wrap-up time. (® 1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
• Automatic Log-out
A member extension may be logged out automatically, if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed
number of times consecutively. The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each
incoming call distribution group. If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution
group, the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups. It is
possible to return to log-in mode manually.
The Automatic Log-out feature does not work for extensions in an incoming call distribution group using
the Ring distribution method (® 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution).
• Log-in/Log-out Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution
group members. (® 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature)
• Log-in/Log-out Information on SMDR
Log-in/Log-out information can be printed out on SMDR. (® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR))

→ Log-in / Log-out
→ Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
62 Feature Guide
→ No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out

→ Last Extension Log-out
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
→ Type
→ Type
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in / Log-out


1.9.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up)
Feature Guide 63
1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

Description
An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor and control each member’s
status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6-line display PT.
Feature Description
Incoming Call Queue Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming
call distribution group with the display.
Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out
Remote Control status of the incoming call distribution group members through the
corresponding DSS button light.
Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the
status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button.
[Example]
<Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display>
JAN.31 08:13AM FRI --- Date and time

601:Sales Section --- Floating extension number/name of incoming call distribution group
Waiting Calls Now :00006 --- The number of queuing calls
Max. Waiting Time :05'10 --- The longest queuing time
EXIT LOG SPRVS

Since JAN.29 09:10AM --- Monitoring starting date and time
Total Calls :00996 --- Total number of incoming calls
Overflow Calls :00131 --- Total number of overflowed calls
Lost Calls :00039 --- The number of lost calls
Average Waiting :02'12 --- Average queuing time
EXIT CLEAR
<Log-in/Log-out Monitor/Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light>
JAN.31 08:13AM FRI

601:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now :00006
Max. Waiting Time :05'10 With
EXIT
Log-in/Log-out Monitor Log-in/Log-out Remote Control
DSS buttons of the incoming call Pressing the button changes
distribution group members show the status as follows:
their status.
Light pattern Status Status Light pattern
Green on Log-in (Ready) Log-out Red on
Slow Green Flashing Log-in (Not Ready) Log-in (Ready) Green on
Red on Log-out
Off Extension in another
incoming call distribution
group
Conditions
• Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension
64 Feature Guide
a. One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group, but it need not
belong to the group.
b. One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group.
• Available Paired DSS Console
This feature is available for the KX-T7640, KX-T7440, and KX-T7441.
• Accumulation Value Clear
Accumulation value data (total incoming calls, total overflowed calls, lost calls, average queuing time) can
be cleared manually. The date and time of clearing is saved and is shown on the display (monitoring starting
date and time). When the value exceeds 99999 before clearing, "****" will be shown.
• If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed:
If the display is in idle status, it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution
group automatically.
If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group, it will not change.
• Other Features while in Monitor Mode
The supervisor can use other features on the extension (making calls, pressing the MESSAGE button,
etc.) even while in monitor mode. When each operation is finished, his telephone returns to the queue
monitor display.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension
Number

1.9.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call
Distribution Group Monitor)
Feature Guide 65
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Description
When an extension user cannot answer calls (e.g., he is busy, or not at his desk), it is possible to forward or
refuse calls using the following features:
1. Call Forwarding (FWD)
2. Do Not Disturb (DND)
1. FWD
Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations.
(® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
2. DND
Callers to an extension will hear a tone to inform them that the extension user is not available. (® 1.3.1.3 Do
Not Disturb (DND))
3. FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
The FWD/DND fixed button, or a customised flexible button, can display the FWD/DND setting status of
the extension. (® 1.3.1.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button)
Conditions
• FWD and DND are set for intercom calls (including doorphone calls), and trunk calls (including a call from
an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold) separately.
66 Feature Guide

Description
Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are
several different types of forwarding, and the circumstances under which the calls are forwarded for each type
differ as follows:
Type Circumstance
All Calls Any time

Follow Me:
When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the
desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.
Busy When the extension user’s line is busy.
No Answer When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed
time.
Busy/No Answer When the extension user’s line is busy or the user does not answer
within a preprogrammed time.
Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls, it is possible to set a different destination for each.
Intercom Calls Extension Forwards to
to Extension Another Extension
Trunk Calls to Forwards to

Extension Outside Party
Available Forwarding Type: All Calls

Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Incoming Call Distribution Group

Intercom Calls to Forwards to
Incoming Call Another Extension
Distribution Group
Trunk Calls to Forwards to

Incoming Call Outside Party
Distribution Group
Available Forwarding Type: All Calls
Feature Guide 67
[Available Destinations]
Condition for Original Extension/
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/ISDN ü Only available when FWD to
Extension/T1-OPX) extension is allowed through COS
programming.*1
PS ü
PS Ring Group ü –
Floating Extension no. for SVM ü –
VM Group (DTMF/DPT) ü –
External Pager (TAFAS) ü –
DISA ü Only available for incoming trunk
calls. Incoming intercom and
doorphone calls cannot be
forwarded to a DISA floating
extension number.
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance ü –
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no. ü Only available when FWD to trunk is
allowed through COS programming.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + ü
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) ü –
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) ü Only available when FWD to trunk is
allowed through COS programming.
*1
If an extension user is not permitted by COS to call a certain extension (® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block), the FWD feature will not
function if that extension is set as the forwarding destination.
Conditions
[General]
• FWD for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls
The extension user can set the FWD feature for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both.
• FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group FWD)
COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature.
• FWD to Trunk
COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls
externally.
The original extension’s TRS/Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call.
• Trunk Call Duration
The duration of a trunk call can be restricted by a system timer. Trunk call duration is assigned separately
for calls between an extension user and an outside party, and calls between two outside parties.
If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected. (® 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation)
• Multiple FWD
Calls can be forwarded up to four times. The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD:
– FWD—Busy or Busy/No Answer (when the destination extension is busy), or All Calls
– Idle Extension Hunting—Overflow
68 Feature Guide
– Intercept Routing—Busy/DND (when the destination extension is busy or in DND mode)

– Incoming Call Distribution Group—Overflow
Incoming
call 1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F
Original
destination
In the above illustration, forwarding stops at extension E. However, forwarding can go farther in the
following cases:
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD
—No Answer or Busy/No Answer feature.
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the
Intercept Routing—No Answer feature.
– If a call waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group, and then the call is redirected to the
overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table. (® 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature)
In the above cases, the forwarding counter resets to zero, and the call can be forwarded up to four times
again from the destination extension described above.
Incoming
call 1 2 3 1 2
A B C D E F
Original
FWD—No Answer
destination
• Boss & Secretary feature

It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting.
FWD—All Calls
Incoming
call
Call or
transfer a call
Boss Secretary
(Original) (FWD destination)
• Message Waiting
While calls are forwarded, Message Waiting information is not forwarded. The Message button light turns
on at the originally called extension. (® 1.19.1 Message Waiting)
Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group.
[All Calls and Busy]

• If the forward destination is not available to answer a call, this feature is cancelled and the original
destination will ring for the following type of call:
– Doorphone call
– Trunk calls via the ELCOT/LCOT, or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) cards
[No Answer and Busy/No Answer]
• No Answer Time
Feature Guide 69
The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension.
[Follow Me]
• This feature is only available when the original extension has set "Remote Operation by Other
Extension" to "Allow" through COS programming.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— FWD No Answer Timer Set
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
→CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
→Programming & Manager— Group Forward Set
→Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
→ CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
→ Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND

[472] Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration
[473] Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration
[504] Call Forwarding to Trunk
[605] Call Forwarding—No Answer Time


1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
70 Feature Guide
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Description
An extension user can make use of the DND feature. If this feature is set, calls will not arrive at the extension,
but will arrive at another extension using the Idle Extension Hunting feature (® 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting)
or the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature (® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing). When a destination cannot be
found, the calling extension will hear the DND tone, while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone.
Conditions
• DND for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls
The DND feature can be set for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user.
• DSS button in DND Mode
The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND.
• DND Override
An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in
their COS.
• Paging DND
It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming. (®
1.16.1 Paging)
• Intercept Routing—Busy/DND
If a call arrives at an extension in DND mode, the call can be redirected to a preprogrammed destination
by the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature.
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has DND
set will be skipped. The call will go to the next extension in the group, not the Intercept Routing—Busy/
DND destination.
• If (1) a trunk call via the ELCOT/LCOT, or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card arrives at an extension in DND mode
and (2) the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination is not available and (3) there is no available extension
in the idle extension hunting group, then the original extension in DND mode will ring.
• Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— DND Override
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND

[507] DND Override

Feature Guide 71

1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
1.8.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
72 Feature Guide
1.3.1.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Description
The FWD/DND fixed button, or a customised flexible button, can display the FWD/DND setting status of the
extension. Using this button, the FWD status and DND status of the extension can be temporarily set or
cancelled without clearing FWD destination settings.
FWD/DND Button Types

Multiple types of FWD/DND buttons can be customised on an extension.
Type Description
FWD/DND for FWD/DND—Internal Works for incoming intercom calls

Extension
FWD/DND—External Works for incoming trunk calls
FWD/DND—Both Works for all incoming calls
[Button Status]
The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern Status (default)
Red on FWD on
Slow red flashing DND on
Off FWD/DND off
The functions assigned to the "on" and "flashing" patterns can be changed through system programming.
Group FWD Button Types

The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button. Multiple types
of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension.
Type Description
FWD for Incoming Call Group FWD— Works for incoming intercom calls
Distribution Group Internal
Group FWD— Works for incoming trunk calls
External
Group FWD—Both Works for all incoming calls
[Button Status]
The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern Status (default)
Red on FWD on
Off FWD off
FWD/DND Setting by Fixed FWD/DND button

Pressing the fixed FWD/DND button in idle status allows the extension user to set the following items for FWD/
DND:
• FWD/DND for trunk calls
Feature Guide 73
The FWD/DND status for trunk calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the
FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current trunk call FWD/DND status. The
forwarding type and destination for trunk calls can also be set.
• FWD/DND for intercom calls
The FWD/DND status for intercom calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the
FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current intercom call FWD/DND status.
The forwarding type and destination for intercom calls can also be set.
• FWD—No Answer timer
The length of time until unanswered calls are forwarded can be modified. This setting is applied to both
intercom and trunk call forwarding.
• FWD for Virtual PS
If the extension is the first registered extension in an Incoming Call Distribution Group, the extension user
can set the FWD destination and forwarding status (on/off) for up to 4 virtual PSs preregistered to the group.
(® 1.25.6 Virtual PS)
These settings are only available when FWD/DND buttons are set through system programming to FWD/DND
Setting mode.
Conditions
• When FWD/DND buttons are set to FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, pressing the FWD/DND button cycles
the FWD/DND setting.
In this mode, when intercom calls are set to be handled differently from trunk calls (forwarding type, forward
destination, DND on/off):
a. in idle mode, the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed
button]) and the Group FWD—Both button will indicate the setting for either trunk calls or intercom
calls, but not both.
b. the FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for trunk calls only.
c. pressing the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or the Group FWD—
Both button will be ignored.
• When both the FWD and DND features are assigned simultaneously, pressing the button changes the
settings as follows:
FWD DND Off
• A FWD/DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the
mode cannot be changed.

→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1
→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
→ PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
→ Type
74 Feature Guide
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND Reference
→ Type
→ Type

1.20.1 Fixed Buttons

Feature Guide 75
1.4.1 Answering Features
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.1 Answering Features—SUMMARY

Description
An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods:
Destination Feature Description & Reference
At the own Line Preference— A user can select the line seized when going off-hook.
extension (PT Incoming
only) ® 1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Direct One-touch A user can answer an incoming call simply by pressing the
Answering flashing button.
Hands-free A user can receive a call automatically and establish a
Answerback hands-free conversation.
® 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

At another Call Pickup— A user can pick up a specified extension’s call or a call in
extension Directed/Group a specified call pickup group.
® 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
76 Feature Guide
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Description
A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences:
Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming (Preferred
Line Assignment—Incoming).
Type Description
No Line Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to

answer an incoming call after you go off-hook.
PDN Answers a call arriving at a Primary Directory Number (PDN)
button simply by going off-hook. This works even when multiple
calls are received simultaneously.
(® 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension)
Prime Line Answer a call arriving at a Flexible CO or ICD Group button (on
which the "Prime Line" is assigned) simply by going off-hook. This
works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously.
Ringing Line (default) Answer the longest ringing call at one’s telephone simply by going
off-hook when multiple calls arrive.
Conditions
[Prime Line]
• The priority of the incoming call is as follows:
1. The call arriving at a button on which the "Prime Line" is assigned.
2. The call arriving at the INTERCOM button.

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line

Feature Guide 77
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension.
The following types are available:
Type Picking up Call Type
Directed A specified extension’s call.

Group A call within a specified call pickup group.
Call Pickup Deny:

Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible.
Conditions
• Call Pickup applies to:
Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls
• Internal Call Block
An extension that is restricted by COS from calling certain extensions (® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block) also
cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions.
[Directed Call Pickup]

• A user can also pick up a call to a specified extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button. This
feature is only available when (1) the user’s extension is allowed to use this feature through COS
programming, (2) DSS buttons for extensions or incoming call distribution (ICD) groups have this feature
enabled through system programming, and (3) the light pattern of DSS buttons for incoming calls to
extensions or ICD groups is set to "On or Flash" through system programming.
The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or incoming call distribution group
can be programmed through system programming. Call Pickup is available only when the DSS button is
flashing red.
[Group Call Pickup]

• A specified number of call pickup groups can be created, each of which consist of extension user groups.
One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups. (® 2.2.2 Group)
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3
Extension Extension Extension Extension

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

→ Group Call Pickup
78 Feature Guide
→ Directed Call Pickup

→ Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Pickup by DSS
→ DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny

[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group


1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Feature Guide 79
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

Description
A PT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset. If the user receives a call while
in Hands-free Answerback mode, a hands-free conversation is established using one of the following methods:
Type Answering Method
Intercom Call Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension
and the caller hears a confirmation tone.
Trunk Call Established after a specified number of rings, a called extension
hears a beep tone.
Conditions
• Hands-free Answerback applies to:
Intercom calls and trunk calls, including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group in UCD or
Priority Hunting distribution method. (® 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution)
• Hands-free Answerback for Trunk Calls
System programming is required to use this feature.
• Hands-free Answerback for Calls From an Extension That Placed a Trunk Call on Consultation Hold
Calls from an extension that placed a trunk call on Consultation Hold can be treated by this feature as
either intercom calls or trunk calls, depending on system programming. If treated as intercom calls, the call
will be established immediately.
When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, users are strongly recommended to perform a screened
transfer, so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands-free
Answerback when the extension user is absent.
• Secret Monitor
The beep tone that the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through system
programming.
• Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override
Hands-free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate
Calling mode from the caller.
• Hands-free Answerback with Headset
The Hands-free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
4.18 [2-9] System Options
→Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
→Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
→Option 4— Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
→Option 5— Automatic Answer for CO Call
→Option 6— Forced Automatic Answer

1.5.3 Intercom Call
80 Feature Guide

1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
Feature Guide 81
1.5.1 Predialling
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.1 Predialling
Description
A display PT user can check and correct the entered number before it is dialled, while on-hook. The call will
be initiated after going off-hook.
Conditions
• Storing the Predialled Number in the Personal Speed Dialling
The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE
button. (® 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System) In this case, the extension will enter into the personal
programming mode automatically so that a name can be assigned for the stored number.

82 Feature Guide
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Description
After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period, the user
will hear a reorder tone. This operation applies to intercom calls only. This feature is also known as Automatic
Station Release.
Conditions
• A PT/PS user hears a reorder tone for a preprogrammed time period, and then the PT/PS returns to idle
status automatically. However, an SLT user hears a reorder tone until he goes on-hook.
• This feature works in one of the following cases:
When making an intercom call
a. If the first digit is not dialled within a preprogrammed time period.
b. After a digit is dialled, if subsequent digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
→ Dial—Extension First Digit
→ Dial—Extension Inter-digit
→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
Feature Guide 83
1.5.3 Intercom Call
1.5.3 Intercom Call

Description
An extension user can call another extension user.
Conditions
• Extension Number/Name Assignment
Extension numbers and names are assigned to all extensions. The assigned number and name are shown
on display PTs during intercom calls.
• DSS Button
It is possible to access another extension with one touch by pressing the corresponding Direct Station
Selection (DSS) button. A flexible button can be customised as a DSS button.
• Call Directory—Extension Dialling
A display PT user can make a call by selecting one of the stored names on the display.
• Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming
(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party talks to the user
immediately after a confirmation tone. Denying voice-calling can also be selected.
• Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
A caller can change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice) temporarily. By
doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. The called party may
deny voice-calling.
• PDN/SDN
It is not possible to temporarily change the called party’s preset call receiving method when making a call
using a Primary Directory Number (PDN) button or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button (®
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension).
• Tone after Dialling
After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:
Type Description
Ringback Tone Indicates the called party is being called.

Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.
Busy Tone Indicates the called party is busy.
DND Tone Indicates the called party has set DND.

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
→Main— Extension Number
→Main— Extension Name
→Option 3— Intercom Call by Voice
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
→ Extension Number
→ Extension Name
84 Feature Guide
1.5.3 Intercom Call

[003] Extension Number
[004] Extension Name


1.2.1 Basic Calling
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
1.13.2 Using the Directories
Feature Guide 85
1.5.4 Trunk Call Features
1.5.4.1 Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Description
An extension user can use the following features when making a trunk call:
Emergency Call A user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers

regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.
® 1.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Account Code Entry A user can enter an account code to identify outgoing calls for
accounting and billing purposes.
® 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Pulse to Tone Conversion A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode
to access special services.
® 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Pause Insertion A user can insert a preprogrammed Pause time into a dialling
number by pressing the PAUSE button, or it is automatically
inserted between the user-dialled code (e.g., Host PBX Access
code or Special Carrier Access code) and the following digits.
® 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

® 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
® 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
86 Feature Guide
1.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Description
An extension user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers after seizing a trunk regardless of the
restrictions imposed on the extension.
Conditions
• A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored (some may have default values).
• Emergency numbers may be called even when:
– in Account Code—Forced mode (® 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry)
– in any TRS/Barring levels (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
– after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached (® 1.9.2 Budget Management)
– in Extension Dial Lock (® 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock)
• CLIP Number Notification
When dialling an emergency number, the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be sent as a
location identification number. (® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP))
The CLIP number assigned to the extension will be sent regardless of the settings such as CLIR or CLIP
number assigned to an ISDN port to be used. This feature is only available when using a PRI (PRI23) line
with E911-compatible services.

9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial

[304] Emergency Number

Feature Guide 87
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code
is appended to the SMDR call record. If, for example, a firm uses an account code for each client, the firm can
determine what calls were made for the client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client’s account
code on the SMDR call record.
There are two methods of entering account codes as follows:
One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis.
Mode Description
Option A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired.
Forced A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk.
Conditions
• An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling (e.g., One-touch Dialling).
• Account Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Account button. The Account button is used in place of the
feature number for entering an account code. This button is useful because it can be used at any time,
while feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk.
• Extension users can enter an account code at any time during a call, including after the call has been
disconnected and a reorder tone is heard. However, if an account code is entered after there is no longer
a reorder tone, the call will not be stored in the SMDR record.
• If more than one account code is entered, the code entered last is printed out on SMDR.
• Even in Forced mode, emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code. (®
1.5.4.2 Emergency Call)
• PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during a conversation.
• Verification Code Entry
To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purposes, a verification code is used. This code
can be used at any extension. (® 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry)

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Account Code Entry
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Account Code Mode

[508] Account Code Mode

88 Feature Guide

1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 89
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Description
The dialling mode (rotary or tone) can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming
regardless of the originating extension (under contract with the telephone company).
There are the following modes:
Mode Description
DTMF (Dual Tone The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling.
Multi-Frequency) DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk.
Pulse Dial (Rotary) The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling.
Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk.
Conditions
• Pulse to Tone Conversion
It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode so that the user
can access special services such as computer-accessed long distance calling or voice mail services. To
switch to DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period (Default: five seconds) after the trunk is
connected, or press . This feature works only on trunks set to Pulse mode. DTMF mode cannot be
changed to Pulse mode.
• It is possible to select the pulse rate for a trunk port that has been set to Pulse mode. There are two pulse
rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).
• It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to a trunk port that has been set to
DTMF mode.

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
→ Dialling Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ Pulse Speed
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
→ CO Dial Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ CO Pulse Speed
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
→ CO Dial Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ CO Pulse Speed
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
→ Dialling Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ CO Pulse Speed
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
→ Dialling Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ CO Pulse Speed
90 Feature Guide

[410] LCOT Dialling Mode
[411] LCOT Pulse Rate
[412] LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration
Feature Guide 91
1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Description
A circuit in the PBX can detect the reverse signal from the telephone company when an extension user tries
to make a trunk call. This detects the start (a called party goes off-hook) and end (the called party goes on-hook)
of an outgoing trunk call. When a trunk call is received, the circuit can also detect the reverse signal after an
outside caller goes on-hook.
If Reverse Circuit Detection is disabled, the total duration of the call is not accurately recognised by the PBX.
The duration of a call can be verified on SMDR using this feature (® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)).
It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal for outgoing trunk calls only, or for both
outgoing and incoming trunk calls, or for no trunk calls (detection disabled) through system programming.
Conditions
• This feature is not available for the following ELCOT/LCOT cards:
KX-TDA6181AL (ELCOT16)
KX-TDA0181AL (LCOT16)
KX-TDA0180AL (LCOT8)

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Reverse Detection

[415] LCOT Reverse Circuit
92 Feature Guide
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Description
The PBX can monitor the loop current sent through analogue trunks, preventing users from seizing trunks
where a loop current is not detected. When loop currents are not detected, trunks are set to Busy Out status,
and become unable to make or receive calls. A trunk in Busy Out status cannot be used for making calls as a
TIE line, as part of a trunk group, or with the ARS feature, and cannot receive trunk calls. If a user tries to seize
a trunk set to Busy Out status, the user will hear a reorder tone.
This is useful if some or all trunks are occasionally unavailable because of problems with the external
telecommunications environment.
Conditions
• This feature is not available for the following LCOT cards:
KX-TDA0181NE (LCOT16)
• Loop current detection is performed on active trunks whenever the trunk is seized and/or at fixed intervals.
• When a trunk is in busy-out status, loop current detection is performed at fixed intervals, returning the trunk
to in-service status once a loop current is detected. An extension assigned as the manager can manually
change the trunk back to in-service status.
• Trunk status changes are recorded in the error log of the PBX.
• Busy Out status is maintained even when the PBX is reset.
• Busy Out status is cleared when:
– a call is successfully received (i.e., a loop current is detected) on that trunk.
– the S-CO button for that trunk is pressed and a loop current is detected.

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Busy Out Status
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Busy Out Cancel
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO

[511] Manager Assignment

2.2.6 Manager Features

2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out)
Feature Guide 93
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

Description
Pressing a PAUSE button inserts a preprogrammed Pause time between digits of a user-dialled number before
the number is dialled out, allowing certain numbers separated with a pause to be used to access certain
features (e.g., access codes, seizing idles lines, etc.).
When a pause is needed, pauses must be inserted manually (pressing the PAUSE button) in all cases, except
for the following access codes where a pause is automatically inserted between the user-dialled access code
and the subsequent digits:
a. Host PBX Access code (® 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company
from a Host PBX))
b. Special Carrier Access code (® 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code)
c. Second Dial Tone Waiting code
Conditions
• The Pause time is programmable for each trunk.
• Pauses can be stored in Memory Dialling.
• When a Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a preprogrammed number of pauses
are inserted after the code.
• ARS
A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialled access code and the subsequent digits
when the ARS mode is enabled. (1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Pause Time
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Pause Time
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Pause Time
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port— Pause Time
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

[416] LCOT Pause Time
94 Feature Guide
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone

Company from a Host PBX)
Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing PBX (host PBX) by connecting the extension ports of the host
PBX to the trunk ports of this PBX (behind PBX). A Host PBX Access code is required for the behind PBX to
access the telephone company (e.g., to make outside calls) through the host PBX. The Trunk access number
of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of the behind PBX.
A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Host PBX Access code
and the subsequent digits (1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion).
[Example]
Telephone Company
Host PBX
Access Code: 0
Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Idle Line
Access No.: 9
Extn. 101 Extn. 102
TRG1 Dials "0-01-23-4567".

Host PBX
PBX Access Code
Telephone
No.
Dials "9-0-01-23-4567". Dials "9-101".
Idle Line Telephone No. Idle Line

Access No. Access No.
Host PBX Extn. No.

Access Code of the Host PBX
Note
"0" should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group (TRG) 1 of the behind PBX.
Conditions
• TRS/Barring
Feature Guide 95
TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when
accessing the telephone company through the host PBX. (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring))
• ARS
• SMDR
The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified
number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.
• When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are not
recorded on SMDR.
• A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a trunk port is
connected directly to the telephone company (not a host PBX). This is allowed when the long distance
code (e.g., "0") is assigned as the Host PBX Access code. All local calls (e.g., calls that do not require
a "0" to be dialled first) are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on
SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognises the telephone company as the host PBX.
Therefore, only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

[471] Host PBX Access Code

96 Feature Guide
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Description
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access code assigned through
system programming is required every time a trunk call is made without using ARS.
A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user-dialled Special Carrier Access
code and the subsequent digits. (® 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion)
Conditions
• TRS/Barring
TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code. (®
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
• ARS
• If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX:
A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately: these codes
cannot be assigned together as one code. (® 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from a Host PBX))

9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier

[303] Special Carrier Access Code

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Feature Guide 97
1.5.5 Seizing a Line Features
1.5.5.1 Seizing a Line Features—SUMMARY

Description
An extension user can select the line seized for making calls by the following methods:
Line Preference—Outgoing A user can select the line to be seized when going off-hook.
® 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Trunk Access A user can select the Trunk Access method every time he makes a
trunk call.
® 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
98 Feature Guide
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Description
Through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment-Outgoing), PT users can select the outgoing line
they prefer to originate calls on when going off-hook, from the following line preferences:
Line Preference Description
ICM/PDN When an extension user goes off-hook, an extension line is selected

automatically. If the extension is a PDN extension, the first available
Primary Directory number (PDN) button is selected automatically.
Idle Line When an extension user goes off-hook, an idle trunk is selected
automatically from the assigned trunk groups.
No Line When an extension user goes off-hook, no line is selected. The
extension user must select the desired line to make a call.
Prime Line When an extension user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected
automatically. A prime line can be selected from the Line Access
buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group.
Conditions
• Line Preference Override
A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or
Memory Dialling button (e.g., One-touch Dialling) before going off-hook.
• To select Idle Line Preference, the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a
COS basis. Also trunk groups available for Idle Line Access should be assigned.

4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line

[103] Idle Line Access (Local Access)
[500] Trunk Group Number

Feature Guide 99
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Description
The following methods can be used to access a trunk:
Method Description Accessing method
Idle Line Access (Local Selects an idle trunk Dial the Idle Line Access number, or
Access) automatically from the assigned press a L-CO button.
trunk groups.
Trunk Group Access Selects an idle trunk from the Dial the Trunk Group Access number
corresponding trunk group. and a trunk group number, or press a
G-CO button.
S-CO Line Access Selects the desired trunk directly. Dial the S-CO Line Access number
and the trunk number, or press the
S-CO button.
Conditions
• COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls.
• Trunk numbers can be referred on a trunk port basis.
• Button Assignment
A flexible button can be customised as a G-CO, L-CO, or S-CO button as follows:
Type Parameter
No parameter (all assigned trunk groups through system programming

Loop-CO (L-CO)
are applied.)
Group-CO (G-CO) A specified trunk group.
Single-CO (S-CO) A specified trunk.
It is possible to assign:
– the same trunk to the S-CO button and to a G-CO button.
– the same trunk group to more than one G-CO button.
– more than one L-CO button.
Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button in the following order: S-CO ® G-CO ® L-CO
• Direct Trunk Access
Pressing an idle CO button automatically switches on the hands-free operation mode and allows a user to
use On-hook Dialling. The user need not press the SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, or lift the handset.
• Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access
An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access. If multiple trunk groups are
available, the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming.
• Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access
The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group (from lowest numbered trunk, from highest numbered trunk
or rotation) can be determined through system programming.
• A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis so that the operator or extension
user can view the destination that the external caller is trying to reach before answering. This is useful, for
example, when multiple companies share the same operator.
• It is possible to identify the trunk ports that have trunks connected. This prevents extension users from
originating a call to a trunk that is not connected.
100 Feature Guide


3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port— Connection
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Connection
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Connection
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Connection
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Connection
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port— Connection
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port— Connection
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port— Connection
→ Idle Line Access (Local Access)
→ Trunk Group Access
→ Single CO Line Access
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
→ Type
→ Type
10.1 [8-1] System Setting— ARS Mode
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name

[400] LCOT/BRI Trunk Connection
[401] LCOT/BRI Trunk Name
[409] LCOT/BRI Trunk Number Reference


1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 101

1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY

Description
An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extension data and/or the PBX system
data. A stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation.
1. Features
Feature Storing Method & Reference
One-touch Dialling • Personal Programming

• System Programming
(PC Programming only)
® 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling System Programming
® 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

Last Number Redial (Outgoing Call Log) Recently dialled telephone numbers are
automatically stored.
® 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Speed Dialling Personal • Personal Programming
• Personal Operation with the Feature Number
® 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

System System Programming
® 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Quick Dialling System Programming
® 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling

Hot Line • Personal Programming
• Personal Operation with the Feature Number
® 1.6.1.7 Hot Line
102 Feature Guide

Feature Storing Method & Reference
Incoming Call Log Incoming call information is automatically stored.
® 1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
2. Valid Input
Display while
Input Description
Entering
0–9/ /# 0–9/ /# Store the digits and #.
PAUSE (Pause) P Store a pause by pressing the PAUSE
button. (® 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion)
FLASH/RECALL F Store a flash/recall signal (EFA mode) by
(Hooking)*1 pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at
the beginning of the number. (®
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
INTERCOM (Secret)*1 [] Conceal all or part of the number by
pressing the INTERCOM button at the
beginning and at the end of the number
to be concealed. It is programmable
whether the concealed part will appear
on SMDR.
TRANSFER (Transfer)*1 T Store a transfer command by pressing
the TRANSFER button at the beginning
of the number (used only for a One-touch
Dialling). (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer)
[Example] Storing "T + 305"=
Transferring a call to extension 305.
*1
Available only when in system/personal programming mode
[Secret Dialling Example]

When storing the number "9-123-456-7890" and concealing the telephone number "123-456-7890",
Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM .
Note
• It is possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number at the beginning of the Memory Dialling
numbers.
• It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location.
Conditions
• Trunk Access by Memory Dialling
A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory Dialling. However,
if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk, the stored Trunk Access number is ignored and the
telephone number is sent using the selected trunk.
Feature Guide 103

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Description
A PT user can access a person or feature by pressing a single button. This is activated by storing the number
(e.g., extension number, telephone number, or feature number) in a One-touch Dialling button.
Conditions
• One-touch Dialling Button
A flexible button can be customised as a One-touch Dialling button.
• Full One-touch Dialling
There is no need to go off-hook before pressing the One-touch Dialling button.

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode
→ Type
→ Dial (for One-touch)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode
→ Type
→ Type


1.2.2 Easy Dialling
104 Feature Guide

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

Description
The Message button and One-touch buttons on all KX-T7710 telephones connected to the PBX can be
customised at once through system programming. The same extension number, telephone number, or feature
number will be assigned to the same buttons on each KX-T7710, useful for hotel room extensions or similar
applications.
Button Desired Number
MESSAGE 702 (Message Waiting [To Call Back])

One-touch Dial 01 100 (Hotel Operator)
One-touch Dial 02 7601 (Wake-up Call)
One-touch Dial 03 102 (Restaurant)
: :
The MESSAGE button is programmed by default to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication.
However, the MESSAGE button can be programmed to perform other features. The eight One-touch buttons
have no default setting.
Conditions
• The KX-T7710 has two modes, NORMAL mode and PBX mode, selected by a switch on the telephone.
This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in the PBX mode.
• This feature is available while hearing a dial tone.
• Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—KX-T7710


1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide 105

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Description
Every extension automatically saves recently dialled external telephone numbers to allow the same number
to be dialled again easily.
Automatic Redial:
If Last Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, redialling will be
automatically retried a preprogrammed number of times at preprogrammed intervals. The Redial Call
No-answer Ring Duration time is programmable.
This feature is available only on certain PT models which have the SP-PHONE button.
Outgoing Call Log:
Information on outgoing trunk calls is automatically logged at each extension. Users of display PTs can view
details of a preset number of recently dialled telephone numbers, and easily call the same outside party again.
Conditions
• If a new number is dialled when the Outgoing Call Log is full and/or Automatic Redial contains a number,
the data of the oldest stored call will be deleted, and the new number will be stored.
• If any dialling operations are performed or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial, Automatic
Redial is cancelled.
• Automatic Redial may not be available depending on:
– the busy tone pattern.
– the IP network environment when using a KX-NT136 with G.729 codec. (When using IP-PTs apart from
the KX-NT136, Automatic Redial using an analogue trunk is not available.)
• Interrupt Redial
When an outside party or seized trunk is busy, a user can attempt to redial the number by pressing the
REDIAL button without going on-hook. This can be performed several times without having to go on-hook.
• Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button
Pressing the REDIAL button on a display PT while on-hook can display the Outgoing Call Log. System
programming is required for this operation.
• If the Outgoing Call Log is used to redial an outside party, or a number already stored in the Outgoing Call
Log is manually redialled again, the number will be stored in the call log multiple times. However, calls
made using the REDIAL button are not stored in the Outgoing Call Log again.
• It is possible to change the number of records that can be stored at each extension through system
programming.

→ Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
→ Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval
→ Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
→ Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial
→ Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
→ Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
→ Redial—Call Log by Redial key
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory
106 Feature Guide


[205] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[206] Automatic Redial Interval


1.2.3 Redial
1.13.1 Using the Call Log
Feature Guide 107


Description
An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling for frequently dialled numbers which are stored
in the PBX extension data, or the PBX system data.
Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
Conditions
[General]
• Any number (e.g., telephone number, feature number) can be stored in a speed dialling number. A name
can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number through personal programming, and System
Speed Dialling number.
• Call Directory—Speed Dialling
Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display.
[Personal Speed Dialling]

• Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent the numbers from being
viewed at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock). In this case, the Incoming/Outgoing
Call Log displays and the SVM Log display are also locked, and the voice messages in the user’s message
box cannot be played back. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this
feature. (® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))
[System Speed Dialling]

• TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling
It is possible to override the TRS/Barring using the System Speed Dialling. (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring))
• System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
Pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button on a display DPT while on-hook can display the System Speed
Dialling Directory.

→ System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
→ Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial

[509] TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling

108 Feature Guide


1.2.2 Easy Dialling
1.13.2 Using the Directories
3.3 Customising Your System (System Programming)
Feature Guide 109

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling

Description
An extension user can access an extension or feature by simply dialling a 1-4 or 1-8 digit Quick Dialling number.
Conditions
• Quick Dialling is convenient in cases such as the following:
– Room service calls in a hotel
– Calling another branch via the public network.
• Quick Dialling numbers follow the flexible numbering plan.
(® 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering)
• The following example shows how Quick Dialling numbers can be stored and utilised:
Location No. Quick Dialling No. Desired Number
Quick Dialling 01 110 9110 (Trunk Call)

Quick Dialling 02 5 3016 (Room Service)
Quick Dialling 03 2011 90123456789 (Another Branch)
: : :

4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

1.2.2 Easy Dialling
110 Feature Guide

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Description
An extension user can set his extension to automatically dial a preprogrammed telephone or extension number
whenever he goes off-hook. This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
If the Hot Line feature is set, a dial tone is generated for a specified Waiting time assigned through system
programming when the user goes off-hook. During the Waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding
the Hot Line feature. If no number is dialled, the preprogrammed number will automatically start being dialled.
Conditions
• Capable Telephone
PT, SLT, T1-OPX, and PS

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
→ Pickup Dial Set
→ Pickup Dial No.
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
→ Pickup Dial Set
→ Pickup Dial No.

[204] Hot Line Waiting Time


1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide 111

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
1.7 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary

Directory Number (SDN) Features
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory

Number (SDN) Extension
Description
Primary Directory Number (PDN) buttons and Secondary Directory Number (SDN) buttons are ideal for use
between bosses and secretaries. When a call (intercom or trunk) arrives at a PDN button on the boss’s
extension, the call will ring and the LED of the SDN button will flash at the secretary’s extension as well,
indicating that an incoming call is arriving at the boss’s extension. In addition, caller information (e.g., Caller
ID) of the incoming call will appear on the secretary’s extension. The secretary can answer the call for the boss
by simply pressing the SDN button. Delayed ringing can be set for a PDN or SDN button.
A secretary can hold a call answered on the SDN button, and the boss can retrieve the held call simply by
pressing the PDN button, like when answering a call with an S-CO button. In addition, a secretary can transfer
calls from an SDN button or other button (e.g., S-CO button) to the boss’s extension with a simple operation,
like when using a DSS button.
An extension can have several SDN buttons, each registered to a different boss’s extension. However, only
one SDN button can be registered for a single boss at each extension. An extension can have up to eight PDN
buttons. PDN buttons can simplify the use of an extension because both intercom and trunk calls can be made
and received at a PDN button.
Making Calls with an SDN Button

When Standard SDN Key mode is assigned to an SDN extension (secretary) through COS programming, SDN
extensions (secretaries) can make calls for PDN extensions (bosses) on the SDN button. For example, a boss
can ask a secretary to make a call and put the call on hold, after which, the boss can retrieve the held call.
Through COS programming, it is possible to allow an SDN extension to make calls using the COS of the PDN
extension. All other settings that are available when using the Walking COS feature are also applied (®
1.9.5 Walking COS).
SDN Direct Dial
An SDN extension can call a PDN extension or transfer a call to a PDN extension using an SDN button.
In this case:
– Only the PDN extension rings (i.e., other SDN extensions do not ring).
– The delayed ringing and DND settings of the PDN extension are ignored.
Depending on the mode selected through COS programming, SDN Direct Dial is performed in one of two ways,
as follows:
– Enhanced DSS Key mode: pressing the SDN button once.
– Standard SDN Key mode: pressing the SDN button twice (a dial tone is heard the first time the SDN button
is pressed).
Calls answered using the SDN button can be transferred to the PDN extension by simply pressing the SDN
button once, regardless of the mode.
LED Indication
The LED patterns and the corresponding status of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows:
Light Pattern PDN Button Status SDN Button Status
Off This extension is idle. The corresponding PDN extension is idle.
112 Feature Guide

Light Pattern PDN Button Status SDN Button Status
Green on The extension is on a call using the PDN The extension is on a call using the SDN
button. button.
Slow green A call is on hold using the PDN button. A call is on hold using the SDN button.
flashing
Moderate • A call on a PDN button is on • A call answered using the SDN button
green Exclusive Call Hold or consultation is on Exclusive Call Hold or consultation
flashing hold. hold.
• The PDN extension is adding a • The SDN extension is adding a member
member to a conference or using the to a conference, or using the line for an
line for an Unattended Conference, Unattended Conference.
on a PDN button.
Rapid green An incoming call is arriving at this Receiving Hold Recall or automatic callback
flashing extension. ringing from a call answered using the SDN
button.
Red on A corresponding SDN extension is: The corresponding PDN extension or
• on a call. another corresponding SDN extension is:
• holding the line using Exclusive Call • on a call.
Hold or consultation hold. • holding the line using Exclusive Call
• adding a member to a conference. Hold or consultation hold.
• using the line for an Unattended • adding a member to a conference.
Conference. • using the line for an Unattended
• receiving Hold Recall or automatic Conference.
callback ringing. • receiving an incoming call directed only
to the PDN extension (e.g., callback
ringing).
Slow red A call is on hold by a corresponding SDN A call is on hold by the corresponding PDN
flashing extension. extension or another corresponding SDN
extension.
Rapid red A call is arriving at an Incoming Call The corresponding PDN extension is
flashing Distribution (ICD) group in Ring receiving an incoming call.
Distribution method that this extension is
a member of.
When multiple calls are on a PDN extension, the LED pattern that appears on the corresponding SDN buttons
is displayed according to the following priority:
Receiving an incoming call ® holding a call ® on a call ® idle
For example, if a PDN extension receives an incoming call while on a call, the LEDs on the corresponding
SDN extensions will show the incoming call.
However, if an SDN extension is handling a call using the SDN button (e.g., on a call, has a call on hold, etc.),
the status of that call will be displayed on the SDN button, regardless of the call status of the PDN extension.
Example of a Secretary Handling Calls for Multiple Bosses

The following example shows the LED patterns of the PDN and SDN buttons of each extension and how calls
can be handled.
Feature Guide 113

1. A Call From 111-1111 Arrives at Ext. 101

Extn. 101 (Boss) Extn. 102 (Boss) Extn. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons
(Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off)
(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
(Off) (Rapid Red (Rapid Red
(Extn. 102) (Extn. 101) Flashing) (Extn. 101) Flashing)
(Rapid Green (Off) (Off)
Flashing)
2. The Call From 111-1111 is Answered by Ext. 103

(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
(Off) (Red On) (Green On)
(Extn. 102) (Extn. 101) (Extn. 101)
(Red On) (Off) (Off)
3. The Call From 111-1111 is On Hold by Ext. 103

(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
(Off) (Slow Red (Slow Green
(Slow Red (Off) (Off)
Flashing)
4. The Call Held by Ext. 103 is Answered by Ext. 101

(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102)
(Off) (Off) (Off)
(Off) (Red On) (Red On)
(Extn. 102) (Extn. 101) (Extn. 101)
(Green On) (Off) (Off)

(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102)
Flashing) (Off) (Rapid Red (Rapid Red
(Green On) (Off) (Off)
114 Feature Guide


(Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Rapid Red
(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102) Flashing)
Flashing) (Rapid Red (Rapid Red (Rapid Red
(Extn. 102) Flashing) (Extn. 101) Flashing) (Extn. 101) Flashing)
(Green On) (Rapid Green (Off)
Flashing)
7. The Call From 333-3333 is Answered by Ext. 103

(Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Green On)
(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102)
Flashing) (Red On) (Rapid Red (Rapid Red
(Green On) (Red On) (Off)
8. The Call From 333-3333 is Transferred by Ext. 103 to Extension 102

(Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) (Moderate
(Extn. 103) (Extn. 103) (Extn. 102) Green Flashing)
Flashing) (Red On) (Rapid Red (Rapid Red
(Green On) (Rapid Green (Off)
Flashing)
Conditions
[General]
• A flexible button of a PT and a PS can be customised as a PDN or SDN button. A flexible button on a DSS
Console can be customised as an SDN button.
• An extension can have up to eight PDN buttons.
• If none of an extension’s PDN buttons are idle, the extension will not receive incoming calls, including Call
Waiting. Therefore, it is strongly recommended for PDN extensions to have at least three PDN buttons.
• Through COS programming, it is possible to select whether extensions can create SDN buttons on their
own extensions using PT programming.
• Up to eight different extensions can assign SDN buttons corresponding to the same PDN extension.
• When a PDN extension has an idle CO button or ICD Group button, calls will arrive on the following buttons
according to the following priority:
– Incoming intercom calls to an ICD group: ICD Group button ® PDN button
– Incoming trunk calls: S-CO button ® G-CO button ® L-CO button ® PDN button
– Incoming trunk calls to an ICD group: ICD Group button ® S-CO button ® G-CO button ® L-CO button
® PDN button
• When multiple calls of the same status (e.g., on hold) are on a PDN extension, the status of the newest
call will be displayed on the corresponding SDN extensions. For example, if a PDN extension has two calls
ringing, an SDN extension will answer the call that arrived at the PDN extension last, when pressing the
SDN button.
• When a PDN extension is a member of an ICD group in Ring Distribution method, and an incoming call
arrives at the ICD group, the incoming call status will not appear on the LEDs of the corresponding SDN
extensions (® 1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY).
Feature Guide 115

• If none of an extension’s PDN buttons are idle, DSS buttons of other extensions registered to the PDN
extension will turn on red.
• Ring Tone Pattern
Through system programming, each extension can set ring tone patterns for PDN buttons. Ring tone
patterns can be assigned separately for each SDN button.
• Outgoing Line Preference
When "PDN" is selected as the outgoing line preference, outgoing calls will originate on the first available
PDN button (® 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing).
• Incoming Line Preference
Through system programming, it is possible for only incoming calls arriving at PDN buttons to be answered
simply by going off-hook, by selecting "PDN" as the incoming line preference (® 1.4.1.2 Line Preference
—Incoming). This prohibits calls that arrive on non-PDN buttons (e.g., an SDN button) to be answered
when going off-hook.
• Walking Extension
For PDN extensions, the Walking Extension feature can only be used when all PDN buttons are idle
(® 1.28.3 Walking Extension Features).
• Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
If a PS has PDN or SDN buttons, Wireless XDP Parallel mode cannot be assigned to that PS (®
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode).
• OHCA/Whisper OHCA
A PDN extension cannot receive OHCA or Whisper OHCA, unless the call is made using a corresponding
SDN button (® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA), ® 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA).
• Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
It is not possible to temporarily change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice)
when calling a PDN extension, unless the call is made using a corresponding SDN button (®
1.5.3 Intercom Call).
[Delayed Ringing]
• The same delayed ringing setting is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension. Delayed ringing can be
assigned separately for each SDN button.
• Through system programming, it is possible to select whether caller information (such as Caller ID) is
shown immediately on a PS when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
• Caller information (such as Caller ID) is not shown immediately on a PT when a call is received while
delayed ringing is set.
• SDN buttons can be set to not ring (only flash) for incoming calls. However, this setting is not available for
PDN buttons.
• The forward no answer timer starts when a PDN extension starts ringing.

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— PDN Delayed Ringing
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)
→ Extension Number (for SDN)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— PDN Delayed Ringing
→ Type
116 Feature Guide


→ Type
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)

1.20.3 LED Indication

1.4.2 Holding a Call
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Remote COS Access)
Feature Guide 117

1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
1.8 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Description
If the destination or line is busy when a call is made, an extension user can set the Automatic Callback Busy
feature. The PBX will monitor the status of the destination or trunk and, when it becomes available, will send
a callback ringing to the calling extension to inform the user. After the extension answers the callback ringing,
the previously dialled extension number is automatically redialled, or the trunk is automatically seized.
Conditions
• If the callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds, the callback is cancelled.
• If the extension hears a busy tone before dialling the telephone number, only the trunk or trunk group is
reserved. After answering the callback ringing, the extension should dial the telephone number.
• An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy. The last setting is effective.
• Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously.
However, a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension.
Callback ringing will be sent to extensions in the order that the feature was set. In other words, the extension
that set the feature first will receive a callback ringing first.
• This feature cannot be used for calls to a VPS or an ISDN extension.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Automatic Callback Busy

118 Feature Guide

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Description
Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Executive Busy Override Deny:

It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user.
Conditions
• COS programming determines the extension users who can use Executive Busy Override and set
Executive Busy Override Deny.
• This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions:
a. Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security (® 1.11.5 Data Line Security) has been set.
b. While being monitored by another extension (® 1.8.3 Call Monitor).
c. While receiving OHCA (® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper OHCA (®
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA).
d. During a Conference call (® 1.14.1 Conference Features).
e. During a doorphone call (® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call).
f. While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
g. During Consultation Hold.
• This feature is not available for a trunk-to-trunk call via DISA.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override
→Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
→Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny

[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny


1.8.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)
Feature Guide 119

1.8.3 Call Monitor
1.8.3 Call Monitor

Description
Allows an extension user to listen to a busy extension user’s existing conversation. The user can hear the
conversation, but the user’s voice is not heard. If desired, interrupting the call to establish a three-party
conference call is available.
Conditions
• COS programming determines extension users who can use this feature.
• This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside
party.
• This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions:
a. Executive Busy Override Deny (® 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override) or Data Line Security (®
1.11.5 Data Line Security) has been set.
b. While receiving OHCA (® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper OHCA (®
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA).
c. During a Conference call (® 1.14.1 Conference Features).
d. During a doorphone call (® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call).
e. While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
f. During Consultation Hold.
• This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation (®
1.20.1 Fixed Buttons and 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons):
– FLASH/RECALL button
– HOLD button
– TRANSFER button
– CONF (Conference) button
– DSS button
– EFA button
– Two-way Record button
– Two-way Transfer button
– One-touch Two-way Transfer button
– Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Monitor
→Option 2— Data Mode
→Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny

120 Feature Guide

1.8.3 Call Monitor

Feature Guide 121

1.8.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY

Description
When attempting to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), an extension user can send a
Call Waiting indication to the busy extension (Call Waiting). The notification receiving method depends on the
called extension’s personal setting and the telephone type:
Notification Receiving Method Description & Reference
Call Waiting Tone Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy extension.
® 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

Off-hook Call Announcement Talk with the busy extension using the built-in speaker and
(OHCA) microphone of the called extension while the existing call is made
using the handset.
® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Whisper OHCA Send a spoken message to a busy extension that will be heard
directly by only the called extension user, through the handset,
without interrupting the ongoing conversation.
® 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Conditions
• Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone, OHCA, Whisper OHCA, or none of these.
• OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension.
• OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types. In such cases, the Call Waiting tone will
be sent to the called extension.
Called Extension’s Call Waiting Mode

Calling
Extension’s
OFF ON
OHCA COS
Mode
Cancel Call Waiting Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA
Disable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone
disabled
Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA (or
disabled (or Call Waiting Call Waiting tone)
tone)
• The notification receiving methods (Call Waiting tone, OHCA, and Whisper OHCA) are available only when
the called extension is having a conversation with another party. If the called party is not yet connected
with the other party (e.g., still ringing, on hold, etc.), the calling extension will hear a ringback tone and will
be kept waiting until the called extension becomes available to receive the call waiting notification.
• If none of these notification receiving methods (Call Waiting tone, OHCA, or Whisper OHCA) are set at the
called party’s extension, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
122 Feature Guide


1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Feature Guide 123

1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), the Call Waiting
tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting.
Conditions
• This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling
extension will hear a ringback tone.
• Call Waiting tone can be selected (Tone 1 or Tone 2) through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone
Type Selection).

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display

124 Feature Guide

1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Description
An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built-in speaker and microphone of the called
party’s PT. If the existing call is using a handset, a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and
microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties.
Conditions
• COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature.
• This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones:
– KX-T7625, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KX-T7636, KX-DT333, KX-DT343, KX-DT346
– KX-T7536
– KX-T7436
– KX-T7235 (except KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE)
• If the KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE are connected to the PBX, the OHCA feature for the KX-T7235 should be
disabled through system programming.
• The OHCA feature cannot be used in the following cases:
a. COS or called extension’s telephone type is not available for this feature.
b. The called extension (DPT) is connected to a PC (PC Console or PC Phone) via the USB Module.
c. The called extension (DPT) is in the Digital XDP connection.
The Call Waiting tone is sent to the called extension. (® 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone)
• While an extension is receiving OHCA, if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers
the current intercom call or trunk call, OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to
hear a ringback tone.
• While an extension is receiving OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold, the
called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— OHCA / Whisper OHCA


Feature Guide 125

1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Description
An extension user can send a spoken message to a busy extension that will be heard directly by only the called
extension user, through the handset, without interrupting the ongoing conversation. The caller cannot hear the
ongoing conversation or the called extension user’s reply, unless the called extension user puts the current
party on hold and switches to the waiting caller.
Conditions
• COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature.
• This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones:
– KX-DT300 series
– KX-T7600 series
– KX-T7500 series
– KX-T7400 series (except KX-T7451)
– IP-PT
• If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type, the Call Waiting tone will be
sent to the called extension. (® 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone)
• If the called extension does not use a KX-DT300, KX-T7600, KX-T7500, or KX-T7400 series telephone or
an IP-PT, but forces Whisper OHCA, the announcement may be heard by the other party.
• It is possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone. However, it may not work properly. (e.g., The
voice may be heard by the other party.)
• While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold
or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call, Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the calling
extension will start to hear a ringback tone.
• While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on
hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— OHCA / Whisper OHCA


126 Feature Guide

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Features

Description
TRS/Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming. It is applied
when the user goes off-hook, a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk.
Each COS is programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
There are seven levels available. Level 1 is the highest level and level 7 is the lowest. That is, level 1 allows
all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls. Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining
preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables.
Denied Code Tables

An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable
Denied Code Tables. If the leading digits of the dialled number (not including the Trunk Access number) are
not found in the table, the call is made. There are five Denied Code Tables, one for each of Levels 2 through
6 respectively.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited. These numbers are defined as denied
codes.
Exception Code Tables

These tables are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the applicable Denied Code
Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call is made.
There are five Exception Code Tables, for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes. These numbers are defined
as exception codes.
TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling

If the call is made using System Speed Dialling, the call can override the TRS/Barring. Each COS is
programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for System Speed Dialling.
Once this feature is set, it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for
System Speed Dialling. Any extension which sets Extension Dial Lock can also make a call using System
Speed Dialling.
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
® [300] TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling
TRS/Barring Level
The TRS/Barring level is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception
Code Tables.
As shown in the table below, the Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it,
and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.
Denied Code Tables*1 Exception Code Tables*2
Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable

Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6
Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 through 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6
Feature Guide 127

Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 through 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6

Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Table for Level 6
*1
® 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code— Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [301] TRS/Barring Denied Code
*2
® 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code— Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [302] TRS/Barring Exception Code
[Usage Example] Using this method, certain outgoing trunk calls (e.g., international/cellular phone/long
distance) can be restricted as in the example below:
Restricted Allowed
Level 1 No restriction
• International Calls • Countries where Clients are
Located
Level 2
• Cellular Phone Calls
(Boss)
• Long Distance Calls
• Local Calls
• International Calls • Boss’s Cellular Phone
Level 3
• Cellular Phone Calls • Long Distance Calls
(Secretary)
• Local Calls
• International Calls • Local Calls
Level 4
• Cellular Phone Calls
(Operator)
• Long Distance Calls
: : :
In this example, a level 1 user can make any trunk calls. A level 2 user can make international calls to the
countries where clients are located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A level 3 user
cannot make international/cellular phone calls apart from to the boss’s cellular phone, but can make long
distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international/cellular phone/long distance calls, but can
make local calls.
To set TRS/Barring as in the example above, it is necessary to programme the Denied Code and Exception
Code Tables as follows:
Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables

Leading number to deny Leading number for countries
Level 2 00 00xx
international calls to be allowed
Leading number to deny 090xxxxx Boss’s cellular phone number
Level 3 090
cellular phone calls xxx
Leading number to deny long
Level 4 0 – Not required
distance calls
: : :
128 Feature Guide

[Programming Example: COS Settings]
Level for Time Mode*1

Level for System Speed
COS No.
Dialling*2
1 1 1 1 6 1
2 2 2 2 6 1
: : : : : :
*1
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [501] TRS/Barring Level
*2
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling
® [509] TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling
Feature Guide 129

[Flowchart]
An extension user makes

a trunk call.
Is the call made by System Yes

Speed Dialling ?
No
No Is TRS/Barring Override by
System Speed Dialling enabled?
Yes
Checks the Checks the TRS/Barring
TRS/Barring level for level for System Speed
the time mode of the Dialling of the
extension's COS. extension's COS.
Level 7 Level 1
What is the TRS/Barring level?
Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Is the dialled number found in No

applicable Denied Code Tables?
Yes
Is the dialled number found in Yes

applicable Exception Code Tables?
No
The call is denied. The call is made.

The user hears reorder tone.
TRS/Barring Settings for Each Level

Through system programming, it is possible to select a different method of TRS/Barring. With this method,
each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level.
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)

Level 2 Table for Level 2 Table for Level 2
130 Feature Guide


*1
® 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code— Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [301] TRS/Barring Denied Code
*2
® 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code— Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [302] TRS/Barring Exception Code
[Usage Example] Using this method, it is possible to restrict certain outgoing trunk calls (e.g., international/
cellular phone/long distance) on a department basis, as follows:
Restricted Allowed
Level 1 No restriction
• International Calls • Country where Factory is Located
Level 2 • Cellular Phone Calls
(Engineering) • Long Distance Calls
• Local Calls
• Cellular Phone Calls • Company Cellular Phone
Level 3 • International Calls
(Overseas Sales) • Long Distance Calls
• Local Calls
• International Calls • Cities where Clients are Located
Level 4
• Long Distance Calls • Cellular Phone Calls
(Accounting)
• Local Calls
: : :
In this example, a level 1 user can make any trunk calls. A level 2 user can only make international calls to the
country where the factory is located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A level 3 user
can only make cellular phone calls to the company cellular phone, and can also make any international/long
distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international calls or most long distance calls, but can
make long distance calls to cities where clients are located, cellular phone calls and local calls.
To set TRS/Barring as in the example above, it is necessary to programme the Denied Code and Exception
Code Tables as follows:

Leading number to deny Leading number for country to
Level 2 00 00xx
international calls be allowed
Leading number to deny Leading number for cellular
Level 3 090 090xxxx
cellular phone calls phones to be allowed
Feature Guide 131

03 Long distance numbers for

Leading number to deny both
cities to be allowed, and
Level 4 0 international and long 06
leading number of cellular
distance calls
090 phones
: : :
Conditions
CAUTION
The software contained in the TRS/Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded
to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are
established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these
codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
• A COS should be assigned for each extension.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
® [602] Class of Service
• TRS/Barring checks are applied to the following:
– ARS
– Trunk Access (Idle Line/Trunk Group/S-CO Line)
• It is programmable whether " " or "#" is checked by the TRS/Barring. This is useful in preventing
unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges.
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check for Dial "* #"
• It is programmable whether TRS/Barring checks the digits dialled after the External Feature Access during
a trunk call. (® 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA
• Host PBX Access Code/Special Carrier Access Code
TRS/Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code (® 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code
(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or a Special Carrier Access code (®
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code) in the following cases:
Stored
Type Not stored
Found Not found
Host PBX Access Deletes the code. A The call is made TRS/Barring checks
Code TRS/Barring check is (excepted from TRS/ the whole number.
carried out on the Barring).
following digits.
Special Carrier Deletes the code. A TRS/Barring checks TRS/Barring checks
Access Code TRS/Barring check is the whole number. the whole number.
carried out on the
following digits.
• ARS
132 Feature Guide

If ARS is applied to a dialled number, TRS/Barring will check the user-dialled number (not the modified
number by ARS). In this case, a Host PBX Access code and/or a Special Carrier Access code will not be
checked.
• Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation
The dialling of digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call. If the number of dialled digits
exceeds the preprogrammed limitation, the line will be disconnected.
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
• It is possible to select through system programming whether the trunk is disconnected when the Inter-digit
time expires without the TRS/Barring check being completed.
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check
– If no disconnection is chosen, the TRS/Barring check will also be performed after the Inter-digit time
expires.
– If disconnection is chosen, the line will be disconnected when the trunk Inter-digit time expires. This
also prevents EFA from being used.
This setting applies to all trunks.
• A TRS/Barring level can be changed by some features. The priority of features, when multiple features are
used, is as follows:
1. Dial Tone Transfer (® 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer)
2. Budget Management (® 1.9.2 Budget Management)
3. TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling
4. Walking COS/Verification Code Entry
(® 1.9.5 Walking COS, 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry)
5. Extension Dial Lock

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
→ TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
→ Type
→ Type
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

[300] TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling
[301] TRS/Barring Denied Code
[302] TRS/Barring Exception Code
[501] TRS/Barring Level
[509] TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling
[602] Class of Service
Feature Guide 133


1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
2.2.4 Time Service
134 Feature Guide

1.9.2 Budget Management

Description
Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on an extension basis. If the amount of the call charge
reaches the limit, an extension user cannot make further trunk calls. An extension assigned as the manager
may increase the limit or clear the amount of the call charge.
Conditions
• If the limit is reached, TRS/Barring Level 7 is applied. (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring))
• Budget Management for Verified Call
If an extension user makes a trunk call with a verification code, the call charge will be added to the total
for the verification code (not the extension). (® 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry) Each verification code can
be assigned a call charge limit.
• Budget Management for Walking COS
If an extension user makes a trunk call from an extension using the Walking COS feature, the call charge
will be added to the extension of the extension user (not the extension that the call was made on).
(1.9.5 Walking COS)
• Pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) service is required for this feature.
• It is possible to select whether to disconnect the line (disconnect mode) after a warning tone or only to
send a warning tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a
conversation.
• When multiple extension users are using the same verification code or the same extension (through the
use of Walking COS) simultaneously, each caller can have access to the total remaining budget of the
extension or verification code.

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Charge— Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit

3.2.2 Manager Programming
Feature Guide 135


Description
An extension user can change the TRS/Barring level of the telephone (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
Barring (Barring)) so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls. An extension personal
identification number (PIN) is used to unlock the telephone (® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification
Number (PIN)). This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
Conditions
• This feature also restricts changing the FWD destination. (® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
• Remote Extension Dial Lock
Overrides Extension Dial Lock. If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Dial Lock
on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it. If a manager
extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user, the extension will be unlocked.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
• TRS/Barring Level
COS programming determines the TRS/Barring level for Extension Dial Lock.

→ Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
→ Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
→ Remote Extension Dial Lock On
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level on Extension Lock

[510] TRS/Barring Level for Extension Dial Lock


1.6.4 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock)
2.1.1 Extension Control
136 Feature Guide

1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Description
An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS/Barring level (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
Barring (Barring)) for an extension user temporarily. After that, the extension user can make his call.
[Example] An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing calls (e.g., international
calls).
(3) Make a trunk call
(2) Change
TRS/Barring level
Toll Restriction/
Call Barring button
(1) Call
Guest Room Manager
(Trunk call
restricted)
Conditions
• The modified TRS/Barring level only applies to the next one call placed at the user’s extension.
• Toll Restriction/Call Barring Button
A manager extension must store the desired TRS/Barring level in the Toll Restriction/Call Barring button.
A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction/Call Barring button.

→ Type
→ Type
→ Type


2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer)
Feature Guide 137

1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.5 Walking COS

Description
A user can enter his extension number and extension personal identification number (PIN) (® 1.28.1 Extension
Personal Identification Number (PIN)) at another extension, to make the following types of call using his Class
of Service, including TRS level, overriding the other extension’s Class of Service.
• Trunk call
• TIE line call
• Intercom call
• External Relay Control (® 1.17.9 External Relay Control)
After performing Walking COS, the following features are also available for the specified extension:
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (® 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
(DND))
• Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (® 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out)
• Absent Message setting (® 1.19.2 Absent Message)
• Extension Dial Lock (® 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock)
• Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service)
• CLIP number setting (CLIP ID) (® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP))
Conditions
• When a trunk call is made using Walking COS:
– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (® 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS))
– the budget of the specified extension is applied (® 1.9.2 Budget Management)
– the Itemised Billing code of the specified extension is applied (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS))
– the specified extension number is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the extension
number of the actual extension used (® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
• Walking COS is also available through DISA. (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
• Extension PIN
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (® 1.28.1 Extension
Personal Identification Number (PIN)) If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected.
• This feature can not be used for extensions which the extension being operated is prevented from calling
by Internal Call Block. (® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block)

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation
by Other Extension
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
138 Feature Guide

1.9.5 Walking COS

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
Feature Guide 139

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

Description
An extension user can enter a verification code when calling from his own or any other extension, to change
the TRS/Barring level (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) or to identify the call for accounting
and billing purposes. A verification code personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature.
Conditions
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs regularly.
• When a trunk call is made using Verification Code Entry:
– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (® 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS))
– the budget of the specified extension is applied (® 1.9.2 Budget Management)
– the Itemised Billing code of the specified extension is applied (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS))
– + verification code is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the extension number of
the actual extension used (® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
• Verification Code Entry through DISA
This feature is also available through DISA. (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
• Verification Code PIN
A verification code PIN must be assigned for each verification code through system programming or
through manager programming.
• Verification Code PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the wrong PIN is entered a
preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN for the verification code will be locked. Only an
extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
• Budget Management for Verified Calls
A limit can be assigned to the total of all call charges for each verification code.
[Example of Verification Codes and Their Programming]

Itemised
Location Code*1 Name*2 PIN*3 COS*4 Billing Code Budget*6
for ARS*5
0001 1111 Tom Smith 1234 1 2323 5000Euro
0002 2222 John White 987654321 3 4545 3000Euro
0
: : : : : : :
*1
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Verification Code
® [120] Verification Code
*2
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— User Name
® [121] Verification Code Name
*3
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Verification Code PIN
140 Feature Guide

® [122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)

*4
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— COS Number
® [123] Verification Code COS Number
*5
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemised Billing Code for ARS
*6
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
→Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
→Option 3— Charge Limit
→Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
→Option 3— Charge Limit
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code

[120] Verification Code
[121] Verification Code Name
[122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)
[123] Verification Code COS Number


Feature Guide 141

1.10 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

Description
ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to
preprogrammed settings. The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier.
[Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart]

The numbers X in the flowchart correspond to the [Programming Procedures] on the following pages.
A trunk call is made.
No (Normal Trunk Access)

Is the ARS mode ( 1 ) enabled?
Sends the telephone

Yes number to the user-
selected carrier.
Is the dialled number found in the Yes
Leading Number Exception Table ( 2 )?
No
Is the dialled number found in the No

Leading Number Table ( 3 )?
Yes
Checks the Routing Plan Table ( 4 )
to determine which carrier to use.
Is the carrier ( 6 ) found in the No

appropriate time block ( 5 )?
Yes
Is there an available No
trunk group ( 11 )?
Because all No
Yes
trunks are busy?
Modifies the dialled number by Yes
removing the digits ( 9 ) and Is normal (default)
Yes Trunk Access
following the modify commands ( 12 ).
allowed?
No
Sends the
Sends the modified number Sends a Sends a telephone number
to the trunk. busy tone. reorder tone. by the Idle Line
Access.
[Programming Procedures]
1. ARS Mode 1 Assignment
142 Feature Guide

It is possible to select whether ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line
Access method or when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method. (® 1.5.5.3 Trunk
Access)
® 10.1 [8-1] System Setting— ARS Mode
® [320] ARS Mode
2. Leading Number Exception Table 2 Assignment
Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature.
® 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
® [325] ARS Exception Number
2 ARS Leading Number Exception Table
Location Leading No.
No. Exception
001 033555
002 06456
: :
3. Leading Number Table 3 Assignment

Store the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading number that will be routed by the ARS feature.
In this table, the Routing Plan (refer to "4. Routing Plan Table 4 Assignment") is selected for each number.
The additional (remain) number of digits must be assigned only when "#", for example, is needed after a
dialled number. The "#" is added after the assigned number of digits of dialled number (excluding a leading
number).
® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Leading Number
® [321] ARS Leading Number
® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Additional Number of Digits
® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Routing Plan Number
® [322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number
3 ARS Leading Number Table
Location Leading Additional (Remain) Routing Plan

No. No. No. of Digits Table No.
0001 039 7 1
0002 03 0 4
0003 0444 5 5
: : : :
If a dialled number matches a leading number, the number will be modified according to the corresponding
Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional (remain)
number of digits are dialled.
If a dialled number matches multiple leading number entries, the leading number entry with the lowest
numbered location will have priority.
[Example]
Corresponding Routing
Dialled Number Description
Plan Table No.
039-123-4567 1 "039" is found in location 0001 and seven digits
(assigned additional [remain] number of digits in
location 0001) were dialled. The Routing Plan
Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit.
Feature Guide 143

Corresponding Routing
Dialled Number Description
Plan Table No.
039-654-321 1 "039" is found in location 0001 and the Inter-digit
time expired before the seventh digit is received.
The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected after the
Inter-digit time expired.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA /

Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
038 4 "03" is found in two locations (locations 0001 and
0002), so the PBX waits for the next digit "8".
"038" is not found in any location, then
"03" (location 0002) is selected. The Routing Plan
Table 4 is selected.
4. Routing Plan Table Assignment

4
Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority.
Time Table 5
As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day, four time blocks (Time-A through
D) can be programmed for each day of the week.
® 10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
® [330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table
Carrier Priority 6
Assign the appropriate carrier (refer to "5. Carrier Table 7 Assignment") and their priority in each time
block. The carrier is selected in the entry order (the order in which entries are listed).
® 10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
® [331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 only)
3 ARS Leading Number Table

Location Leading Additional Routing Plan
(Remain)
No. No. No. of Digits Table No. 4 ARS Routing Plan Table
0001 03 8 1 Routing Plan Table 1
: : : : 6 Carrier
5 Time Table
Priority 1 Priority 2 ...
SUN Time-A 9:00 1 (A telecom) 4 (D telecom) ...
Time-B 12:00 1 (A telecom) 2 (B telecom) ...
Time-C 15:00 1 (A telecom) 2 (B telecom) ...
Time-D 21:00 3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom) ...
: : : : : ...
SAT Time-A 9:00 3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom) ...
Time-B 12:00 3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom) ...
Time-C 15:00 3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom) ...
Time-D 21:00 3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom) ...
5. Carrier Table 7 Assignment

A specified number of carriers can be programmed. Assign the following items for each Carrier Table:
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier
Carrier Name 8 : Assign the carrier name.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Carrier Name
® [350] ARS Carrier Name
144 Feature Guide

Removed Number of Digits 9 : Assign the number of digits to remove from the beginning of the
user-dialled number.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Removed Number of Digits
® [352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access
Carrier Access Code 10 : Assign the code to access the carrier.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Carrier Access Code
® [353] ARS Carrier Access Code
Trunk Group 11 : Assign the trunk groups which connect to each carrier.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDE600)
® [351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access
Modify Command 12 : Assign the commands to modify the dialled number to access the carrier.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Modify Command
[Command Explanation]
Command Description
Number Add the number.

C Add the Carrier Access code.
P Analogue Line: Insert a pause.
ISDN/T1/E1 Line: Insert a pause and change to tone (DTMF) signal.
A Add the Authorisation code for a tenant ( 13 ).
G Add the Authorisation code for a trunk group ( 14 ).
I Add the Itemised Billing code ( 15 ).
H Add the dialled number after the digits are removed (Home position).
7 Carrier Table 1 2
8 Carrier Name A telecom B telecom
9 Removed Number of Digits 6 0
10 Carrier Access Code 0077 0088
11 Trunk Group 1, 2, 3 1, 2
12 Modify Command CH#12 CH
[Example]
Dialled number: 0123456789
(Trunk Access no. is ignored.)
Modification:
12
012345 6789 0077 6789 #12
H
9 Remove 6 digits. #12 Add the number.

C Add the Carrier Access
code ( 10 ).
6. Optional Assignment
Feature Guide 145

Authorisation Code for a Tenant 13
An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
Authorisation Code for a Trunk Group 14
An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier.
® 10.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG
Itemised Billing Code 15
An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension and for each verification code.
If a call is not made from an extension (e.g., DISA or TIE) and no verification code is used, the Itemised
Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verification code will be used.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemised Billing Code for ARS
Conditions
CAUTION
The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are
established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these
codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
• Dialled Number on SMDR
It is possible to choose to print either the user-dialled number or the modified number on SMDR through
system programming. (® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR))
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial
• ARS Data Download/Upload
It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming:
– 2 ARS Leading Number Exception Table
– 3 ARS Leading Number Table
– 4 ARS Routing Plan Table
® 2.5.9 Tool—Import
® 2.5.10 Tool—Export
This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge, and the updated data can be used for multiple
customers.
• A TRS/Barring check is done before ARS is applied. (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring))

2.5.9 Tool—Import
→ARS - Leading Digit
→ARS - Except Code
→ARS - Routing Plan
2.5.10 Tool—Export
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
146 Feature Guide

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code

8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemised Billing Code for ARS
Section 10 [8] ARS
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

[320] ARS Mode
[321] ARS Leading Number
[322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number
[325] ARS Exception Number
[330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table
[331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 only)
[350] ARS Carrier Name
[351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access
[352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access
[353] ARS Carrier Access Code

Feature Guide 147

1.11.1 Hands-free Operation
1.11 Conversation Features
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation

Description
A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons (e.g., REDIAL)
automatically activates hands-free mode.
Conditions
• PTs with the MONITOR Button
PTs with the MONITOR button can only dial in hands-free mode and cannot be used for hands-free
conversations.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Answer Mode
148 Feature Guide

1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor
1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

Description
A PT user can let others listen to the user’s conversation through the built-in speaker, during a conversation
using the handset.
Conditions
• Capable Telephones
– KX-DT300 series
– KX-T7600 series
– KX-T7500 series (display PTs only)
– KX-T7400 series (display PTs only)
– KX-NT series
• To enable this feature, system programming is required. If disabled, hands-free conversation is performed
instead.

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T75xx/T76xx

1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook Monitor)
Feature Guide 149

1.11.3 Mute
1.11.3 Mute
Description
During a conversation, a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult
privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker or the handset
receiver. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Mute, but cannot be heard.
Conditions
• This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.

1.4.6 Mute
150 Feature Guide

1.11.4 Headset Operation
1.11.4 Headset Operation

Description
This PBX allows the use of headset-compatible PTs. A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the
handset. This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: An optional headset.
• If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built-in speaker.
• To set headset mode on a DPT, use personal programming (Headset Operation) or press the Headset
button. To set headset mode on an APT, use the handset/headset selector provided on the set and/or on
the headset.
• Headset Button
A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as a Headset button. It is possible to assign a Headset button
to a flexible button on an APT, but the button will not function.
• Answer/Release Button
A flexible button can be customised as an Answer button or a Release button. Such buttons are useful for
headset operation. It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing an Answer button. While hearing
the Call Waiting tone during a conversation, pressing an Answer button enables one to answer the second
call by placing the current call on hold. Pressing a Release button enables one to disconnect the line during
or after conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.
• It is possible to switch from headset mode to hands-free mode or vice versa during a conversation by
pressing the Headset button.
• Headset users cannot use the following features:
– Automatic Redial (® 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial)
– Receiving OHCA (® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA))
– Receiving Whisper OHCA (® 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA)

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Headset OFF/ON
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port—IP-PT Registration and De-registration— Headset OFF/
ON
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type


1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
Feature Guide 151

1.11.5 Data Line Security
1.11.5 Data Line Security

Description
Setting Data Line Security at an extension protects communications between the extension and the other party
from being interrupted by signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override. An extension
that is using a connected data device (e.g., a fax machine) can set this feature to maintain secure data
transmission by preventing tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data Mode

1.8.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
152 Feature Guide

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Description
The FLASH/RECALL button (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode) or Terminate button (Terminate mode)
is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first. It
performs the same function as going on-hook and then going off-hook.
[Explanation of Each Mode]
Flash/Recall Mode: Disconnects the line. The extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last. For
example, if a trunk call is disconnected, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telephone
company.
Terminate Mode: Disconnects the line. The extension user hears the dial tone determined by the Line
Preference—Outgoing setting. (® 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing)
Conditions
• FLASH/RECALL Button Mode
One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming:
– Flash/Recall mode
– Terminate mode
– External Feature Access (EFA) mode. (® 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
• Terminate Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button.
• Disconnect Time (Only for Flash/Recall Mode)
The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk port.
• This feature outputs an SMDR call record (® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), restarts
the call timer, inserts the automatic pause, and checks the TRS/Barring level (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) again.
• The Terminate feature will be performed when pressing the FLASH/RECALL button regardless of the mode
that the FLASH/RECALL button has been set to, in the following situations:
– When a call is made using ARS. (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))
– When a trunk call is made with the INTERCOM button.
– When a trunk call is made with an ICD group button.

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Disconnect Time
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Disconnect Time
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Disconnect Time
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Disconnect Time
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port— Disconnect Time
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

[418] LCOT Disconnect Time
Feature Guide 153


154 Feature Guide

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Description
Normally, an extension user can only access features within the PBX. However, when performing External
Feature Access (EFA) the extension user performs features outside of the PBX, such as using the transfer
services of the telephone company or host PBX. When EFA is performed, the PBX sends a flash/recall signal
to the telephone company or the host PBX (® 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX)).
This feature is only available on trunk calls.
This feature is performed by pressing the EFA button or the FLASH/RECALL button that is set to EFA mode
(® 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate).
Conditions
• Flash/Recall Time
The Flash/Recall time can be assigned for each trunk port.
• EFA Button
A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button.
• It is possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number while the current call is placed on
Consultation Hold (e.g., is going to be transferred to an extension of the host PBX).
Consultation Hold: a condition that a party is in, when an extension is calling other parties in order to
perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.
In Consultation Hold, the original call is treated as if it is on hold, allowing the extension to call a third party
all on one line. In Call Hold, the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using
separate lines.

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Flash Time
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Flash Time
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Flash Time
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port— Flash Time
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature Access
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA

[417] LCOT Flash/Recall Time

Feature Guide 155


1.10.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
156 Feature Guide

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Description
Trunk calls are limited by the following features:
Feature Description
Extension-to-Trunk Call If a call between an extension user and an outside party is

Duration established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer
selected for each trunk group. Both parties will hear warning tones at
five-second intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit. When
the time limit expires, the line will be disconnected. COS
programming determines whether this feature is enabled or disabled.
Whether this feature applies to outgoing calls only, or to both outgoing
and incoming calls is determined through system programming.
Trunk-to-Trunk Call (except If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration
Unattended Conference Call) can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group.
Duration Both parties will hear warning tones at five-second intervals starting
15 seconds before the time limit. When the time limit expires, the line
will be disconnected.
If both parties involved in the trunk-to trunk call were established by
an extension (e.g., an extension makes a trunk call, then transfers
the call to an outside party), the time limit applied to the trunk call that
was made first will be used.
Budget Management When the preprogrammed call charge limit has been reached, an
extension user will hear 3 warning tones at five-second intervals. It is
programmable whether the line is disconnected after the third tone.
After the call has ended, the extension user cannot make further trunk
calls until the charge limit has been increased or cleared by an
extension assigned as a manager (® 1.9.2 Budget Management).
Dialling Digit Restriction While engaged in an incoming trunk call, the dialling of digits can be
during Conversation restricted. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation, the
line will be disconnected.
Conditions
• During an Unattended Conference Call, the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied. (®
1.14.1.2 Conference)
• When using LCO trunks that do not support Calling Party Control (CPC) signal detection (® 1.11.10 Calling
Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection), the Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration timer should not be disabled, as
automatic end of call detection cannot be performed.
® [473] Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration
• For SIP Extension users, the line will be disconnected without hearing any warning tones when the trunk
call limitation expires.

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
→ CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Feature Guide 157

→ Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

[472] Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration
[473] Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration
[502] Trunk Call Duration Limitation

158 Feature Guide

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

Description
Multiple telephones can be connected to the same port. This is useful to increase the number of telephones
without additional extension cards. The combinations and features of the parallelled telephones are described
below.
Features Descriptions Connections
Parallel Mode Parallel mode involves the connection of an SLT APT/DPT + SLT
to an APT or a DPT that is connected to a Super
PBX
Hybrid port. DPT SLT
When parallel mode is enabled, the two Extn. 101 Extn. 101
telephones function as follows:
• Both share the extension number of the APT Extn. 102
telephone connected directly to the PBX (main
telephone). SLT Extn. 102
• Either telephone can make or answer a call.
EXtra Device Port XDP mode involves the connection of an SLT to a DPT + SLT
(XDP) Mode DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port.
Unlike parallel mode, each telephone can act as a PBX
completely different extension with its own
extension number. (® 2.1.1 Extension Port DPT SLT
Configuration)
Extn. 101 Extn. 105
Digital XDP Digital XDP involves the connection of a DPT to a DPT + DPT
DPT that is connected to a DPT port or Super
Hybrid port. The DPT that is connected directly to PBX
the PBX is called the "master DPT", and the DPT Master Slave
connected to the master DPT is called the "slave DPT DPT
DPT".
Extn. 101 Extn. 201
Like XDP mode, each telephone can act as a
completely different extension with its own
extension number.
If a master DPT is connected to the PBX by a
Super Hybrid port (not a DPT port), a third DPT + DPT + SLT
telephone (SLT) can also be in parallel or XDP
PBX Master Slave
mode with the master DPT.
Digital XDP connection allows the number of DPT DPT
DPTs that the PBX supports to increase. Extn. 101 Extn. 201
SLT
Extn. 101 (in Parallel Mode)

or
Extn. 105 (in XDP Mode)
Feature Guide 159

Features Descriptions Connections
Wireless XDP For this connection, refer to 1.25.5 Wireless XDP APT/DPT/SLT + PS
Parallel Mode Parallel Mode.
PBX PT
Extn. 101
PS
Extn. 101
SLT
Extn. 102
PS
Extn. 102
Conditions
[APT + SLT]
• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is on a call, a three-party call is established. If one user goes
on-hook, the other user continues the call.
• An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is:
– playing background music (BGM)
– receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker.
• For users in Germany and Austria only
Although the APT will ring for incoming calls, the SLT will not ring.
For users in other countries/areas
Both the APT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls, and the PBX cannot refuse calls arriving at the SLT.
[DPT + SLT]
• It is programmable whether to have the DPT and SLT in either parallel or XDP mode. Regardless of the
mode, the SLT can be connected directly to the XDP port of the DPT or to a modular T-adapter with the
DPT.
• When in parallel mode, it is programmable whether the SLT rings for incoming calls.
Ring on: Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands-free Answerback mode (®
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback) or voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving Ring/Voice) (®
1.5.3 Intercom Call).
Ring off: Only the PT rings. However, the SLT can answer the call.
• Both telephones cannot engage in calls simultaneously. If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is
on a call, the call is switched to the former. The call is not switched in the following cases:
a. While being monitored by another extension. (® 1.8.3 Call Monitor)
b. While receiving OHCA (® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper OHCA. (®
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA)
c. During a Conference call (® 1.14.1 Conference Features).
d. While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
[DPT + DPT]
• Capable Telephones
160 Feature Guide

KX-DT300 series and KX-T7600 series, except KX-T7640. Note that the KX-T7667 can only be connected
as a slave DPT.
• The PSU-M or PSU-L must be installed when Digital XDP connection enables the number of DPTs to
exceed the maximum capacity that the PBX supports.
• When using Digital XDP connection, the following features cannot be used with either the master or slave
DPT:
a. OHCA: A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set.
b. USB Module/Bluetooth Module: The DPTs will not work correctly if a USB Module or Bluetooth Module
is connected. Do not connect USB Modules or Bluetooth Modules to the DPTs.
Note
Even if the slave DPT is disconnected, the OHCA feature and USB Module still cannot be used with the
master DPT. To use them, the master DPT must be disconnected from the PBX, and then reconnected.
[DPT + DPT + SLT]

• When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode, the SLT works as the parallel extension of
the master DPT.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
1.4.3 System Capacity
3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
KX-TDE600
3.10.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
3.10.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
→ XDP Mode
→ Parallel Telephone Ringing
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel

[600] EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode

1.8.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone)
Feature Guide 161

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Description
The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from the analogue
trunk when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks, the PBX monitors their state
and when CPC signal is detected from a line, disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone.
Conditions
• CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls, and for outgoing trunk calls.
• If your telephone company sends other signals similar to CPC, it is recommended not to enable CPC signal
detection on outgoing trunk calls.
• If a CPC signal is detected during a Conference call (® 1.14.1.2 Conference), that line is disconnected,
but the remaining parties stay connected.
• If a CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward
System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the line is disconnected.

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
→ CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming
→ CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— CPC Detection Time—Out, In
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port— CPC Detection Time—Out (DID), In (DID)

[413] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing
[414] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming
162 Feature Guide

1.12.1 Call Transfer
1.12 Transferring Features

Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party. The following features are
available:
Feature Transferring method
With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party.

Transfer is completed without an announcement.
Without Announcement After dialling the destination, while hearing a ringback tone, the
originator can replace the handset.
Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.

Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.
Feature Guide 163

Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement

If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the call will be
redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which transferred the call.
If the transfer destination has a destination set as Intercept Routing—No Answer, the call will be routed to that
destination.
A call is transferred without announcement.
Does the transferrer Yes

have a Transfer Recall
destination assigned?
No
Is the first transfer No

destination an extension?
Yes
Does the first transfer

No
destination have a destination set as
Intercept Routing No Answer?
Yes
Is the intercept destination No No Is the recall destination an

an extension, ICD group, or VM extension, ICD group, or VM
group? group?
Yes Yes
The set extension, ICD group, or The transferrer is The set extension, ICD group, or
VM group is memorised as the memorised as the VM group is memorised as the
Transfer Recall destination. Transfer Recall destination. Transfer Recall destination.
The Transfer Recall timer is started.
[Available destination]

PS ü
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT) ü (DPT only)*1
External Pager (TAFAS)
164 Feature Guide

DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
*1
If the transfer destination does not answer, the call is sent to Voice Mail and a message can be recorded in the mailbox of the transfer
destination.
Conditions
• When an extension is transferring a party to another destination, the party will be in consultation hold until
they reach the transfer destination.
Consultation Hold: a condition that a party is in, when an extension is calling other parties in order to
separate lines.
• If Music on Hold is enabled, music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred. (® 1.13.4 Music
on Hold) It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent.
• If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party, the call will be transferred to the
outside party. (® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
• COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party. COS can
also prohibit transferring to an extension of another PBX via the TIE line service using the PBX Code
method (Access with PBX Code) (® 1.30.1 TIE Line Service).
• One-touch Transfer
One-touch Transfer can be performed by pressing a One-touch Dialling button that has been assigned the
TRANSFER command and the telephone number of the transfer destination. This is useful for transferring
calls to an outside destination. (® 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features)
• Automatic Transfer by SDN Button or DSS Button
Pressing an SDN button or DSS button during a conversation with an extension or outside party can
automatically transfer the call to the specified destination (® 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension). It is possible through system programming to prevent this
feature from operating for extension to extension calls.
• When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, users are strongly recommended to perform a screened
transfer, so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands-free
Answerback when the extension user is absent.

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
→ DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call
→ Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination
Feature Guide 165

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination

[201] Transfer Recall Time
[503] Call Transfer to Trunk
[712] Music for Transfer


1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
166 Feature Guide

1.13.1 Call Hold
1.13 Holding Features
1.13.1 Call Hold

Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following features are available depending on the result.
Feature Description
Regular Hold Any extension can retrieve a held call.

Exclusive Call Hold Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it.
The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming. Pressing the HOLD button
again just after the first time alternates the mode between Regular and Exclusive Call Hold.
Conditions
• Call Hold Limitation
A PT user can hold one intercom call and/or multiple trunk calls at a time. An SLT user can hold either one
intercom call or one trunk call at a time. By using the Call Park feature, PT and SLT users can hold multiple
trunk calls and intercom calls simultaneously. (® 1.13.2 Call Park)
• Music on Hold
Music, if available, is sent to the held party. (® 1.13.4 Music on Hold)
• Hold Recall
If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, Hold Recall is heard at the extension
which put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the call is
automatically disconnected. This timer starts when Hold Recall activates.
• Automatic Call Hold
A PT user can be programmed holding of the current call when pressing another CO/ICD Group/
INTERCOM/PDN button, through system programming. If this feature is not enabled, the current call will
be disconnected.
[Example]
It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button, this puts the current intercom call
(on the INTERCOM button) on hold. To return to the held call, press the INTERCOM button.
• Call Hold Retrieve Deny
If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block), he
cannot retrieve the held call which the extensions made.
• SLT Hold Mode
It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods through
system programming:
Hold
Transfer to
Hold (to be Retrieved from Transfer to Trunk
Extension
Another Extension)*1
Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the Flashing the
hookswitch + hookswitch hookswitch
Mode 1 + Hold Feature No. + +
Going on-hook + Trunk Access No. Extension No.
Going on-hook
Feature Guide 167

1.13.1 Call Hold
Hold
Transfer to
Hold (to be Retrieved from Transfer to Trunk
Extension
Another Extension)*1
Mode 2 + Hold Feature No. + +
(Default) Hold Feature No. + Trunk Access No. Extension No.
+ Going on-hook
Going on-hook
+ Hold Feature No. + +
Mode 3 Hold Feature No. + Hold Feature No. Extension No.
+ Hold Feature No. +
Going on-hook + Trunk Access No.
Going on-hook
Mode 4 Hold Feature No. + Hold Feature No. Hold Feature No.
Going on-hook + Trunk Access No. Extension No.
Going on-hook
*1
These operations must be performed when the held call is intended to be retrieved from another extension using the holding
extension number.
If the following occurs frequently with an SLT, choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4":
a. When an SLT user receives a call, reorder tone is heard or nobody answers the call.
b. When an SLT user goes off-hook, reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone.
If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems,
choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4". Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number
is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2, Mode 3, and Mode 4.
• Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default. (® 3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).

→ Recall—Hold Recall
→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall
→ Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
→ Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
→ Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
→Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
→Option 1— PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
→Option 5— SLT—SLT Hold Mode

[200] Hold Recall Time
168 Feature Guide

1.13.1 Call Hold

Feature Guide 169

1.13.2 Call Park
1.13.2 Call Park

Description
An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX. The Call Park feature can be used
as a transferring feature; this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked
call can be retrieved by any extension user.
Conditions
• Automatic Call Park
It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically.
• Retry
If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park, the originator
will hear a busy tone. Retrying is possible while hearing the busy tone by selecting parking zone or a vacant
zone.
• Call Park Recall
If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, Call Park Recall will be heard at the
Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call. If the destination is engaged
in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.
• If a parked trunk call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (Default: 30 minutes), it is
automatically disconnected.
• Call Park Button
Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone.
A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button. It shows the current status of the preset parking
zone as follows:
Slow red flashing Parked in the preset parking zone

Off No parked call
• Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) Button

Pressing the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically. A
flexible button can be customised as the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
• Call Park Retrieve Deny
If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block), he
cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→ Recall—Call Park Recall
→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
→ Type
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
170 Feature Guide

1.13.2 Call Park

→ Type
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)


Feature Guide 171

1.13.3 Call Splitting
1.13.3 Call Splitting

Description
During a conversation, an extension user can call another extension while putting the original party on
Consultation Hold. The extension user can then alternate between the two parties and/or connect the original
party with the third party.
Conditions
• Consultation Hold: a condition that a party is in, when an extension is calling other parties in order to
separate lines.
• When the extension user is having a conversation with one party, the other party is in consultation hold.

1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
172 Feature Guide

1.13.4 Music on Hold

Description
Music can be played to a party that has been put on hold. The following audio sources are available:
a. External music source
b. Internal music source
c. Outgoing Message (OGM)
d. Tone
External music source 1 is assigned to BGM 1. External music source 2, or one of two internal music sources,
can be assigned to BGM 2. In addition, 6 OGMs can be assigned to BGMs 3 through 8.
For tenant users, each tenant can select one of the BGMs or the tone to use for Music on Hold.
[BGM Number and the Music Source]
BGM No. Music Source
1 External music port 1

External music port 2, internal music source 1, or internal music
2
source 2
3–8 OGM
Conditions
[General]
• Hardware Requirement: User-supplied music source (when an external music source is assigned)
• Volume Control
It is possible to change the volume of an internal and/or external music source.
• For tenants, the type of call determines which tenant’s music source is used, as follows:
Type Music Source
Incoming Intercom Calls/Outgoing Selected based on the tenant setting to which the
Calls extension user belongs.
Selected based on the tenant setting of the distribution
Incoming Trunk Calls
method (DIL/DID/DDI/MSN).
[Using OGMs for BGM]

• This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card. To increase the capacity of the
feature, it is possible to add an ESVM2 card or ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.
The MSG4 card is not recommended for use with Music on Hold.
• To use OGMs for BGM, the corresponding ESVM card/block's SVM Feature must be disabled, and MSG
Feature (OGM) enabled.
Feature Guide 173

• When an OGM is assigned to a BGM, the channel for that OGM becomes occupied and cannot be used
for other OGM features, even when no calling parties are listening to Music on Hold.
OPB3 Card OPB3 Card

IPCMPR/IPCEMPR Card ESVM4 Card ESVM4 Card
OGM Enabled/SVM Disabled SVM Enabled/OGM Disabled SVM Enabled/OGM Enabled
OGM for BGM2 SVM

SVM Block 1 Block 1 OGM
OGM for for other
other features SVM features
SVM Block 2 Block 2
ESVM4 Card
OGM Enabled/SVM Disabled
Only cards with OGM for BGM3
OGM Enabled and Empty Slot
SVM Disabled can OGM for BGM4
be used for Music on OGM for
Hold. other features
Empty Slot Empty Slot

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals
KX-TDE600

3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
→ SVM Feature
→ MSG Feature
→ SVM Feature
→ MSG Feature
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
→ MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1)

[710] Music Source Selection for BGM2
[711] Music on Hold
174 Feature Guide


Feature Guide 175

1.14.1 Conference Features
1.14 Conference Features
1.14.1.1 Conference Features—SUMMARY

Description
A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously. The following features
are available to establish a conference call:
Conference During a two-party conversation, an extension user can add other

parties to establish a conference call with up to eight parties.
® 1.14.1.2 Conference
Executive Busy Override An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a
three-party conference call.
® 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Privacy Release During a conversation with an outside party on the S-CO button, a
PT/PS user can allow another extension to join the conversation.
® 1.14.1.3 Privacy Release
Conditions
• This PBX supports a maximum of 32 parties being engaged in simultaneous conference calls. (e.g., 4
eight-party conferences, 8 three-party conferences + 2 four-party conferences, 10 three-party conferences)
176 Feature Guide

1.14.1.2 Conference
Description
An extension user can establish a conference call by adding additional parties to an already existing two-party
conversation. This PBX supports three-party through eight-party conference calls. Conferences with more than
four parties are only possible when a PT or PS user originates the conference.
Unattended Conference:
The conference originator can leave the conference and allow other parties to continue. Establishing an
Unattended Conference allows the originator to return to the conference. Unattended Conferences can only
be established by PT and PS users.
Conditions
• When an extension is establishing a conference call the original party is put on hold.
• CONF (Conference) Button
For a PT/PS which does not have the CONF button, a flexible button can be customised as the Conference
button.
• Unattended Conference Call Duration
The length of time that a conference call can remain unattended is restricted by the following timers:
– Callback Start Timer
– Warning Tone Start Timer
– Disconnect Timer
These timers behave and operate according to the following chain of events:
1. When the unattended conference is established, the Callback Start Timer will begin.
2. When the Callback Start timer expires, the Unattended Conference originator’s extension will start to
receive a callback ringing from the PBX and the Warning Tone Start Timer begins.
3. When the Warning Tone Start Timer expires, the remaining parties of the conference will start to hear
a warning tone, the callback ringing will continue to be heard at the Unattended Conference
originator’s extension, and the Disconnect Timer begins.
4. When the disconnect Timer expires, the conference is disconnected.
If the Unattended Conference originator returns to the conference before the line is disconnected, all timers
are cleared.
• For a Conference With Six or More Parties
The EECHO or ECHO card is required. Also the echo cancelling function should be enabled through system
programming.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.7.5 ECHO16 Card (KX-TDA0166)
KX-TDE600
3.9.7 EECHO16 Card (KX-TDA6166)

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
→ Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
→ Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
Feature Guide 177

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
→ Echo Cancel—Conference


1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
178 Feature Guide

1.14.1.3 Privacy Release

Description
By default, all conversations which take place on trunks, extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by
privacy (Automatic Privacy).
Privacy Release allows a PT/PS user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S-CO
button in order to establish a three-party call.
System programming is required to enable or disable this feature.
Conditions
• S-CO Button
A flexible button can be customised as the S-CO button.
• Privacy Release Time
Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined.
• This feature overrides Data Line Security (® 1.11.5 Data Line Security) and Executive Busy Override
Deny (® 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override).

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key


Feature Guide 179

1.15.1 Conference Group Call
1.15 Conference Group Call Features

Description
Conference group calling allows you to call a pre-determined group (conference group) of parties
simultaneously. Each party that answers the call joins the conference.
A PT user can call a conference group of up to 7 parties to establish a conference call, for a maximum of 8
participants. During a conference group call, the caller can restrict the ability of other members to speak.
Broadcast Mode
When Broadcast Mode is enabled through system programming, a PT user can call a conference group of up
to 31 call members to make a voice announcement. Members can listen to the announcement by answering
the call.
During the announcement, the voices of members will not be heard. However, the caller can allow up to 7
specific members to speak, making a conference call. This conversation can be heard by the other members.
Conference Group Call Control

During a conference group call, the caller can restrict or allow members’ ability to speak, and can remove
members from the call using the following buttons. These buttons will function irrelevant of the Conference
Group Call mode. Pressing the other buttons during the conversation will be ignored.
Note
The operation of these buttons during a conference group call is different from the operations for the
Conference feature (® 1.14.1 Conference Features).
Button Function
DSS Disables or enables the corresponding member's ability to speak.

CONF (Conference) Establishes a conversation with the current members in the order
assigned in the conference group. Pressing this button again will add
the next available member in the group to the conversation.
TRANSFER Removes the member who joined the conversation last. The member
can still listen to the announcement.
FLASH/RECALL (Flash/Recall Removes the member who joined the conversation last. The member
mode) will be disconnected from the conference group call and hear a
reorder tone.
SP-PHONE Enables a hands-free conversation.
A member extension can inform the caller that he wants to speak or join the conversation by sending a
notification. The caller will hear a notification tone and the requesting extension’s information will be shown on
the display for five seconds.
Conference Groups
Eight conference groups can be programmed, and a maximum of 7 members (31 members in Broadcast Mode)
can be assigned to each group. The available destinations as members of the conference group are as follows:
180 Feature Guide

PS ü
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
DISA
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code) ü*1
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code) ü*1
*1
Only available when the networking type of the trunk is assigned as private.
Join After Time Out

When conference group members do not answer a conference group call within the preprogrammed time limit,
the member's telephones will stop ringing. However, even after the time limit has expired, members can join
the conference.
Additionally, extension users not registered in the called conference group can join a conference after it has
started. Outside callers using DISA and TIE line users can also join a conference after accessing their extension
using Walking COS.
An entry code can also be specified to restrict access to the call. The entry code can be set when the caller
initiates the conference group call. If an entry code is to be set, usually the caller will inform call participants in
advance.
Conditions
• Only PTs that are permitted by COS programming can originate conference group calls.
• After one conference group member answers the call, the conference or announcement is established.
• If no members answer the call within the preprogrammed time limit, the caller will hear a busy tone.
• The caller will hear a confirmation tone every time a member answers the call.
• When the originating caller of a conference group call goes on hook, the call ends and all participating
members will be disconnected.
• The conference group call will reach a member extension regardless of settings such as Call Forwarding
(except DND).
• If a member extension is busy and has Call Waiting for trunk calls activated when a conference group call
is made, a call waiting tone will be sent to the extension.
• The call information of the caller (not members) will be recorded on SMDR.
• A caller cannot make a conference group call with a call on hold.
• Call Pickup is not available for a conference group call. (® 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup)
• The conference group call will not reach members when:
– the member extension has set DND for intercom calls.
Feature Guide 181

– the member extension is a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode. (® 1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel
Mode)
• If a conversation has reached the maximum number of participants, the Join After Time Out feature cannot
be used to join the conversation.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call Operation
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Conference Group Call—Broadcast Mode
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List


1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
182 Feature Guide

1.16.1 Paging
1.16 Paging Features
1.16.1 Paging
Description
An extension user can make a voice announcement to many destinations simultaneously.
The message is announced over the built-in speakers of PTs and/or external speakers (external pagers) which
belong to the paging group. Up to two external pagers can be connected.
The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone.
It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call.
Paging Deny:
An extension user can choose not to receive paging announcements.
Paging Group
Each paging group consists of extension user groups and external pagers. One extension user group or
external pager can belong to several paging groups.
(® 2.2.2 Group)
[Example]
Paging Group 01 Paging Group 02 Paging Group 03 Paging Group 04
Extension Extension Extension

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2
Extension User Group No.*1 External Pager No.*2
Paging Group No.
001 002 003 ... 1 2
01 ü ...
02 ü ü ...
03 ü ... ü
04 ... ü
05 ü ü ü ... ü ü
: : : : ... : :
ü: Constituent
*1
® 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
or
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
® [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
*2
®5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
® [641] External Pagers of a Paging Group
Feature Guide 183

1.16.1 Paging
Conditions
• Extensions which cannot be paged are:
– PSs
– SLTs
– Ringing or busy PTs
– PTs in Paging Deny mode
– PTs in Paging DND mode
– IP-PTs connected to a V-IPEXT card, that are assigned to extension user group 31 (default)*1
These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page.
*1
Changing the extension user group of the extension, allows it to receive pages. However, doing so may affect the number of
simultaneous IP extension and IP trunk calls available on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.
• External Pager Priority
External pagers can be used with the following priorities:
TAFAS ® Paging ® BGM
(® 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS), 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM))
• Volume Control
Paging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through system programming.
• Paging DND
When DND (® 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)) is set for incoming calls, it is programmable whether your
extension receives paging through system programming.

→ Group Paging
→ Group Paging Answer
→ Paging Deny Set / Cancel
→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
→Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
→ Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1)
→ Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Paging Deny

[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[641] External Pagers of a Paging Group


1.7.1 Paging
184 Feature Guide

1.16.1 Paging
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
Feature Guide 185

1.17.1 Doorphone Call
1.17 Optional Device Features

Description
It is possible to connect doorphones directly to the PBX. When a visitor presses the call button on a doorphone,
the doorphone calls a preprogrammed destination (extension or outside party). In addition, extension users
can dial the preset number of a doorphone to call that doorphone.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement:
An optional doorphone, the OPB card and DPH card
• Each doorphone port can only be assigned to one tenant. The Time Table (day/lunch/break/night) of the
tenant applies. (® 2.2.4 Time Service)
• Call Destination
The incoming doorphone call destination(s) can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night)
for each doorphone port. Destinations can be selected. (® 1.1.2.1 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY)
• COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call.
• Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone. (® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block)
• Ring Duration
If an incoming call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, ringing stops and the call is
cancelled.
• Call Duration
The call duration can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the call will be disconnected.
• Door Open
While engaged on a doorphone call, the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. (®
1.17.2 Door Open)
• A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)
3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)
3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
KX-TDE600

→ Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
→ Doorphone—Call Duration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Doorphone Call
186 Feature Guide

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone

[720] Doorphone Call Destination
[729] Doorphone Number Reference

1.10.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
Feature Guide 187

1.17.2 Door Open
1.17.2 Door Open

Description
An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone.
The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door through COS programming.
However, while engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in (®
1.17.1 Doorphone Call).
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener on each door.
• The door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed.
• Door Open Duration
The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600

3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— Device Type
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone—Open Duration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Door Unlock

[207] Door Unlock Time
[512] Permission for Door Open Access


1.10.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
188 Feature Guide

1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Description
When a call is received at the floating extension number assigned to the external pager, a ring tone is sent
through the pager. Any extension user can then answer the call.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager
• Floating Extension Number
A floating extension number must be assigned for an external pager (default: 600). It is possible to access
an external pager by dialling its floating extension number.
• Pager Volume
It is possible to change the volume of an external pager through system programming.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer
7.2 [5-2] External Pager

[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number

1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
Feature Guide 189

1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

Description
A PT user can listen to BGM through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle. The following audio sources
are available for BGM:
• External Music Source
• Internal Music Source
• Outgoing Message (OGM)
BGM—External:
BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pagers, this can be turned on and off by an
extension assigned as the manager.
Conditions
[BGM]
• Hardware requirement: User-supplied music source (when an external music source is assigned)
• The music through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook.
• Each user can set/cancel BGM, and also select the music source.
• Through system programming, it is possible to specify the maximum number of IP-PTs connected to a
V-IPEXT card that can simultaneously perform the BGM feature. Changing this setting may affect the
number of simultaneous IP extension and IP trunk calls available on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.
[BGM—External]
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external pager
• External pagers can be used with the following priorities:
TAFAS ® Paging ® BGM
(® 1.16.1 Paging, 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS))

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600

3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR—VoIP-DSP Option— IP Extension Count of BGM
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2
→ External BGM On / Off
→ BGM Set / Cancel
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
190 Feature Guide


1.8.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
Feature Guide 191


Description
An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the
following features:
Feature Usage & Reference
Direct Inward System Access When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear a message.
(DISA)
® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Queuing Feature If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call distribution
group, any caller who is waiting in a queue will hear a message.
® 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm, the user will hear a
message.
® 1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Music on Hold The party put on hold will hear a message or recorded music.
® 1.13.4 Music on Hold

Background Music (BGM) Extensions can listen to music through their built-in speaker.
® 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
Conditions
This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card. To increase the capacity of the
feature, it is possible to add an MSG4 card, ESVM2 card or ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.
• Number of Messages and Recording Time
A maximum of 64 messages can be recorded.
• A floating extension number is assigned to each outgoing message (OGM) (default: 5 + two-digit OGM
number).
• The SVM/OGM Block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card or one ESVM2 card allows two messages to play
simultaneously, and one MSG4 or ESVM4 card allows four messages to play simultaneously. Increasing
the number of cards does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages; it increases
the number of messages that can be played simultaneously.
192 Feature Guide

[Example]
Up to 4 messages can be Up to 8 messages can be

played simultaneously to played simultaneously to
callers. callers.
PBX PBX
MSG MSG MSG
Card Card Card
Total message recording time: Total message recording time:

8 minutes max. 8 minutes max.
The maximum recording time for each card depends on the recording quality and the type of card used,
as follows:
Recording Time with the
Recording Time with the MSG4
Recording Quality IPCMPR/IPCEMPR/ESVM2/
Card
ESVM4 Card
High about 20 minutes about 8 minutes
(default)
Middle about 60 minutes about 8 minutes
Low about 120 minutes about 8 minutes
When cards of different types are installed, the shortest recording time is used. For example, if an
ESVM4 card and an MSG4 card are installed, the maximum recording time at default will be about 8
minutes.
Note
When MSG/ESVM card expansion has been completed, the new card is blank—all necessary
messages will need to be stored in the card. This can be done in two ways:
a. By installing the new MSG/ESVM card then recording each message again. The PBX will
automatically store the new recordings in each card.
b. By transferring messages from the PBX to a PC using the Maintenance Console, then transferring
them back to the PBX with the new MSG/ESVM card installed.
• The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers.
• Recording Methods
a. Record voice messages through the extension telephone
b. Transfer prerecorded voice messages from external sound source into the PBX via an external music
port.
Note
Record voice messages only; avoid the recording of music.
However, it is possible to record music when using an IPCMPR/IPCEMPR/ESVM card in High
Recording Quality mode.
• After recording messages, a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation.
• Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages during a preprogrammed time
period, or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired
message. The longer one is applied.
• When the manager tries to record a message, he will hear ringback tone if a message channel is in use.
When all ports of the MSG/ESVM card(s) become idle, he will hear the progress tone for a preprogrammed
time period.
After that, the PBX will automatically proceed into the recording mode.
Feature Guide 193


KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
3.7.6 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)
3.7.7 ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA0192) and ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)
KX-TDE600
3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card

2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time
before Recording Message
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— OGM Record / Clear / Playback
5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table— Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–
16
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2— Recording Mode
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number

[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number

1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
194 Feature Guide


Description
An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user in the PBX, when
the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message. The caller
can have direct access to features such as:
• Placing an intercom call to an extension, operator or any floating extensions (e.g., modem for remote
system administration, an external pager for TAFAS).
• Calling an outside party via the PBX.
• Operating some PBX remote features (e.g., FWD)
DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial
If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept) after
hearing the outgoing message (OGM), one of the following can be selected through system programming:
a. Disable: The call will be terminated.
b. Operator: The call will be redirected to the operator.
c. AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the destination assigned to that AA number.
→ 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
→ [211] DISA Intercept Time
→ 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after
DISA answers
DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service)

After listening to the outgoing message (OGM), the caller may dial a single digit (DISA AA number). The
destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message. It is also possible to assign other
DISA floating extension numbers as the destination (Multistep DISA AA Service).
If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA), the DISA
AA service is not employed.
→ 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— 1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9
→ 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
Outgoing Message (OGM)
When a call arrives on a DISA line, a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller.
Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages (OGMs). (® 1.17.5 Outgoing
Message (OGM))
Outgoing Automated Attendant No.*2 Busy/DND

Floating
Message Message
Extn. No.*1
(OGM) No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No.*3
10 30 20 10 20 10 10 40 10 20
01 501 04
0 1 0 3 2 1 2 0 4 5
02 502 05
: : : : : : : : : : : : :
*1
® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number
® [730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
*2
® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— 1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9
*3
® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Busy / DND Message No.
Feature Guide 195

DISA Security Mode and Available Features

If the DISA AA service is not employed, the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature
numbers. To prevent others from accessing the PBX features, it is possible to assign DISA security.
→ 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— DISA Security—DISA Security Mode
→ [732] DISA Security Mode
The features available depend on the preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows:
TIE Line Call

Intercom
Security Mode Trunk Call
Call
Without PBX Code With PBX Code
All Security
Trunk Security ü ü
No Security ü ü ü ü*1
ü: Available
*1
If trunk call is available, Account Code Entry (® 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry) is also available.
Note
DISA AA service and Operator Call (® 2.2.5 Operator Features) are available for any security mode.
Security Mode Override by Verification Code Entry
If the caller performs Verification Code Entry (® 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry) while hearing a DISA message,
the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode.
Entry method:
Verification Code Entry feature number + + verification code + verification code PIN
After changing mode, the new mode remains in force for the duration of the call.
DISA Intercept Routing—Busy

If the first destination called by the outside party is busy, the call is redirected as follows:
a. The call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination assigned to the first destination.
b. If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not assigned to the first destination and a prerecorded DISA
Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear the DISA Busy Message.
c. If neither an intercept destination nor a DISA Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear a busy tone.
→ 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
Called Party is Busy
DISA Intercept Routing—DND

If the destination called by the outside party is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available, one
of the following can be selected through system programming:
a. Busy Tone: The caller will hear a busy tone.
b. Enable: DND will redirect the call to the preprogrammed destination on an extension basis.
c. OGM: An outgoing message (OGM) will be sent to the caller. The message for DND mode can be assigned
for each outgoing message (OGM) which has a DISA floating extension number.
→ 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA
sets DND
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer

If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Intercept time)
after the call is reached, the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature.
If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA
Disconnect Time after Intercept) after the DISA Intercept time expires, the call will be disconnected.
196 Feature Guide

→ DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→ DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
Walking COS Through DISA

If the caller performs Walking COS (extension number and PIN entry) while hearing a DISA message, the
security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode (® 1.9.5 Walking COS). After performing
Walking COS, the following features are available, using the settings of the specified extension:
• Intercom call
• TIE line call
• Trunk call
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (® 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
(DND))
• Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (® 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out)
• Absent Message setting (® 1.19.2 Absent Message)
• Extension Dial Lock (® 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock)
• Time Service Switching Mode (® 2.2.4 Time Service)
Note
When making a trunk call using Walking COS through DISA, the CLIP number for that call will be that of
the extension seized by Walking COS. (® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP))
DISA Automatic Walking COS

Registered outside destinations such as cellular phones can be automatically recognised as PBX extensions
when calling through DISA. When the Caller ID of a received trunk call matches an entry in the System Speed
Dialling Table, the calling telephone is given Walking COS authorisation as assigned to the corresponding CLI
destination extension. Therefore, the "CLI destination" setting in the System Speed Dialling Table is used here
to specify the target extension that the calling telephone will be recognised as for Walking COS.
[Programming Example of DIL Table]
CLI Destination
Trunk No.
501 501
01 Disable Disable ... ...
(DISA) (DISA)
: : : : : : :
"CLI" must be set to Disable, to allow incoming calls to be received by DISA.

[Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table]
Trunk Access +
Location Name CLI Destination
Telephone Number
000 J. Smith 912341115678 200
001 : : :
: : : :
Feature Guide 197

In this example, calls received on trunk 01 are routed to the DISA OGM with floating extension number 501.
If the number of the received call (after modification according to the Caller ID table) is "12341115678", the
call originator is recognised as extension 200, and the Walking COS feature is automatically activated.
System programming is required to enable this feature.
SMDR
The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers. (®
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR))
[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside party is received.
No
Is there a port available?
The call is routed to an operator,

(DISA Delayed etc. (DISA Intercept when All
Yes
Answer time expires) DISA Ports are busy)
The PBX answers the call.
(DISA Mute & OGM Start Time

A after Answering expires)
The OGM plays and the PBX starts to

receive the DTMF signalling.
No
Is the first digit dialled?
(DISA First Digit Time
When No Dial expires)
What method is assigned for
DISA Intercept Routing No Dial?
Operator Disable AA-0, AA-9
The call is routed to an The call is redirected to

operator. The call is the destination assigned
disconnected. to AA-0 or AA-9.
Yes
The OGM stops.

C C
No
Is a second digit dialled?
(DISA Second Digit Time for
Automated Attendant expires)
Yes
No Is the first dialled digit assigned a
destination for the DISA AA service?
The PBX receives the dialled
digits and checks the dialled Yes
number.
The call is routed to the destination.
What is the DISA security mode?
Continued on next page
198 Feature Guide

Continued from previous page
No Security
None Trunk Security All Security
B Is the dialled number No

an extension number or
floating extension number?
Yes
Is the Walking COS/Verification Yes

C Code Entry feature number dialled
for Security Mode Override?
What is the dialled number? No

Is the correct Yes
PIN entered?
Extension No./ Trunk Access No. Feature No.* Other No

Floating + Telephone No. (Absent Message,
D
Extension No. FWD, etc.)
Reorder tone B
The feature is set. D
The dialled number is sent to the trunk.
C Does the caller press No

while hearing the reorder
(DISA Reorder
tone (Call Retry)?
Tone time
Is the extension No Is the extension Yes expires)
Yes
in DND mode? busy?
Yes No A
E
The call is directed to the extension. The call is disconnected.
Is Call Waiting No
The caller hears a ringback tone.
mode on?
Yes
No Does the caller press
while hearing a ringback
tone (Call Retry)? E
Yes
Does the
destination A
answer No
the call? (DISA Intercept
time expires)
Yes The call is routed to the

intercept destination.
(DISA Intercept Routing
The call is established. No Answer)
Does the destination No

answer the call? (DISA Disconnect
Time after
Yes Intercept expires)
Continued on next page The call is established. The call is disconnected. Continued on next page
* Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used.
Feature Guide 199

Continued from previous page Continued from previous page
What method is assigned

for DISA Intercept Is an Intercept Yes
Routing DND? Routing Busy destination
assigned?
The call is routed to
Intercept Routing Busy tone OGM
No the intercept destination.
(Intercept Routing Busy)
No Does the caller

press while hearing a busy Is a DISA Busy No
(Busy Tone / tone (Call Retry)? Message assigned?
DND Tone G
Continuation
time expires) Yes The message for Yes
the DND mode is
sent to the caller.
The call is disconnected.
A The message for
busy is sent to the
The call is routed to caller.
Busy tone
the intercept destination. F
(Intercept Routing DND)
F
No Does the caller
press while hearing a busy
G (Busy Tone / tone (Call Retry)?
DND Tone
Continuation
time expires) Yes
The call is disconnected.

A
Conditions
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Trunk-to-Trunk Call feature of DISA.
a. Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b. Keeping passwords (verification code PINs/extension PINs) secret.
c. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
d. Changing PINs regularly.
An OPB card, and MSG4 card, ESVM2 card or ESVM4 card
• DISA Delayed Answer Time
It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a
preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message (OGM).
→ 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Hold Recall
→ [209] DISA Delayed Answer Time
• Call Retry
While hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ". System
programming selects whether pressing " " during a trunk-to-trunk conversation returns to the DISA top
menu or sends a DTMF tone.
• DISA Mute Time
It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive
the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line.
200 Feature Guide

→ 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer
after answering
• End of Call Detection
If a call through DISA is routed to a trunk, DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. This function can
be disabled through system programming. If disabled, DISA is released when the trunk-to-trunk connection
is made.
The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a
trunk-to-trunk call via DISA.
– Silence Detection
→ 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Silence
→ [475] DISA Silence Detection
– Continuous Signal Detection
→ 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
→ [476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection
– Cyclic Signal Detection
→ 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
→ [477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection
• Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration Limitation
For a call between two outside parties, even if end of call detection cannot be performed, the call can be
disconnected by a system timer. (® 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation) If the timer expires, the line will be
disconnected unless the originating caller extends the time by sending any DTMF signalling. The caller
can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period and preprogrammed number of times.
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
® [210] DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time
• Automatic DISA Activation
DISA can be set through system programming to automatically activate for the following types of
trunk-to-trunk call, to enable detection of the end of the call.
– When a trunk call is forwarded to another trunk
– When a trunk call is transferred to another trunk
– When a trunk call to an incoming call distribution group is answered by an outside destination member
Before the call is made, the PBX confirms that a DISA port is available. If no DISA ports are available, the
call is not routed to a trunk. For transferred calls or calls to an ICD Group, if the DISA port has become
unavailable when the trunk-to-trunk conversation is actually established, the call is established without
DISA.
When using this feature, the Trunk-to-Trunk Call Limitation timer should be enabled. In addition, prolonging
the call through DTMF signalling is not available.
• DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination
An outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension at the PBX by
pressing "#" + extension number, if DISA is connected by the Automatic DISA Activation feature. This
feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming.
It is also possible to establish a Conference call (® 1.14.1 Conference Features), perform Call Splitting
(® 1.13.3 Call Splitting), and page with a call on hold to transfer the call (® 1.16.1 Paging).
– The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is
required to use this feature.
– DISA security mode should be set to No Security or Trunk Security.
– If the called extension does not answer, is busy, or is in DND mode, the DISA Intercept feature operates.
– The party on hold can use the Call Retry feature.
– End of Call Detection does not operate after dialling "#".
– Calls can only be transferred to extensions (not including floating extensions) within the PBX. If the
transferred call is forwarded to another outside destination, COS settings are ignored.
Feature Guide 201

– If the call is transferred to an ICD group, the call will wait in a queue until answered, but the Queuing
Time Table will not function.
– When using this feature, do not use the Executive Busy Override feature to interrupt the established
call.
• DISA Reorder Tone Duration
It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. This specifies the length of time that a reorder
tone will be sent to the caller. When the timer expires, the call will be disconnected. Call Retry is possible
during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time.
→ 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
• Call Deny
Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis.
→ 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the
Call from DISA
• Verification Code PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock
preprogrammed number of times successively, that extension or verification code will become locked, and
even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it.
In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
→ 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter
• DISA Automatic Walking COS
The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required
• Each outgoing message (OGM) can be assigned a name through system programming for programming
reference.
→ 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Name
→ [731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600

→ DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
→ DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
→ DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
→ DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
→ DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
→ DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
→ DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
202 Feature Guide

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call from
DISA
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
→Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Silence
→Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
→Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

[209] DISA Delayed Answer Time
[210] DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time
[211] DISA Intercept Time
[475] DISA Silence Detection
[476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection
[477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection
[604] Extension Intercept Destination
[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
[732] DISA Security Mode

1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
Feature Guide 203


Description
This feature provides simple answering machine features for extensions.
Features for an extension user with a message box:
An extension user can record a personal greeting message to greet a caller and ask him to leave a voice
message. The user can also play back and clear greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers.
Feature for a caller:
A caller can leave a voice message after hearing the greeting message.
SVM/OGM Block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR Card

This block can be used either for the SVM feature, for the OGM feature (® 1.17.5 Outgoing Message
(OGM)), or both.
When used for the SVM feature, this block is assigned a floating extension number (default: 591). Two channels
are available, allowing two users to access this feature at the same time.
When an extension is assigned to this feature through system programming, a message box is created for that
extension. This message box is used to store greeting messages and voice messages for the extension. Each
PT, SLT, and PS can be assigned its own message box.
[Example]
IPCMPR
SVM : Floating Extension No. 591 (default)
Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for 2 CH
Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 210
ESVM2/ESVM4 Card
Like the SVM/OGM block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card, an ESVM2/ESVM4 card, mounted on an OPB3
card, can be used either for the SVM feature, for the OGM feature, or both.
An ESVM4 card (4 channels) contains two blocks of data, and the ESVM2 card (2 channels) contains one
block of data. Up to four ESVM cards (max. 16 channels) can be installed in the PBX.
Only up to 2 cards (max. 8 channels) can be used for the SVM feature per system. In this case, each card is
assigned a floating extension number rather than the SVM/OGM block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card. The
rest of the channels must be used for OGM feature purposes.
When using an ESVM card for the SVM feature, it must be mounted on sub-slot 3 (highest slot) of the OPB3
card.
204 Feature Guide

[Example]
PBX
SVM Card 1 (ESVM4): Floating Extension No. 591 (example)
Block A
Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for 2 CH
Block B
Message Box for Message Box for 2 CH
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
SVM Card 2 (ESVM2): Floating Extension No. 592 (example)
Message Box for 2 CH

Extn. 301
Message Recording Limit

Up to 125 (IPCMPR/IPCEMPR)/250 (ESVM2/ESVM4) messages (greeting messages and voice messages
for extensions) with a maximum total recording time of 60 minutes (default) can be recorded per card/block.
This memory is shared between the message boxes of all extensions assigned to that card/block. The recording
quality, which can be selected through system programming, determines the total recording time as follows:
Recording Quality Recording Time with the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR/ESVM2/ESVM4 Card
High about 20 minutes

Middle (default) about 60 minutes
Low about 120 minutes
When a card/block is used for the OGM feature, the recording quality can be set separately (® 1.17.5 Outgoing
Message (OGM)).
Feature Guide 205

When using a card/block for both the SVM feature and OGM feature, the first 64 messages in the card/block
are saved for OGM use and the remaining 186 messages will be for SVM use, as shown below:
SVM Use: Disabled SVM Use: Enabled SVM Use: Enabled

OGM Use: Enabled OGM Use: Enabled OGM Use: Disabled
ESVM4 Card ESVM4 Card ESVM4 Card
Block A Block A Block A
OGM Use: OGM Use: SVM Use: SVM Use:

64 Messages 2 CH 64 Messages 186 Messages 2 CH 250 Messages 2 CH
Block B Block B Block B
OGM Use: OGM Use: SVM Use: SVM Use:

64 Messages 2 CH 64 Messages 186 Messages 2 CH 250 Messages 2 CH
If the sum length of all recorded voice messages exceeds 90 % of the total recording space, the display informs
all extension users that the total capacity has almost been reached. Users will hear dial tone 3 when going
off-hook.
Floating Extension No. and Destination

An extension user can set incoming calls to be redirected to his message box when he cannot answer them.
The user can set the floating extension number of this feature as the destination for redirected calls. Then, this
feature answers redirected calls, plays back the relevant greeting message, and records a voice message.
Incoming calls can be redirected to this feature by the following methods:
– Call Forwarding (FWD) (® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
– Intercept Routing—No Answer/Busy/DND (® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing)
[Programming Example for Intercept Routing]
Extension No. Intercept Destination
101 102 591 591 591

102 103 591 591 591
301
– – – 591
(Operator)
In this example:
If a call is received at extension 101 and cannot be answered:
a. In day mode: the call will be redirected to extension 102.
b. In lunch/break/night mode: the call will be redirected to this feature, and a voice message will be recorded
to the message box.
If a call is received at extension 301 (operator), the call will only be redirected to this feature in night mode.
If both FWD and Intercept Routing features are set for an extension, the FWD setting has priority. So, for
example, it is possible for extension 101 to temporarily set FWD settings from his extension to forward calls
to this feature even during day mode.
206 Feature Guide

Greeting Message for Each Time Mode

When a call is redirected to this feature, the caller hears the designated greeting message. In addition to the
normal greeting message, an extension user can record a different greeting message for each time mode (day/
lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service).
[Recording Example]
• Normal Greeting Message: "You have reached John. I am sorry I cannot take your call right now. Please
leave a message."
• Greeting Message for lunch mode: "You have reached John. I am sorry I am out for lunch right now. Please
leave a message."
If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have been recorded,
callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode. However, if no greeting message has been recorded
for a certain time mode, the normal greeting message will be played instead.
If neither the normal greeting message nor the greeting message for a certain time mode have been recorded,
incoming calls will not be redirected to this feature in that time mode. For example, if a greeting message has
only been recorded for night mode, and no normal greeting message has been recorded, incoming calls can
only be redirected to this feature in night mode. No incoming calls will be redirected to this feature in day/lunch/
break mode.
Direct Recording
An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the message box of an extension. In this case, the
target extension will not ring. It is also possible to transfer a caller directly to the message box of an extension.
Message Notification
If a new voice message has been left in a message box, and distinctive dial tones are enabled, the user will
hear dial tone 4 when going off-hook. If a message box contains only voice messages that have previously
been listened to, dial tone 2 is heard instead. In addition, if the user’s telephone has a Message button or
Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light when a voice message has been left.
Pressing the lit button while on-hook shows the caller’s information.
SVM Log
When a caller leaves a voice message, the following information is also recorded (as available):
a. Caller’s Name
b. Caller’s Telephone Number
c. Time recording started
d. Voice Message Status
– "New" is displayed for voice messages which have not previously been listened to.
– "Old" is displayed for voice messages which have previously been listened to.
This information can be viewed with the display of a PT or PS.
Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was received
and the type of telephone used. Only users of a 6-line display PT can view all of the above information.
Checking Voice Messages Left by Callers

When an extension user accesses his message box, the most recent unplayed voice message is played first.
When one voice message finishes playing, the next most recent voice message will begin playing
automatically. After the last voice message in a message box has finished playing, the voice messages will
begin playing from the most recent voice message again. When all voice messages have been played this
time, the extension user will hear dial tone 4, and the line will be disconnected automatically.
SVM Remote Access from Trunk

An extension user can remotely access his message box through a trunk by calling his own extension and
using the Walking COS feature. This allows the user to, for example, check the voice messages left in his
message box when he is out of the office.
Feature Guide 207

Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension

An extension user can access the message box of another extension by using the Walking COS feature to,
for example, record a greeting message in a message box for an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group as
described below.
In addition, if the user’s telephone has a Message button for another extension, the user can easily access the
message box of that extension and listen to the voice messages left by callers.
Message Box for Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group

When a call is redirected to this feature from an ICD Group using Intercept Routing—Overflow (®
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature) or Call Forwarding (FWD), the greeting message for the first extension assigned to
that ICD Group will be played, and the voice message from the caller will be recorded in that extension’s
message box.
A virtual PS can be assigned as the first extension of the ICD Group. This provides the ICD Group with a
dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension. (® 1.25.6 Virtual PS)
Conditions
[General]
• This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card. To increase the capacity of the
feature, it is possible to add an ESVM2 card or ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.
• The maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be recorded for an
extension can be set between 1 and 100 through system programming. (Default: 10)
• The Message button or Message/Ringer Lamp will light when an incoming call is answered by this feature.
However, if a message is not left by the caller, the light will turn off when the call has ended.
• It is not possible to back up the SVM Log, recorded voice messages or greeting messages. If the PBX is
initialised, all this information is cleared.
• When the ESVM card to which an extension belongs is changed through system programming, all the
recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared.
• When using the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card, this feature can be disabled for each extension through system
programming. This can be useful for only allowing certain users (e.g., bosses, executives, etc.) access to
the limited capacity of recorded voice messages for this feature. When this feature is disabled, all the
recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared.
• The voice messages for an extension will be cleared when the extension is checked out using the
Hospitality feature (® 1.27.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY). However, greeting messages will not be
cleared.
• An extension is able to receive calls even while a voice message is being recorded in that extension’s
message box.
• If an extension user tries to access this feature when it is already being accessed by two other users, the
user will hear a busy tone.
• If an extension user tries to clear a voice message shown on the display while the message box is already
in use, the extension user will hear a notification tone.
• Voice message recording will stop when:
a. a caller hangs up.
b. the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit. (Default: 120 seconds)
c. the recording space reaches the limit.
In cases b and c, the caller will hear a notification tone, and the line will be disconnected.
• New voice messages cannot be recorded in a message box when:
a. the total recording time or number of voice messages exceeds the limit.
b. the number of voice messages for an extension exceeds the limit.
c. the destination of a call has been changed more than once.
d. the desired message box is already in use by another user.
208 Feature Guide

e. a call is received at an ICD Group, and the message box of the first extension assigned to that group
is not available, or no extension is assigned as the first member of the group.
• Recording Greeting Messages
If an extension user tries to record a new greeting message to his message box when the total recording
time or number of messages has reached its limit, the user will hear a reorder tone.
• Display Lock
A display PT user can lock the SVM Log display to prevent the user’s information from being viewed and
voice messages from being played back at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock).
In this case, the Incoming/Outgoing Call Log displays and the Personal Speed Dialling number display are
also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) (® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification
Number (PIN)) is required to lock/unlock the display.
• Moving From SVM to DISA
When a call is answered by SVM but the caller wants to call another extension instead of leaving a
message, it is possible to access DISA (DISA OGM 01 will be played) by dialling the Operator Call feature
number. This allows the caller to call another extension via DISA or access the DISA AA service.
The OGM feature for the card/block to which the SVM mailbox belongs must be enabled via system
programming.
[SVM Remote Access from Trunk]

• Whether Walking COS is available or not can be set through system programming.
If the PBX uses analogue trunks, it is strongly recommended to prohibit Walking COS access. If an
extension user who is accessing his message box through an analogue line goes on-hook while the voice
messages are being played, the line will remain connected until all voice messages finish playing. This is
because a reorder tone cannot be detected from an analogue line while playing voice messages.
• The first digit of the Walking COS feature number must be entered before the greeting message finishes
playing.
• When accessing SVM through a trunk, it is possible to change message boxes (e.g., to leave a message
in another user’s message box after listening to one’s own messages). However, a user can only access
the message boxes of other extensions assigned to the same card/block. For example, if the user accesses
a message box belonging to card/block 1 first, then the user can only access the message boxes of other
extensions belonging to card/block 1. If the user tries to access the message box of another extension
belonging to a different card, the user will hear a reorder tone.
While a reorder tone is heard, it is possible to retry another call by pressing " ".
• Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension
Listening to voice messages left by callers using a Message button for another extension is available only
when voice messages have been left in the message box.
• It is not recommended to record music when creating a greeting message.
• This feature does not answer calls that are forwarded using the Call Forwarding by QSIG feature
(1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG).

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
KX-TDE600
3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card
Feature Guide 209


2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
→ SVM—Recording Time
→ SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Simplified Voice Message Access
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— SVM Lock
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM

1.9.5 Walking COS
1.29.1 Dial Tone

1.6.2 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
210 Feature Guide

1.17.8 External Sensor

Description
External sensing devices, such as security alarms or smoke detectors, can be connected to the PBX. When
the PBX receives input from a sensor, a call is made to the preset destination, alerting the extension user.
The available destinations of a sensor call are as follows:
[Available Destinations]
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) ü

PS ü
SIP Extension
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
DISA
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
When the call is answered, if distinctive dial tones are enabled, dial tone 3 is heard, and continues until the
user goes on-hook. If the sensor call is not answered within a specified time, the call will be cancelled. It is
possible to set a different ring tone pattern for calls received from each external sensor, to distinguish between
them.
Conditions
An external sensor, OPB card and EIO card
• Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the
manufacturer of a device before installing it.
• After a sensor has been activated, the PBX will ignore any further alerts from the same sensor for the
duration specified by a timer. This timer can be set separately for each sensor.
• As long as the previous sensor call is still being performed, any further alerts from the same sensor are
ignored.
• The assigned sensor name and/or number are shown on the display of PTs and PSs when a sensor call
is received.
• If the destination of a sensor call has set FWD, the sensor call will be redirected to the FWD destination.
However, if the FWD destination is not supported as the destination of a sensor call (e.g., an outside party),
the call will be received at the original destination. (® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
Feature Guide 211

• The following features cannot be used when a sensor call is received:

– Alternate Receiving—Voice (® 1.5.3 Intercom Call)
– Hands-free Answerback (® 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback)
– Consultation Hold/Call Hold (® 1.13.1 Call Hold)
– Call Transfer (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer)
– Executive Busy Override (® 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override)
• Sensor call information is output on SMDR.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.7.4 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)
KX-TDE600

→ Input Signal Decision Time
→ Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— External Sensor—Ring Duration
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
212 Feature Guide

1.17.9 External Relay Control
1.17.9 External Relay Control

Description
By turning external device relays on and off, the PBX can control external devices such as alarms.
When an extension user enters the External Relay Control feature number, the specified relay turns on for a
preprogrammed length of time. When this timer expires, the relay turns off automatically. This gives the PBX
simple control over other equipment, allowing an extension user to, for example, activate an alarm from his
extension.
If the relay cannot be accessed (for example, because use is not permitted by COS, or the port is not in service),
a reorder tone will be heard at the extension.
Conditions
An external relay device, OPB card and EIO card
• Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the
manufacturer of a device before installing it.
• Each external relay port has a COS assigned. This and the COS of an extension determine the extension
users who can use External Relay Control.
• The length of time that a relay is turned on can be specified separately for each relay through system
programming.
• If the same or another extension tries to access an external relay that has already been switched on, the
timer for that relay is reset.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600

3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— Device Type
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Relay Access
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— External Relay Access
7.6 [5-4] External Relay


1.10.2 If an External Relay is Connected
Feature Guide 213

1.18.1 Caller ID
1.18 Caller ID Features
1.18.1 Caller ID
Description
The PBX receives caller information, such as the caller’s name and telephone number, through the trunk. This
information can then be shown on the displays of PTs, PSs, or SLTs that support FSK-type Caller ID.
The PBX can modify a received number according to preprogrammed tables, so that an extension user can
easily use the received number to call the caller back. For example, if an area code is not required to call
outside destinations in a certain area, but received Caller ID numbers from that area contain an area code, it
is possible to store that area code in a modification table so that it is deleted automatically from received
numbers (Automatic Caller ID Number Modification).
1. Features
Caller ID includes the following features:
Caller ID Caller’s information which is sent from an analogue trunk.

The following Caller ID signalling types are supported: FSK and
DTMF.
Calling Line Identification Caller’s information which is sent from an ISDN line.
Presentation (CLIP)
® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
Automatic Number Caller’s information which is sent from an E1 or T1 line.
Identification (ANI)
® 1.22.1 E1 Line Service
® 1.23.1 T1 Line Service
2. Service Features
Features Description & Reference
Calling Line Identification Directs a DIL/DID/DDI/MSN call to a CLI destination if the caller’s
(CLI) Distribution identification (Caller ID/CLIP/ANI) has been assigned to the Caller
ID Table.
® 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Incoming Call Log Caller’s information is automatically recorded in the call log of the
called extension. This information is used for confirming the caller,
calling the caller back, and/or storing the number and name in the
Personal Speed Dialling.
® 1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
3. Number/Name Assignment
Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller’s number according to preprogrammed tables. The
modified number will be recorded for calling back.
214 Feature Guide

1.18.1 Caller ID
This PBX supports 4 modification tables, each of which can be used for any number of trunk groups. Each
table has 10 locations for local/international calls and one for long distance calls. The PBX checks the local/
international call data first. If a match is not found, the long distance call data is applied.
[Example]
<Table Selection>
Trunk Modification
Group No. Table <Modification Table>
1 1 Modification Table 1
2 3 Area Code Removed No. of Digits Added No.
: : Local/International
012 3 Blank
Call Data 1
Local/International
00 2 001
Call Data 2
: : : :
Local/International
Call Data 10
Long Distance Not
0 0
Call Data programmable
Note
When caller’s information is sent through an ISDN line and the call type is Subscriber, National, or
International, the following modification table is used instead of the above table:
<Modification Table>
Removed No. of Digits Added No.
Subscriber Call Data 0 Blank
National Call Data 0 0
International Call Data 0 00
Feature Guide 215

1.18.1 Caller ID
<Modification Flowchart>
A trunk call with the caller's

information is received.
Checks the Table Selection.

Table 1
Is the area code found in

Yes: local/international call data
No:
e.g., 00987654321 in the modification table?
e.g., 3344556677
Checks the local/
international call data. Checks the long distance call data.
Matches (Data 2)
Modifies the number as programmed.

Removed number of digits: 2
Added number: 001 Modifies the number as programmed.
Received number: 00987654321 (Removed number of digits: 0,
Added number: 0)
Modified number: 00987654321 = 001987654321
1) Remove the 2) Add "001".

first 2 digits.
Modification is completed:
Modification is completed: 03344556677.
001987654321.
Caller ID Table Assignment

The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table.
In each location of the table, the following items can be assigned:
a. Telephone number (Trunk Access number + caller’s telephone number)
b. System Speed Dialling name (caller’s name)
(shown on the display or SMDR)
c. CLI destination
(used for CLI feature)
When a caller’s modified telephone number matches a telephone number (the Trunk Access number is
disregarded.) in the table, the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination.
[Example]
Location (System Speed System Speed Dialling
Telephone No.*1 CLI Destination*3
Dialling No.) Name*2
000 90123456789 ABC Company 200
001 : : :
: : : :
*1
216 Feature Guide

1.18.1 Caller ID

*2
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— Name
® [002] System Speed Dialling Name
*3
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CLI Destination
Caller’s Name Reference

A name can also be shown on the display or SMDR. The PBX searches for the name in the following order:
1. Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension
2. System Speed Dialling (Caller ID) Table
3. Caller ID name received from the public line (Caller ID Name Reference)
If the name is not found, it will not be displayed.
Conditions
[General]
• Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming.
• The Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network.
[Caller ID to SLT Port]
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: An SLC8 card with an EXT-CID card installed, or a CSLC16 card
KX-TDE600: An SLC8 card with an EXT-CID card installed, a CSLC16 card, or an ECSLC24 card
• This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)-type FSK and
Bellcore-type FSK.
• When the caller’s number is sent to an SLT, a Trunk Access number can be automatically added to the
telephone number through system programming for calling back.
• When the caller’s number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits, not counting the
preceding Trunk Access number (if it is programmed to be added).
• If a call is transferred to an SLT, the transferring extension’s information will be shown on the SLT. If the
transferring extension goes on-hook before the call is answered, the original caller’s information will be
shown.
• When the Caller ID has information, such as private, out of area, or long distance, the information will be
shown instead of the caller’s number and name.
• Even if the caller’s name is sent, the name may not be shown depending on the type of SLT.
• Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT.
• Caller ID shows whether the call is an intercom or trunk call by default. This setting can be disabled through
system programming.
• A caller ID name received from the network via a PRI23 card will not be displayed on an SLT. However, if
the received caller ID matches a System Speed Dialling entry, and a name is registered for that entry, it
will be displayed.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
→ Caller ID—Waiting to receive
→ Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum
Public Caller ID Digits
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Caller ID Modification Table
→ Extension Caller ID Sending
→ Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
Feature Guide 217

1.18.1 Caller ID

5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification

[490] Caller ID Signal Type

218 Feature Guide


Description
When an incoming public trunk call with the caller’s information (e.g., Caller ID) is directed to an extension, the
information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension. This information is shown on the
telephone display and is used for confirming the caller, calling back, or storing the number and name in the
Personal Speed Dialling.
[Example]
John White --- Caller's name (20 digits max.)
DEC.12 10:00AM MON --- Date and time of a call received
NEW: Not Answered --- Answering Status*
123456789 --- Caller's number (16 digits max.)
Call Log buttons

Own extension
Incoming call distribution group
*: "NEW" is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed;
"OLD" is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed.
Conditions
• Call Log Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension or an incoming call distribution
group. The button light shows the current status as follows:
Red on There is unchecked information.

Off All information has been checked.
• If the answering destination is not the original extension (FWD—No Answer, Intercept Routing—
No Answer, Overflow, and Call Pickup):
If a call is forwarded because it is not answered or another extension picks up the call, the information is
logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination. If a call is forwarded
to several extensions before being answered, the information is logged in the call logs for all the extensions
it was forwarded to. If a call is forwarded to an incoming call distribution group and is not answered, the
information is not logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group.
• Call Log for PS Calls
If a PS or a CS is in one of the following situations when a call arrives, the information is logged in the call
log for the PS:
a. When the PS is out of range.
b. When the PS is turned off.
c. When the CS is busy.
• Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log display to prevent the call information from being viewed
at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock). In this case, the Outgoing Call Log display,
the Personal Speed Dialling number display and the SVM Log display are also locked and the voice
Feature Guide 219

messages in the user’s message box cannot be played back. An extension personal identification number
(PIN) is required to use this feature. (® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))
• Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling
When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log information, the Idle
Line Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number.
• Incoming Call Log Memory
The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX. The maximum number that can be
logged for each extension and incoming call distribution group is also determined through system
programming. If the memory becomes full, the new call record overwrites the oldest one.
• Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls
If the original destination of a call is an incoming call distribution group, and the call is not answered, the
information is logged in the call log for the group. If it is answered, the information is logged in the call log
for the answering extension.
• Through system programming, it is possible to select which Incoming Call Logs record call information
when a member of an incoming call distribution group answers a call to the group:
– Only the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call.
– Both the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call and that of the incoming call
distribution group.

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension
Number
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Call Log to ICD Group for
Answered Call
→Option 5— Incoming Call Display
→Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock
→Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory
→Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory


220 Feature Guide

1.19.1 Message Waiting
1.19 Message Features

Description
An extension user can notify another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user. The notified extension
user can return the call or listen to the messages recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or Built-in
Simplified Voice Message feature.
When a message is left on a PT, the Message button lights or the Message/Ringer Lamp turns on red, and a
message is shown on the display of a display PT. Pressing the lit Message button while on-hook shows the
caller’s information as shown below:
[Example]
105:Tom Smith --- Extension no. and name of who left the message
Message buttons
Own extension
Incoming call distribution group
Other extension*
*: For example, this button is useful

when the secretary checks the
message for the boss (Boss &
Secretary Feature).
Conditions
• Message Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension, other extensions, or an
incoming call distribution group.
• Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting
If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled, dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been
left on the extension. (® 1.29.1 Dial Tone)
• SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp
The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT, if an EMSLC or MSLC card is
connected to the PBX. The Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the 12 patterns
shown below. System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature.
Feature Guide 221

[SLT Message Waiting Lamp Light Patterns]
5.12 s
1.28 s
ON
Pattern 1
OFF
5.12 s
1.28 s
ON
Pattern 2
OFF 512 ms
5.12 s
1.28 s
ON
Pattern 3
OFF
256 ms
2.56 s
768 ms
ON
Pattern 4
OFF
256 ms
5.12 s
768 ms
ON
Pattern 5
OFF
256 ms
2.56 s
512 ms
ON
Pattern 6
OFF
10.24 s
1.28 s
ON
Pattern 7
OFF
256 ms
20.48 s
1.28 s
ON
Pattern 8
OFF
256 ms
10.24 s
1.28 s
ON
Pattern 9
OFF
20.48 s
ON 1.28 s
Pattern 10
OFF
222 Feature Guide

10.24 s 10.24 s 20.48 s
t
t=1.28 s
ON
Pattern 11
OFF
10.24 s 10.24 s 20.48 s
t
t=1.28 s
ON
Pattern 12
OFF
• It is possible to set Message Waiting while hearing a ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone.
• Messages are always left on the original destination extension, regardless of that extension’s FWD settings.
• Both the extension that sent and received a message waiting notification can cancel the left message.
• If the extension that received a notification calls back the extension that sent the notification, and the call
is answered, the notification will be cleared automatically. However, if a voice message has been left on
the VPS, whether the notification is cleared or not depends on the VPS settings.
• If a voice message has been left on the VPS for a SIP extension (except KX-HGT100), the lamp will not
turn on.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.6.7 SLC16 Card (KX-TDA0174), MSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0175), and CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177)
KX-TDE600
3.8.7 CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177), ESLC16 Card (KX-TDA6174), EMSLC16 Card (KX-TDA6175), and
ECSLC24 Card (KX-TDA6178)

3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type— SLT Power Supply
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Message Waiting Set
→Option 3— Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
→Option 5— SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— SLT MW Mode

Feature Guide 223


1.10.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
224 Feature Guide

1.19.2 Absent Message

Description
An extension user can set or select a message (e.g., the reason for absence) to be displayed on his telephone.
When a display PT user calls the extension, the message is shown on the caller’s telephone. The following
messages can be programmed as desired:
Message
Type Message (Example) Description
No.
System 1 Will Return Soon Messages may be edited
message through system programming.
2 Gone Home
They are used for every
3 At Ext %%%% (Extension extension user commonly.
Number)
4 Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
5 Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
6 In a Meeting
7
8
Personal 9 A message is programmable at
message each extension through personal
programming (Personal Absent
Message), which can only be
used by that extension user.
Note
The "%" means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension.
Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.
Conditions
• An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected message is displayed at the
extension while on-hook.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message

[008] Absent Message

Feature Guide 225


1.6.3 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message)
226 Feature Guide

1.20 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

Description
PTs, DSS Consoles, and Add-on Key Modules are provided with the following feature/Line Access buttons:
Depending on your device type, some buttons may not be provided.
As for buttons on PSs, please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PS.
[PT and Add-on Key Module]

Button Usage
Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and

headset volume and the display contrast. Navigator Key
and Jog Dial can also be used to select data from the
Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on
the display.
Navigator Key, Jog

Dial, Volume Key
VOL
ENTER Used to confirm the selected item.

CANCEL Used to cancel the selected item.
PROGRAM Used to enter and exit the programming mode.
Used to disconnect the current call and make another

call without hanging up (Flash/Recall mode or
Terminate mode) or used to send a flash/recall signal
FLASH/RECALL
to the telephone company or host PBX to access their
features (External Feature Access mode). This button
can also be used as a CANCEL button while on-hook.
HOLD Used to place a call on hold.
SP-PHONE Used for hands-free operation. Also used to switch

(Speakerphone) between handset and hands-free operation.
Feature Guide 227

Button Usage
Used for a hands-free dialling. Also used to monitor the

MONITOR
party’s voice in hands-free mode.
Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back
MESSAGE
the party who left the message waiting indication.
REDIAL Used to redial the last dialled number.
TRANSFER Used to transfer a call to another party.
Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be

Flexible CO (Trunk) reassigned to a different Trunk Access button (Default:
S-CO) or to another feature button.
INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls.
Used to receive an incoming call in hands-free mode,

AUTO ANS (Auto
or used for microphone or handset mute during a
Answer)/MUTE
conversation. (Dual feature button)
Used to monitor an intercom call automatically (a
VOICE CALL/MUTE hands-free conversation is not possible). Also used for
handset microphone mute during a conversation.
Used for System/Personal Speed Dialling and storing
AUTO DIAL/STORE
programme changes.
CONF (Conference) Used to establish a multiple-party conversation.
FWD/DND Used to perform FWD or DND. (Dual feature button)
Used to insert a pause in a stored number. With an APT,

PAUSE
it is used as the PROGRAM button.
Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of
Soft
the display.
Used to select the displayed item or to call the displayed
SELECT
number.
SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button items.
MODE Used to shift the display to access various features.
NEXT PAGE Used to switch the page for the Self Labelling feature
(KX-NT366 only).
[DSS Console]
Button Usage
Used to answer an incoming call or place the current

ANSWER
call on hold and answer another call with one touch.
Used to disconnect the line during or after a
RELEASE
conversation or to complete a Call Transfer.
Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be
Flexible CO (Trunk) reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature
button.
228 Feature Guide

Button Usage
Used to access an extension with one touch. Every

Flexible DSS (Direct Station Selection) button is programmed to correspond to an extension.
DSS buttons can also be reassigned to other features.
Used to access a preprogrammed feature with one
PF (Programmable Feature)
touch. (no default)
Conditions
• Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status.
Feature Guide 229


Description
You can customise the flexible buttons and/or programmable feature (PF) buttons on PTs, Add-on Key
Modules, and PSs through either system or personal programming. They can then be used to make or receive
intercom or trunk calls or be used as feature buttons, as follows:
[Button Usage]
Button Usage
Single-CO (S-CO) Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls.
Group-CO (G-CO) Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trunk group for making
calls. Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive
at this button.
Loop-CO (L-CO) Used to access an idle trunk for making calls. Incoming calls from
any trunk arrive at this button.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Used to access an extension with one touch.
Network Direct Station Selection Used to access an extension at another PBX within the same
(NDSS) network.
One-touch Dialling Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with one touch.
Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for
Group making or receiving calls.
Message Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party
who left the message waiting indication.
FWD/DND (External/Internal/ Used to perform the FWD or DND feature for the extension. The
Both)*1 feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom calls, or both.
Group FWD (External/Internal/ Used to perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call
Both) distribution group. The feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom
calls, or both.
Account Code Entry (Account) Used to enter an account code.
Conference Used to establish a multiparty conversation.
Terminate Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without
hanging up.
External Feature Access (EFA) Used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host
PBX to access their features.
Charge Reference Used to check the total call charge for your own extension.
Call Park Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone.
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically.
Call Log Used to show the incoming call information.
Log-in/Log-out*1 Used to switch between log-in and log-out mode.
Hurry-up Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming
call distribution group to the overflow destination.
230 Feature Guide

Button Usage
Wrap-up*1 Used to switch the Wrap-up/Not Ready and Ready modes.

System Alarm Used to confirm a PBX error.
Time Service*1 Used to switch the assigned time modes: day, lunch, break or night.
Also used to check the current time mode status.
Answer Used to answer an incoming call.
Release Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to
complete a Call Transfer.
Toll Restriction/Call Barring Used to change the TRS/Barring level of other extension users
temporarily.
ISDN Service Used to access an ISDN service.
Calling Line Identification Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service.
Restriction (CLIR)*1
Connected Line Identification Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service.
Restriction (COLR)*1
ISDN Hold Used to transfer a call using the telephone company.
Headset Used to turn on/off the headset mode while idle.
Used to switch between hands-free mode and headset modes
during a conversation.
Time Service Switching Mode Used to switch between the Automatic Switching and Manual
(Automatic/Manual)*1 Switching mode.
Two-way Record Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox.
Two-way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified
extension.
One-touch Two-way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified
extension with one touch.
Live Call Screening (LCS) Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is
leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call.
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension.
Check-in Used to switch the status of extensions from Check-out to Check-in.
Check-out Used to switch the status of extensions from Check-in to Check-out.
Cleaned-up Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and
Not Ready.
CTI Used to access CTI features.
Primary Directory Number (PDN) Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls.
Feature Guide 231

Button Usage
Secondary Directory Number Used to show the current status of another extension, call the
(SDN) extension, and pick up or transfer calls to it.
*1
One-touch Feature Setting Buttons: Pressing these buttons while on-hook changes the feature settings. The new mode will be
displayed for a preprogrammed time period.
Conditions
• The Flexible DSS button lights of the KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 show only "Off" or "Red On". If the button
is customised as a button which shows other light patterns, the other light patterns also show only as "Red
On".

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button

3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
232 Feature Guide


Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and following buttons (Line Status Buttons and
Corresponding Extension Status Button) show line conditions with a variety of light patterns.
Line Status Buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group, PDN
Corresponding Extension Status Button: DSS, SDN
1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
[DPT]
• Incoming call from a trunk: Red flashing
• Incoming call from another extension: Green flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off
[APT]
• Incoming call: Red flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off
2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons
Line Status Button
Incoming
Call
Light Intercom
Trunk Status Distribution
Pattern Line Status
Group Line
Status
S-CO G-CO L-CO INTERCOM ICD Group
Off Idle
Green on This extension is using the line.
Slow green This extension is holding the line.
flashing
Moderate This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold or using the line for an
green Unattended Conference.
flashing
Rapid green Incoming call/ Incoming call
flashing Privacy
Release
Feature Guide 233

Line Status Button
Incoming
Call
Light Intercom
Trunk Status Distribution
Pattern Line Status
Group Line
Status
S-CO G-CO L-CO INTERCOM ICD Group
Red on Incoming call Other — This

for another extensions extension is
extension/ are using all logged out of
Another trunks in the the incoming
extension is trunk group. call
using the line/ distribution
Another group.
extension has
the line on
Exclusive
Hold.
Slow red Another —
flashing extension is
holding the
line.
Rapid red Incoming call to the incoming call distribution —
flashing group in Ring distribution method
For information on the light patterns of PDN and SDN buttons, refer to 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension.
3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
Light Pattern Corresponding Extension Status Button (DSS)
Off Idle
Red on Busy/Incoming call*1/DND for trunk calls
Rapid red flashing Incoming call*2
*1
Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is disabled.
*2
Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled.
4. Flashing Light Patterns
1s
Slow Flashing
Moderate Flashing
Rapid Flashing
234 Feature Guide

Conditions
• The incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority:
ICD Group®S-CO®G-CO®L-CO®PDN®INTERCOM
• The light pattern of a DSS button for incoming call can be set to "Off" through system programming. In this
case, the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension.

→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
→Option 4— DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call

1.13.1 Call Hold
1.14.1.2 Conference
1.14.1.3 Privacy Release
Feature Guide 235

1.20.4 Display Information

Description
A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available:
Display Item Display Example Condition
The extension number and name of the calling 123: Tom Smith –
or called extension, or incoming call distribution
group
Status of the called extension 123: Busy –
The number and name of the optional device D02: 1st Door –
The dialled telephone number 1234567890 –
The received call information The first line message can
a. Caller’s name ABC Company be either (a), (c), or (e) at
b. Caller’s number 12345678 each extension through
c. Trunk number/name Line 001: Sales system programming.
d. Original Destination, if the call is forwarded ®102:Mike These can be displayed in
e. DDI/DID/MSN name Panasonic turn by pressing the
TRANSFER button or
DISP Soft button during a
call.
Call charge fee during a trunk call. 12.35 The currency, position of
the currency symbol, and
the decimal point are
programmable.
Call duration during a trunk call. Line 001 11:02’28 –
Conditions
• Multilingual Display
Each extension can select its display language through personal programming (Display Language
Selection).
• Display Contrast
It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming (Display Contrast Selection).
This is available only for DPTs and IP-PTs.
• Display Backlight
Some extensions can select whether to turn the display backlight on or off through personal programming
(Display Backlight Selection). For details, refer to the manual for your telephone.
• Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the display’s size limitation are not displayed. In this case,
information which have been programmed is hidden, but not altered.

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
→Option 5— Display Language
→Option 5— Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
236 Feature Guide


→Option 5— Display Language
→Option 5— Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Charge
→ Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
→ Charge Options—Currency
→ Charge Options—Currency Display Position
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name

[130] Decimal Point Position for Currency
[131] Currency

Feature Guide 237

1.21.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
1.21 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

Service Features
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Description
ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network. ISDN transmits voice, data, and image in digital format.
ISDN lines, if available, can be connected to public line (trunk), private line (QSIG), or ISDN terminal devices
(extension).
1. ISDN Interface and Configuration
Interface Type Description Port Mode Configuration
Type*3
Basic Rate Interface Provides two 64 kbps B Trunk, Point-to-Point/
(BRI) channels for communication and Extension*1 Point-to-multipoint
one 16 kbps D channel for
QSIG (Master, Point-to-Point
signalling (2B + D).
Slave)*1
Primary Rate Interface Provides thirty or twenty-three Trunk, QSIG Point-to-Point
(PRI) 64 kbps B channels for (Master, Slave),
communication and one 64 kbps Extension*2
D channel for signalling (30B +
D/23B + D).
*1
® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Main— Port Type
*2
® 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main— Port Type
*3
For BRI only:
® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network— Access Mode
® [426] BRI Configuration
Note
Point-to-Point (P-P):
One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port.
Point-to-multipoint (P-MP):
A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port.
2. ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network
Service Description & Reference
Direct Dialling In (DDI) Directs a call with a DDI number to a preprogrammed destination.
(P-P only)
® 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Multiple Subscriber One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs for routing
Number (MSN) incoming calls. (P-MP only)
® 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
238 Feature Guide

Calling Line Identification Sends the caller’s telephone number to the network when making
Presentation (CLIP) a call. The called party can see the number on his telephone
display before answering the call.

(CLIP/COLP)
Connected Line Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network
Identification Presentation when answering a call. The caller can see the number on his
(COLP) telephone display when the line is connected.

(CLIP/COLP)
Calling Line Identification Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the
Restriction (CLIR) caller.

(CLIP/COLP)
Connected Line Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.
Identification Restriction
(COLR) ® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
Subaddressing (SUB) You may add digits after the telephone number. These digits will
be passed to ISDN terminal device.
User-to-user Signalling Transmits a specified volume of the data through the D channel
Type 1 (UUS-1) between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS
types 1.
Advice of Charge (AOC) The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines
from the telephone company.
® 1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by Forwards an incoming call to another outside party using the ISDN
ISDN service of the telephone company.
® 1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

® 1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN Puts one ISDN call on hold.
® 1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party. Call Transfer with
Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement are
available.
® 1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

Three-party Conference Establishes a three-party conference call using the ISDN service
(3PTY)—by ISDN of the telephone company.
® 1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
Feature Guide 239

Malicious Call Identification An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a
(MCID) malicious caller. Information on the malicious call will be received
later on.
® 1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Completion of Calls to Busy If a call is made to an outside party and the party is busy, an
Subscriber (CCBS) extension can receive callback ringing when the called party
becomes free.
® 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
3. ISDN Centrex Service

An extension user can have access to the features of the ISDN Centrex Service of the telephone company
(e.g., Call Transfer). This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash/recall signal.
This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port.
® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— ISDN Centrex
® 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— ISDN Centrex
4. Private Networking Connection (QSIG)
Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line. The QSIG mode, Master or Slave, can be
enabled on an ISDN port basis.
5. ISDN Extension (® 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension)
An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for extension connection. While the extension connection is enabled,
ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 fax machine, PC) or a behind PBX can be connected to
the port.
When the ISDN port is in P-P configuration, one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port.
When the ISDN port is in P-MP configuration, a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected
to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously.
Conditions
• Overlap/En bloc
For each ISDN port, either Overlap or En bloc can be selected as the dialling method for which the PBX
sends telephone numbers to the telephone company. The selected dialling method must be offered by the
telephone company. When "Overlap" is selected, the PBX sends each dialled digit individually.
When "En bloc" is selected, the PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once.
® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— ISDN Outgoing Call Type
® 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— ISDN Outgoing Call Type
In En bloc mode, the PBX recognises that the user is finished dialling when:
– the # key is pressed (programmable).
® 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
– the dialled number is a preprogrammed telephone number.
® 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
– the inter-digit timer expires.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
• Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol (® 1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by
Keypad Protocol).
• Extension Number
An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Number
240 Feature Guide

• Network Type (BRI only)

Each BRI port can be set to the requirements of each country/area.
® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network— Network Type
® [420] BRI Network Type
• L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode (BRI only)
The active mode of Layer 1 (L1) and the data link mode of Layer 2 (L2) can be selected individually
(Permanent or Call by Call) on an ISDN port basis.
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network
® L1 Mode
® L2 Mode
® [425] BRI Layer 2 Active Mode
• TEI Assignment Mode (BRI only)
The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis
® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network— TEI Mode
® [427] BRI TEI Mode
• Bearer Mode
The bearer mode can be assigned on an extension basis.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer
• Automatic ISDN Configuration
ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically through system programming.
® 2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for
each ISDN (BRI) port:
– L1 Active Mode
– L2 Data Link Mode
– Access Mode (Point-to-Point/Point-to-Multipoint)
– TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00–63/Automatic)

2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
→Option 7— ISDN Bearer
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign

[420] BRI Network Type
[424] BRI Layer 1 Active Mode
[425] BRI Layer 2 Active Mode
[426] BRI Configuration
[427] BRI TEI Mode
Feature Guide 241


1.30.4 QSIG Standard Features
242 Feature Guide

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP)
Description
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP):
The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call.
The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call.
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP):

The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an
incoming call. The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is
answered.
[CLIP Example]
1) Dials 2) "12345678"
"87654321". is displayed.
PBX
ISDN
Caller Called party

(CLIP/COLP No.: 12345678) (CLIP/COLP No.: 87654321)
[COLP Example]
1) Dials Called party

"111222333". (CLIP/COLP No.:
111222333)
PBX
ISDN FWD, IRNA, etc.
Caller Answering party

3) "111222444" (CLIP/COLP No.:
is displayed. 111222444)
2) Answers the call.
CLIP/COLP Number:
The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned as follows:
• CLIP/COLP number for each ISDN port (subscriber’s number).
• CLIP/COLP number for each extension.
• CLIP/COLP number for each incoming call distribution group.
Each extension can select either the CLIP/COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used. The
CLIP/COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD
Group button or receiving a call which arrives at the ICD Group button.
Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the
CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.
Feature Guide 243

Conditions
• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.
• CLIP/COLP features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS)
specifications:
– ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) supplementary service.
– ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) supplementary service.
• CLIR/COLR features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS)
specifications:
– ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) supplementary service.
– ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) supplementary service.
• The CLIP/COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which
cannot be assigned their own CLIP/COLP number, such as a doorphone.
• COLP/CLIR/COLR Assignment for Each Port
Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.
• CLIR Button and COLR Button
It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by
pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button.
• The CLIP/COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company.
Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number.
• When using a private network, the extension number assigned for each extension through system
programming is sent for CLIP/COLP. (® 1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG)
• When forwarding calls to a public trunk, system programming selects whether the CLIP number of the
calling party or of the forwarding extension is sent to the forward destination.

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
→ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
→Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
→CO Setting— Subscriber Number
→Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Subscriber Number
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Subscriber Number
→ COLR Set / Cancel
→ CLIR Set / Cancel
→ Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
→ Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of held party)
→ Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— CLIP on ICD Group Button
→ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
→ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
→ISDN CLIP— CLIR
→ISDN CLIP— COLR
244 Feature Guide


→ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
→ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
→ISDN CLIP— CLIR
→ISDN CLIP— COLR

[422] BRI Subscriber Number
[606] CLIP/COLP Number


1.8.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
1.8.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line
Identification Restriction [COLR])
1.8.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR])
Feature Guide 245

1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Description
The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company.
There are the following types:
Type Description
Advice of Charge During AOC is received during the call and when the call is completed.
Call (AOC-D)
Advice of Charge AOC is received when the call is completed.
At End of Call (AOC-E)
Conditions
• This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specification:
– ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge (AOC) supplementary service Digital Subscriber Signalling System No.
One (DSS1) protocol.
• A DPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call.
• Budget Management
If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit, an extension user cannot make further calls.
(® 1.9.2 Budget Management)
• AOC for ISDN extension
An ISDN extension also receives AOC.

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
246 Feature Guide

1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Description
An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the
telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line.
Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis. The setting must have been
done beforehand to use this feature. There are the following types:
Type Description
Call Forwarding— Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally.

Unconditional (CFU)
Call Forwarding—Busy (CFB) An incoming call is forwarded when the destination in the PBX is
busy.
Call Forwarding—No Reply An incoming call is forwarded when the destination in the PBX does
(CFNR) not answer within a preprogrammed time period.
When the CFB or CFNR has been set, the network determines to forward the incoming call to the
preprogrammed destination after the call reached the PBX once. When the CFU has been set, the network
forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination.
[Example]
<FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) by ISDN (P-MP)>
ISDN
ISDN MSN:123-4567
CFU
Destination: 01-23-4567
MSN: 123-4567
987-6543
PBX PBX
Outside Caller Outside Party Outside Caller Outside Party

(01-23-4567) (01-23-4567)
Dials "123-4567". Dials "123-4567".
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011

(MSN: 123-4567
Forward Destination
of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)
Conditions
– ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service.
Feature Guide 247

• The feature requires the MSN service. (® 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service)
• COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— CF (MSN)


248 Feature Guide

1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Description
An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the
telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line.
The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set in the PBX as the
forward destination of trunk calls; the network is instructed by the PBX. This feature is available only when the
call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature.
Call Forwarding—Unconditional (CFU), Call Forwarding—Busy (CFB), and Call Forwarding—No Reply
(CFNR) are applied to this feature.
[Example]
<FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) by ISDN (P-P)>
ISDN ISDN
CF Request
to 01-23-4567
PBX
PBX
Outside Caller Outside Party Outside Caller Outside Party

(01-23-4567) (01-23-4567)
Dials "01-45-6789". Dials "01-45-6789".
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011

(DDI No.: 01-45-6789 (DDI No.: 01-45-6789
Forward Destination Forward Destination
of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567) of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)
Conditions
– ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.
• This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— CF (MSN)
Feature Guide 249


1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

250 Feature Guide

1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Description
An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature.
This can be a part of a Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN (® 1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN) and Three-party
Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN (® 1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN). This feature allows
an ISDN call to be held, and a call to be made to another outside party using only one communication channel
of ISDN. A PT user can easily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button.
Conditions
– ETS 300 141 Call Hold (HOLD) supplementary service.
• ISDN Hold Button
A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button.
• The TRS/Barring feature is applied when making a call after activating this feature. (® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
• ARS cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature. (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS))
• It is impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN Hold

Feature Guide 251

1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

Description
An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead
of the PBX feature, without occupying a second ISDN line.
Conditions
– ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer (ECT) supplementary service.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis.
• If an ISDN port is in P-P configuration, this feature can be used only when the network supports the "explicit
linkage" option.
• Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible. (® 1.12.1 Call
Transfer)
• The call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX.


252 Feature Guide

1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

Description
During a conversation using an ISDN line, an extension user can add another party and establish a three-party
conference call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature.
Conditions
– ETS 300 188 Three-Party (3PTY) supplementary service.
• The availability of this feature depends on the contract with the telephone company.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis.


Feature Guide 253

1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Description
An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during a call or while hearing
reorder tone after the caller hangs up. Information on the malicious call will be received later on.
Conditions
– ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) supplementary service.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— MCID

1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID])
254 Feature Guide

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Description
If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line, an extension user can set to receive
callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers the callback ringing, that
party’s number is automatically dialled.
Conditions
– ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) supplementary service.
• This feature is available under the following conditions:
a. The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS and the service is provided by the network.
b. The called party’s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.
• To receive and send CCBS, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port
basis through system programming.
• An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.
• The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not
answered within 10 seconds.
• After using the CCBS feature, using Last Number Redial will not retrieve the number dialled by CCBS.
(® 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial)
• An extension user that has set the CCBS feature cannot receive callback ringing while the extension is
holding a call.

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service
→ COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
→CCBS Option
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service
→ COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
→ CCBS Type
→ CCBS Delete Digits

Feature Guide 255

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Description
An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for either trunk or extension connection. When extension connection is
enabled, ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 fax machine, PC) or a behind PBX can be connected
to the port.
If the ISDN port is in point-to-point (P-P) configuration, one terminal device can be connected to the port. If the
ISDN port is in point-to-multipoint (P-MP) configuration, a maximum of eight terminal devices can be connected
to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously.
Individual terminal devices on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN).
The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit, 0 through 9 or 00 through 99.
[Example]
Extn. No.: 1234

ISDN Port for
EXTN. (P-MP)
1234:
Up to eight terminals
... can be connected to
the port and receive
PBX (1234) (1234) ... (1234) a call simultaneously.
Extn. No.: 13X (MSN) 131–139:

ISDN Port for
Up to eight terminals
EXTN. (P-MP)
can be connected to
the port.
...
130:
(131) (132) ... (139) All terminals receive
a call simultaneously.
ISDN Port for Extn. No.: 14XX (MSN)
EXTN. (P-P/P-MP)
ISDN Port for

EXTN. (P-P/P-MP)
Behind
PBX 1400–1499:
Extn. No.: 15XX Each terminal
(MSN) ...
receives a call.
(Use the DDI/MSN
(1400) (1401) ... (1499) feature of the
Idle Extension behind PBX.)
Hunting is available.
Conditions
• Subaddressing
Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices. The subaddress goes through the PBX to the
ISDN terminal devices directly.
• Call Transfer (PBX feature) is available only for ISDN extensions in P-MP configuration. (® 1.12.1 Call
Transfer)
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group (® 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution
Group Features) or idle extension hunting group (® 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). In this case, an MSN
can be assigned.
256 Feature Guide

• If the last digit of the MSN is "0", all terminal devices on the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously,
if the specification of each terminal device is available. To use the MSN whose last digit is "0" as an
individual MSN, system programming is required for each ISDN port.

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Extension Setting

Feature Guide 257

1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Description
ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol, and they may require a service access code to
be dialled.
Conditions
– ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service (ISDN Service Access).
• ISDN Service Button
A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button. A service access code can also be assigned
on this button for a quick operation.
• This feature is not available to an SLT.

→ Type
→ Dial (for ISDN Service)
→ Type
→ Type


1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)
258 Feature Guide

1.22.1 E1 Line Service
1.22 E1 Line Service Features

Description
The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbps-voice channels at 2.048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line.
Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
1. Channel Type
[DR2 (Digital System R2)/E & M-C (Continuous E & M)/E & M-P (Pulsed E & M)]
The E1 card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the
three channel types can be assigned to each of the 30 channels of the E1 card individually according to
tariffs and customer needs.
2. E1 Features
The following table shows the features available for each channel type:
[Feature Table]
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Channel Type
TIE DID DIL ANI Call Charge Information
DR2 ü ü ü*1 ü
E & M-C ü ü ü ü*2
E & M-P ü ü ü ü*2
ü: Available
*1
Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC-R2.
*2
Available when this PBX is connected to a KX-NCP series/KX-TDE series/KX-TDA series PBX, or KX-TD500.
[Explanation]
Number in the
Feature Description
Table
(1) TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (®
1.30.1 TIE Line Service)
(2) Direct Inward Dialling (DID) Refer to the DID feature. (® 1.1.1.3 Direct
Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In
(DDI))
(3) Direct In Line (DIL) Refer to the DIL feature. (® 1.1.1.2 Direct
In Line (DIL))
Feature Guide 259

Number in the
Feature Description
Table
(4) Automatic Number Outgoing ANI:
Identification (ANI) Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line. The
sending method is the same as ISDN CLIP
service. (® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP))
Incoming ANI:
Receives the caller’s number from the E1
line.
When the ANI number is received, it can be
treated the same as a Caller ID number.
(® 1.18.1 Caller ID)
(5) Call Charge Information The call charge meter pulses can be
received during a conversation. (®
1.26.3 Call Charge Services)
Conditions
• If an E1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.
• If "MFC-R2" is selected as the Dial Mode, the PBX always sends a dial tone, instead of the telephone
company, when making a trunk call using E1 line.

3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
260 Feature Guide

1.23.1 T1 Line Service
1.23 T1 Line Service Features

Description
The T1 line carries twenty-four 64 kbps-voice channels at 1.5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private
line. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
1. Channel Type
[LCOT/GCOT/DID/TIE/OPX]
The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the
five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the T1 card individually according to tariffs
and customer needs.
2. T1 Features
The following table shows the features available for each channel type:
[Feature Table]
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Channel Type
TIE DID DIL OPX ANI
LCOT ü
GCOT ü
DID ü ü ü
TIE (E & M) ü ü ü ü
OPX ü
ü: Available
[Explanation]
Number in the
Feature Description
Table
(1) TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (® 1.30.1 TIE
Line Service)
(2) Direct Inward Dialling Refer to the DID feature. (® 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward
(DID) Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))
(3) Direct In Line (DIL) Refer to the DIL feature. (® 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line
(DIL))
Feature Guide 261

Number in the
Feature Description
Table
(4) Off Premise Extension An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it
(OPX) were installed locally. The SLT makes and receives a
call through the PBX. An extension number can be
given to the OPX, and extension data such as COS is
also applied.
[Example]
Telephone Company
SLT
T1 LCOT T1 OPX
T1 Card
Extn.103
PBX
Dials "103".
Extn.101 Extn.102
(5) Automatic Number Receives the caller’s number from the T1 line.
Identification (ANI) When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the
same as a Caller ID number. (® 1.18.1 Caller ID)
Conditions
• If a T1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.

3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
262 Feature Guide

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24 Voice Mail Features

Description
A VPS can be connected to extension ports of the PBX. The extension ports make a group, called a VM group.
This group has a floating extension number. The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and
incoming calls. When receiving a call, the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message
or dial a number to reach the desired party. The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave
notification on the corresponding extension, if the called extension is not able to answer calls.
1. VM Group Type
Type Description
A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF

Integration features.
VM (DTMF) Group
A maximum of 2 (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (for
KX-TDE600) groups can be assigned.
A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
• A maximum of 2 (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (for
KX-TDE600) KX-TVS/KX-TVP systems can be
VM (DPT) Group connected to the PBX.
• A maximum of one VM (DPT) group per KX-TVS/
KX-TVP can be assigned.
• A maximum of 12 ports (24 channels) of the VPS can
form each group.
[Example]
PBX
VM (DPT) Group VM (DTMF) Group

Floating extn. no. 500 (default) Floating extn. no. 250
Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104 Extn.117 Extn.118 Extn.119 Extn.120
DPT SLT DPT DPT DPT DPT SLT SLT SLT SLT
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port
VPS VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration) (DTMF Integration)
VM (DTMF) Group Assignment:

The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX. These SLT ports, as well as VM (DTMF) Group settings,
must be configured to allow DTMF Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of
Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group].
Feature Guide 263

VM (DPT) Group Assignment:

The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX. These DPT ports, as well as VM (DPT) group settings,
must be configured to allow DPT (Digital) Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of
Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group].
[Programming Example of Extension Port]

DPT Property
Slot Port Port Type Extn. No. Unit No. Port No.
Type*1 of VPS*2 of VPS*3
3 1 DPT 101 VM (DPT) 1 1 VM (DPT)
3 2 DPT 102 VM (DPT) 1 2 Group 1
: : : : : : :
4 1 S-Hybrid 201 VM (DPT) 2 1 VM (DPT)
4 2 S-Hybrid 202 VM (DPT) 2 2 Group 2
: : : : : : :
5 1 SLT 301 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable VM (DTMF)
5 2 SLT 302 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Group 1
: : : : : : :
6 1 SLT 401 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable VM (DTMF)
6 2 SLT 402 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Group 2
*1
® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type
® [601] Terminal Device Assignment
*2
® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—VM Unit No.
*3
® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—VM Port No.
[Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group]
Floating Extension No. of

VM (DTMF) Group Service Port Connected to
Extension
Group No. Name Mode VPS Port
No.
1 2 …
1 300 Company C AA 301 302 …
2 400 Company D VM 401 402 …
® 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
[Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group]
VM (DPT) Group No. Floating Extension No.*1 Group Name*2

1 500 Company A
2 200 Company B
*1
® 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No.
® [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
*2
® 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings— Group Name
2. Incoming Calls to VM Group
When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group, calls will hunt starting
at the lowest VM port number. In this case, the FWD and DND settings (® 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/
Do Not Disturb (DND)) for each extension port are disregarded.
It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system
programming. If the queuing is disabled through system programming, the call will be redirected to the
destination, assigned on the trunk group which receives the call, by the Intercept Routing feature.
264 Feature Guide

Conditions
• It is possible to call an extension (extension port) in a VM group directly. If the calls are routed directly to
the extension in the group, it is possible to enable some features (e.g., FWD, Idle Extension Hunting) on
the extension in the group.
The Voice Mail DTMF/DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., command transmit) is also available on the extension.
• One-touch Voice Mail Feature Access
It is possible to assign a One-touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature. (®
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling) For example, to access a mailbox (mailbox number 123) of the VPS (extension
number 165) directly, assign "165#6123" to a One-touch Dialling button. When pressing this button, the
outgoing message (OGM) of the mailbox will be heard.
• All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to a single DHLC or DLC card.

→ DPT Type—Type
→ DPT Type—VM Unit No.
→ DPT Type—VM Port No.
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

[601] Terminal Device Assignment
[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Feature Guide 265


Description
The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other.
The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering
service between Voice Mail (VM) service mode and Automated Attendant (AA) service mode or to inform the
extension status (e.g., busy). The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT.
The following answering services and features are available:
1. Voice Mail (VM) Service Mode

When a caller reaches the VPS, the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a
specified mailbox.
[Example]
The VPS sends the message to the caller, "Thank you for calling Panasonic. Please enter the mailbox
number of the person you wish to leave your message for."
¯
The caller dials the mailbox number. Then, the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the PBX.
¯
The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller, "You have reached Mike’s voice mail. I am sorry I
cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message and I will call you back."
¯
The caller leaves a message.
If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) Group or the extension in the VM
(DTMF) group by such as the FWD feature, when the VPS answers the call, the PBX will dial the mailbox
number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically
using the caller-dialled number (Follow on ID). In this case, the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing
the mailbox number.
[Available Features for Follow on ID]

a. FWD to a Mailbox
b. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox
c. Call Transfer to a Mailbox
d. Listening to a Message in a Mailbox
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service Mode
The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance.
3. VM ® AA Service, AA ® VM Service
It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port, from the VM service to AA service or
vice versa.
System Explanation
1. Service Mode Assignment
Assign the service mode, VM service or AA service, to the VM (DTMF) group to correspond with the
assignment of the VPS.
® 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Type
2. DTMF Command Assignment
Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings.
266 Feature Guide


® VM DTMF Command—Recording Message
® VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
® VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
® VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Command (Default)
Switching to VM #6
Switching to AA #8
Recording message H
Listening message H
Note
H = Mailbox Number
3. VM Service
a. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded
from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without
knowing the mailbox number.
[FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection]

If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS. It is also
possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are forwarded so that the
caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by
selecting "AA" through system programming.
® 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence
Transmitted Command
Parameter
In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode
Answer by Mailbox Switching to VM command + Recording message command

(Default) Recording message command (H [H = Mailbox No.])
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
AA Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)
None (DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
b. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a trunk call is
intercepted from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called
extension without knowing the mailbox number.
[Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection]

If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to
the VPS.
It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are intercepted
so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by
selecting "AA" through system programming.
® 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS
Sequence
Feature Guide 267

Transmitted Command
Parameter
Answer by Mailbox Switching to VM command + Recording message command

Recording message command (H [H = Mailbox No.])
AA Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)
None (Default) (DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
[Example of a) & b)]

Trunk Call
Sent "#6" + "102".

PBX mailbox number
Switching to VM command
FWD, Intercept
Transfer
VPS (In AA service mode)
Operator Extn. 102 VM Port 1 VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port X VM Port 3
c. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message
in the mailbox of the desired extension. (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer) The extension user should use the
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS.
When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will
transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required
command (after the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing
the mailbox number.
® Type
® Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
® Type
® Type
268 Feature Guide

[Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number]

Transmitted Command
Switching to VM command + Recording Recording message command (H [H =

message command (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.]) Mailbox No.])
[Example]
Trunk Call
Sent "#6" + "103".

mailbox number
PBX Switching to VM command
Transfer with VM Transfer

button + extension number (103)
Extension VPS (In AA service mode)

(Operator)
VM Port 1 VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port X VM Port 3
d. Listening to a Recorded Message

If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature on the corresponding
telephone to notify the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. The Message
button light of the extension will turn on (® 1.19.1 Message Waiting), thereby notifying the extension
user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing
the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling
such as a mailbox number. It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message
Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the Message button light).
® 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control
When the PBX is selected, the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has
accessed the VPS. When the VPS is selected, the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the
extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox.
[Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button]

Transmitted Command
Switching to VM command + Listening Listening message command ( H [H =

message command Mailbox No.])
Feature Guide 269

[Example]
PBX Sent "#6" + " ", "102".
Listening message
command, mailbox number
Switching to VM command
Pressing the
MESSAGE
button
Extn. 102 VPS (In AA
service mode)
Mailbox for
Extn. 102
4. AA Service
If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called
destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the
extension without listening to the system tones (e.g., ringback tone).
Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings.
[DTMF Status Signals and Conditions]

Status Condition Default Command
RBT (ringback tone) The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension. 1

BT (busy tone) The called extension is busy. 2
ROT (reorder tone) The dialled number is invalid. 3
DND (DND tone) The called extension has set DND. (® 1.3.1.3 Do 4
Not Disturb (DND))
Answer The called extension has answered the call. 5
FWD VM RBT (FWD to The called extension has set FWD to VPS and the 6
Voice Mail ringback PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
tone)
FWD VM BT (FWD to The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all 7
Voice Mail busy tone) ports of the VPS are busy.
FWD EXT RBT (FWD to The PBX is calling an extension other than the one 8
extension ringback dialled. FWD or Idle Extension Hunting (®
tone) 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting) may be assigned by
the called extension.
Confirm (confirmation The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has 9
tone) been successfully set or cancelled (e.g., Message
Waiting) on the extension.
Disconnect The caller has hung up. #9

® VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone
® VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone
® VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone
® VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone
270 Feature Guide

® VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer

® VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm
® VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect
® VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone
® VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone
® VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
[Example] 1 An incoming call reaches the VPS. The VPS

1 greets the caller: "Thank you for calling
Panasonic. If you know the extension
PBX
number of the person you wish… ".
2 Transfer 2 The caller dials the extension number (extn.
102).
3
The VPS will transfer the call to the extension
Sent "2". via the PBX.
Busy 4 3 If the extension is not available, the PBX
Busy Status sends DTMF status signal of the extension
VPS (busy status) to the VPS.
Extn.
102 4 The VPS receives the DTMF status signal
and send the appropriate message to the
caller: "Sorry. The extension is busy. Would
you like to leave a message… ".
Conditions
• Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension
number of the VM group as the parameter.
• It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the
Follow on ID to the VPS.
® 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on
ID
• It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to
the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS.
® 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Timing—DTMF Length for VM
• It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number, or the mailbox
number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group (Mailbox Access
ID).
® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed
Mailbox No.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
• The Inter-digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable.
® Timing—Inter-digit Time
® Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal
• Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM (DTMF) group to achieve proper
recording. (® 1.11.5 Data Line Security)
Feature Guide 271


4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox No.
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
→ Type
→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
→ Type
→ Type


272 Feature Guide


Description
A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., the KX-TVP200) can be connected to this PBX
in a tightly integrated fashion.
DPT (Digital) Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX.
Feature Explanation
1. Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup
The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming
call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically.
2. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS. (® 1.3.1.2 Call
Forwarding (FWD)) The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS.
Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox
number.
3. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the
VPS. (® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing) If the "Intercept to Mailbox" setting is enabled through system
programming, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS.
Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox
number.
® 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Intercept to Mailbox
4. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the
mailbox of the desired extension. (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer) The extension user should use the Voice Mail
(VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses
this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and
dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command (after the VPS
answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.
5. Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS
If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS and the call is
not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the
transfer destination extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the
extension without knowing the mailbox number. The "Transfer Recall to Mailbox" setting should
be enabled through system programming to use this feature.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
® 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Transfer Recall to Mailbox
® [201] Transfer Recall Time
6. Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Mailbox Access)
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the Message
button light, and showing the number of messages waiting on the display of a 6-line display PT) on the
corresponding telephone as notification. (® 1.19.1 Message Waiting) Thereby, the VPS notifies the
extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on,
pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without
dialling such as a mailbox.
When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM (DPT) extension port or the floating
extension number of the VM (DPT) group from his extension, he can listen to the messages stored in his
mailbox without dialling his mailbox number (Direct Mailbox Access). It is possible to disable this feature
by COS programming on the VPS.
7. VPS Trunk Service & Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call*1
Multiple tenants can share a single VPS; each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port. If the
destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM (DPT) group, the PBX sends the VM trunk group number and
Feature Guide 273

time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the tenant (® 2.2.4 Time Service) assigned for the call to the VPS.
Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message (company greeting) to the caller.
Corresponding VM trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming
trunk call as follows:
a. DIL/TIE: the setting of each trunk port (® 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL), 1.30.1 TIE Line Service)
® Tenant Number
® VM Trunk Group No.
b. DID/DDI: the setting of each location number for DID/DDI (® 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI))
® Tenant Number
c. MSN: the setting of each MSN (® 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service)
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table—MSN
® Tenant Number
[Example]
For DID Calls:
Each location number can have its VM trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.
[DID Programming Example]
Location DID No. DID Destination VM Trunk Tenant

DID Name
No. Day Lunch Break Night Group No. No.
0001 123-4567 105 100 105 100 John White 1 1

0002 123-2468 102 100 102 100 Tom Smith 2 3
: : : : : : : : :
[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]
Trunk Group No. Company Greeting No. Incoming Call Service ··

Day 1 Custom Service 11 ··
Lunch 2 Custom Service 29 ··
1
Break 3 Custom Service 31 ··
Night 4 Custom Service 12 ··
Day 5 Custom Service 21 ··
Lunch 6 Custom Service 15 ··
2
Break 7 Custom Service 42 ··
Night 8 Custom Service 30 ··
: : : : ··
Explanation:
A DID call reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature. According to the [DID
Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a
caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.
274 Feature Guide

Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and
company greeting number.
Trunk Call Trunk Call
123-4567 123-2468
Sends the following information:
· VM Trunk Group: 1
· Time mode: Day
PBX
Intercept
Sends the following information:

· VM Trunk Group: 2
· Time mode: Night
Tenant 1 Tenant 3
(Company A) (Company B)
VPS
(Floating Extn. No. 500)
Extn. 105 Extn. 102
8. Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS

When receiving a trunk call, the PBX sends the caller’s identification number/name to the VPS.
9. DID Number Notification to the VPS
When receiving a trunk call with a DDI/DID number or an MSN, the PBX sends the DDI/DID number or
MSN to the VPS. The number will be sent to the VPS even if the call reaches the VPS after redirection by,
for example, the Intercept Routing feature.
10. Status Notification to the VPS
After the call is redirected by the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension (e.g., busy)
to the VPS.
11. Paging by the VPS
The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message. (® 1.16.1 Paging)
12. Live Call Screening (LCS)
A PT or PS user can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer
the call by pressing the LCS button. When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox, monitoring can
be carried out in two ways: each PT user can choose which through personal programming (Live Call
Screening Mode Set). PS users cannot choose the way: only Private mode is available for them.
Hands-free mode: The user can monitor the call automatically through the built-in speaker.
Private mode: The user will hear a warning tone. To monitor the call, the user goes off-hook with the
handset, MONITOR button, or SP-PHONE button. However, PS users cannot monitor the call with the
speakerphone.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Answer Mode
13. Two-way Recording into the VPS
A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.
The Two-way Record button is used to record into one’s own mailbox. The Two-way Transfer button is
used to record into someone else’s mailbox.
Feature Guide 275

Note
Before recording a Two-way telephone conversation, you should inform the other party that the
conversation will be recorded.
14. VPS Data Control by the PBX*1
The date and time settings of the VPS are controlled by the PBX.
15. Remote FWD Setting by the VM*1
Extension FWD settings can be programmed using the VPS.
*1
This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS.
Conditions
[General]
• When programming a KX-TVM series VPS, if there is no option to connect to a KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
PBX, select the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PBX.
• Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension
number of the VM group as the parameter.
[Live Call Screening (LCS)]

• This feature is not available for ISDN extensions and SIP extensions.
• If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT, and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode, both the PT
and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status. The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being
recorded. The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off-hook. To intercept the call, press Flash/
Recall button or flash the hookswitch. (® 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone)
• LCS Button
A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button.
• Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
To prevent unauthorised monitoring, it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension PIN. This PIN
will be required when setting LCS. (® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)) If the user
forgets the PIN, it can be cleared by an extension assigned as the manager.
• Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after
the call is intercepted, through personal programming (LCS Mode Set [After Answering]).
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode
• To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, LCS can only be turned on or off from the
wired telephone. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, setting LCS on/off from the PS has no effect. (®
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
[Two-way Recording into the VPS]

• Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Two-way Record or the Two-way Transfer button. An extension
number can be assigned to the Two-way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one-touch record
button for the mailbox of the specified extension. (One-touch Two-way Transfer Button).
• When all of the VPS ports are busy:
a. Pressing the Two-way Record button sends a warning tone
b. Pressing the Two-way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends a warning tone.
[Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS]
• When transferring a trunk call to a mailbox of the VPS, users should use the VM Transfer button.
If using a standard Transfer button, users must dial "#6" after accessing the VPS, and confirm that the
desired mailbox has been reached, before going on hook to complete the transfer.
276 Feature Guide


4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
→ LCS Recording Mode
→ LCS Answer Mode
→ Type
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode
→ Type
→ Type
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— VM Trunk Group Number
→ Tenant Number
→ Tenant Number
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table—MSN
→ Tenant Number

[201] Transfer Recall Time

2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Feature Guide 277

1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
1.25 Portable Station (PS) Features

Description
This PBX supports the connection of a PS. Cell Stations (CSs) allow PSs to receive reception within a
designated area. It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT.
Conditions
• The PS registration is required through the system programming. To avoid unexpected registration to
another PBX, the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for the PBX is necessary to register a PS. The
registration can be cancelled.
• Handover
Even if a PS user moves during a conversation, the PS will automatically switch between cells without
disconnecting the call (Handover).
Handover is available in any of the following cases:
a. During a conversation with an extension or outside party.
b. While a call is ringing at the PS.
c. While the PS is in idle status.
PBX
CS
CS Handover:
Interface
Calls will not be
disconnected.
CS
However, Handover is not available in any of the following cases:

a. When the new (Handover) CS is busy.
b. When there is no CS within range.
c. While the Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
d. While the PS user is paging other extensions (® 1.16.1 Paging).
e. During a doorphone call (® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call).
f. While the PS user is dialling digits to make a trunk call.
g. During a conversation with an extension using PC Console or PC Phone, to which the conversation is
being recorded.
h. While participating as a member of a Conference Group Call (® 1.15.1 Conference Group Call).
• When a caller has dialled the extension number of a PS but the CS is busy, the caller hears a busy tone.
• For more information about connecting PSs to CSs, see the Quick Installation Guide for the relevant CS.
• The number of digits allowed for a PS extension number is determined by the PS model. See your PS
documentation for details.
278 Feature Guide


3.61 [1-2] Portable Station

[690] PS Registration
[691] PS Termination
[692] Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration

Feature Guide 279

1.25.2 PS Ring Group

Description
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension
number and name. One PS can belong to multiple groups.
PS Ring Group 01 PS Ring Group 02 PS Ring Group 03 ..
Floating Extn. No. 301 302 303 ..

Group Name Sales 1 Sales 2 Sales 3 ..
Incoming Trunk Call Called Party’s Name/ Caller’s Name/ Caller’s Name/ ..
Information Display Number Number Number
PS01 ü ..
PS02 ü ..
PS03 ü ..
PS04 ü ü ..
PS05 ü ..
PS06 ü ..
PS07 ü ..
: : : : :
ü: Constituent
PS Ring Group 1 PS Ring Group 2

(Floating Extn. No. 301 (Floating Extn. No. 302
Name: Sales 1) Name: Sales 2)
PS01 PS04
PS03 PS06
PS02 PS05
Conditions
• PS Ring Group
A maximum of 32 groups can be created.
• Compatible PSs
The following PSs can be assigned to PS ring groups:
– KX-TD7580
– KX-TCA155
– KX-TCA255
– KX-TCA256
280 Feature Guide

– KX-TCA355
– KX-TD7680
– KX-TD7684
– KX-TD7685
– KX-TD7690
– KX-TD7694
– KX-TD7695
• Incoming trunk call information is shown on a PS display when a trunk call arrives at a PS ring group which
the PS joins. The display information can be selected on a PS ring group basis through system
programming: Called Party’s Name/Number or Caller’s Name/Number.
• Calling Multiple PSs Simultaneously
There are two methods to call multiple PSs simultaneously using the floating extension number assigned
to the following groups:
Method Assignment Merit Demerit
Incoming Call Assign all desired PSs to All PS users in the The CS may often be
Distribution Group one incoming call group can use the busy as each PS in
distribution group, and set Log-in/Log-out the group uses one
the group call distribution feature, Wrap-up channel when a call
method for the group to feature, and ICD arrives at the group.
"Ring". Group button for the
group.
® 1.2.2 Incoming Call
Distribution Group Features
PS Ring Group Assign all desired PSs to Only one channel is PS users in the group
one PS ring group. used when a call cannot use the
arrives at the group. Log-in/Log-out and
Wrap-up features.
• When a PS joins a PS ring group, the following personal settings are disregarded:
a. When the PS ring group is called:
– Delayed Ringing
– Display information when the incoming calls arrive;
The settings (e.g., display priority) are disregarded.
– The setting which is assigned on the PS (e.g., FWD)
– The status of the PS (e.g., busy)
b. Log-in/log-out setting (from the PS ring group/from the incoming call distribution group which the PS
ring group belongs to). (® 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out)
Feature Guide 281

Note
Log-in/log-out setting of the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded.
PS Ring Group
Log-out
Log-in
PS Ring
Group
Log-out
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
Log-in
Log-out
Log-in
• When the PS ring group is called using the floating extension number, the group becomes busy to other
callers using the floating extension number. However, the individual group members may be called directly
using their extension number.
• If a PS in a PS ring group has set the DND feature for trunk calls, the PS will not ring when an intercom
call or a trunk call arrives at the PS ring group. (® 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND))
• For calls directed to PS ring groups, the PBX will handle at most two calls simultaneously. The third call
cannot arrive at a PS ring group until one of the first two calls is answered or a caller hangs up.

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Distribution Method
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List

282 Feature Guide


Feature Guide 283

1.25.3 PS Directory
1.25.3 PS Directory
Description
A PS user can store numbers and/or names in the directory. A stored number is dialled by selecting a name
or number in the directory.
Depending on the PS model, the PS user can use the following directories for easy operation:
Type Description
PS Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a private directory of names and
telephone numbers.
System Speed Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names and
numbers.
PBX Extension Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension
names.
Shortcut Directory Accesses a feature by selecting from a private directory of feature
names and numbers.
Quick Dialling Makes a call or accesses a feature easily by selecting from a private
directory of names and numbers.

→ Name
→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name

284 Feature Guide

1.25.4 PS Feature Buttons
1.25.4 PS Feature Buttons

Description
A PS user can use PBX features using a combination of buttons (button + a specified number, , or #) and/
or display operation. The flexible buttons and the display are customised through PS programming. The button
assignment is the same for the PT (® 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons). Some special feature buttons (e.g.,
WAVESEARCH button) may be customised depending on the PS type.
Feature Guide 285

1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Description
A PS can be used in parallel with a wired telephone (PT/SLT). In this case, the wired telephone is the main
telephone and the PS is the sub telephone. When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled, the two telephones
share one extension number (main telephone’s extension number), as with XDP Parallel mode for a DPT and
an SLT.
PBX
Super
Hybrid
Port Cell Station
XDP Parallel Mode Wireless XDP

Parallel Mode
DPT Wireless Phone PT/SLT PS
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Conditions
• If one of the telephones goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call, the call is switched to the
telephone going off-hook. However, the call is not switched in one of the following conditions:
a. During a Conference call (® 1.14.1 Conference Features).
b. While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
c. While receiving OHCA (® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)).
d. While being monitored by another extension (® 1.8.3 Call Monitor).
e. During Consultation Hold.
f. During a Conference Group Call (® 1.15.1 Conference Group Call).
• Wireless XDP Parallel Mode can only be set from a PS. The wired telephone can accept or deny this feature
through COS programming. Once this feature is set, the setting at the wired telephone cannot be changed
unless a PS changes the setting.
• The following features are not available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the PS is on
a call (however, they are available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the wired telephone
is on a call):
– Executive Busy Override (® 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override)
– Whisper OHCA (® 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA)
– CCBS (® 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS))
• Most of the extension data (e.g., extension number, extension name) of the wired telephone is used for its
PS as well. However, the PS has its own extension data for the following:
– Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection (® 1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming (® 1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing (® 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing)
– Hot Line Setting (® 1.6.1.7 Hot Line)
286 Feature Guide

– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer) (® 1.13.2 Call
Park)
– Display Language (® 1.20.4 Display Information)
– ISDN Bearer Mode (® 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY)
– Flexible Button Assignment (® 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons)
Note
To change the setting of the extension data above, the setting for the wired telephone or the PS must
be changed individually. When changing the PS setting, use the PS’s original extension number (not
the main telephone’s extension number), if required.
• When the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode has been set, the following extension data for the wired telephone
is copied to the PBX extension data for the PS and the extension data remains there even when the
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is cancelled.
– Call Waiting Setting (® 1.1.3.3 Call Waiting)
– FWD/DND Setting (® 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))
– Call Pickup Deny Setting (® 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup)
– Executive Busy Override Deny Setting (® 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override)
– Itemised Billing Code for ARS (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))
– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer) (® 1.13.2 Call
Park)
– CLIP/COLP Number and CLIP/COLP Number Selection (® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP))
– CLIR and COLR Setting (® 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP))
– Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) (® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number
(PIN))
– COS Programming (® 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS))
– Extension User Group (® 2.2.2 Group)
• If Extension Feature Clear is performed, the corresponding extension data for both the wired telephone
and the PS will be cleared. (® 1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear)
• When a call arrives, both the wired telephone and the PS ring. However, in the following cases only the
extension from which the option was set will receive ringing:
– Automatic Callback Busy (® 1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on))
– Transfer Recall (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer), Hold Recall (® 1.13.1 Call Hold), and Call Park Recall
(® 1.13.2 Call Park)

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode Set by PS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Wireless XDP

[515] Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone
Feature Guide 287



1.8.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
288 Feature Guide

1.25.6 Virtual PS
1.25.6 Virtual PS
Description
An extension number can be assigned for a portable station (PS) without registering the PS unit itself. This is
known as temporary registration. If a forward destination is then assigned for this PS, all calls to that extension
number will be forwarded to the assigned destination. Using this setting to forward calls to outside destinations
or destinations at another PBX allows those destinations to receive calls as if they were within the PBX. In
addition, depending on system programming, the forward destination can use some of the features of the PBX.
This can be especially useful for a cellular phone user, who can use his cellular phone as if it were his extension
when he is away from his desk.
[Example]
Telephone Company
Outside Caller
TIE Line Network

PBX-1 PBX-2
TIE Line
Dials "201"
Virtual PS 1 Virtual PS 2
Extn. 201 Extn. 202
Fwd to outside Fwd to destination
destination at other PBX
The following features can be accessed using this method:
Outside Destinations in A virtual PS allows calls to an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group
Incoming Call Distribution to be answered by outside destinations or extensions at another PBX.
Group
® 1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
Network ICD Group Using virtual PSs in an ICD Group, up to 4 other PBXs can be called
at the same time.
® 1.30.6 Network ICD Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD One PS can be registered at up to 4 PBXs. Using virtual PSs in an
Group ICD Group, all 4 PBXs can be called simultaneously to search for the
PS.
® 1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
Feature Guide 289

1.25.6 Virtual PS
Built-in Simplified Voice Registering a virtual PS as the first extension of an ICD Group
Message provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not
shared with an actual extension.
® 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Conditions
• To use this feature, call forwarding to trunks must be enabled through COS programming.

3.61 [1-2] Portable Station

[690] PS Registration

290 Feature Guide

1.26.1 Record Log Features
1.26 Administrative Information Features

Description
Automatically records detailed information for each extension.
1. SMDR Output Port
The following output methods can be selected through system programming:
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Port
Output Method Description
Serial Interface (RS-232C) port SMDR information is sent to a connected PC, printer, etc.
Telnet compatible terminal emulator SMDR information is sent to a Telnet compatible terminal
emulator via LAN.
2. SMDR Output Data

The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port:
a. Trunk call information (incoming/outgoing)
b. Intercom call information (outgoing)
c. Log-in/Log-out information
d. PBX error log (® 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information)
e. Hospitality feature information (® 1.27.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY)
f. Printing Message information (® 1.26.2 Printing Message)
Memory for SMDR: A specified number of call records can be stored in the PBX. If more calls are originated
or received, the oldest record is overwritten by the newest one.
When an IPCMEC card is installed, the number of SMDR records that can be stored will increase.
3. SMDR Format Type and Contents
The following three types of output format can be selected through system programming:
Feature Guide 291

Pattern A: 80 digits without call charge information
Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration ACC Code CD

(8 digits) (7) (5) (2) (25) (4) (8) (10) (3)
01/02/02 10:03AM 1200 01 12345678901234567890 5'15 00:00'00 NA

01/02/02 10:07AM 1200 01 0'05 00:01'05 9876543210
01/02/02 10:15AM 1200 01 1234567890123456 00:01'05 9876543210 TR
01/02/02 10:30AM *123 01 1234567890123456 00:01'05 9876543210
01/02/02 01:07PM 1234 01 ABC COMPANY12345678 0'05 00:01'05 9876543210

01/02/02 01:07PM 1234 01 <D>CDE9876Q COMPANY 0'05 00:01'05 9876543210
01/02/02 01:07PM 1234 01 ABC COMPANY12345678 00:01'05
01/02/02 01:07PM 1234 01 123.............. 00:01'05
01/02/02 01:07PM 1234 01 123456XX 00:12'05 98765
01/02/02 08:33AM 1234 In the office

01/02/02 01:07PM 1234 LOG IN
01/02/02 03:35PM 1234 LOG OUT
01/02/02 03:45PM 1234 EXT1235
01/02/02 03:50PM 1234 Check in
01/02/02 03:55PM 1234 Check out
01/02/02 04:00PM 1234 Timed Reminder/Start
01/02/02 04:01PM 1234 Timed Reminder/No Answer
01/02/02 04:01PM 1234 Timed Reminder/Answer
01/02/02 04:05PM 1234 S003 RC
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Pattern B: 80 digits with call charge information
Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Duration Cost ACC Code CD

(8 digits) (7) (5) (2) (20) (8) (8+2) (10) (3)
01/02/02 10:03AM 1210 01 NA

01/02/02 10:07AM 2005 01 1234567890123456789 00:00'05 00560.00EU 9876543210
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (7) (10) (8) (9)
Pattern C: 120 digits
Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Cost ACC Code CD
(8 digits) (7) (5) (4) (50) (4) (8) (8+3) (10) (3)
01/02/02 10:03AM 1230 0001 123456789012345678901234567890 00:00'05 00560.00EUR 9876543210 TR

01/02/02 10:07AM 1230 0001 ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0'05 00:00'05 9876543210 TR
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (10) (8) (9)
[Explanation]
The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern
examples. For the programmable items, refer to the following [Programmable Items].
292 Feature Guide

Number in
Item Description
the Pattern
(1) Date Shows the date of the call.
(2) Time Shows the end time of a call as Hour/Minute/AM or PM.
(3) Ext Shows the extension number, floating extension number, etc.,
(Extension) which was engaged in the call.
Also shows the following codes:
Dxxx: Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone (xxx=doorphone
number) (® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call)
Txxx: Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service (xxx=trunk group
number)
*xxx: Verified call (xxx=verification code) (® 1.9.6 Verification
Code Entry)
(4) CO (Trunk) Shows the trunk number used for the call.
For patterns A and B, "00" will be shown for trunk numbers over
hundred.
Feature Guide 293

Number in
Item Description
the Pattern
(5) Dial Number [Trunk Call]
Outgoing Trunk Call
Shows the dialled telephone number.
Valid digits are as follows:
0 through 9, , #
P: Pause
F: EFA signal
=: A Host PBX Access code (® 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code
(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))
. (dot): Secret dialling
X: Privacy dial
–: Transferred call
If the transfer destination extension enters some digits, the
entered digits will be added after "–".
Incoming Trunk Call

Shows + the caller’s identification name/number.
It is also possible to show the DDI/DID/MSN call information. In
this case, <D> + DDI/DID/MSN name/number is added before
 .
[Outgoing Intercom Call]
Shows the dialled extension number followed by "EXT".
[Log-in/Log-out]
Shows the log-in or log-out status.
[Check-in/Check-out]
Shows the check-in or check-out status. (® 1.27.2 Room Status
Control)
[Timed Reminder]
Shows the status of a timed reminder, either "Start", "No
Answer", or "Answer". (® 1.28.4 Timed Reminder)
[Printing Message]
Shows the selected message. (® 1.26.2 Printing Message)
[Sensor Call]
Shows calls from an external sensor as follows:
 S + sensor number. (® 1.17.8 External Sensor)
(6) Ring Shows the ring duration before answering a call in Minutes/
Seconds.
(7) Duration Shows the duration of the trunk call in Hours/Minutes/Seconds.
(8) Acc Code Shows the account code appended to the call. (®
(Account 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry)
Code)
294 Feature Guide

Number in
Item Description
the Pattern
(9) CD (Condition Shows other call information with the following codes:
Code) CL: Collect call
TR: Transfer
FW: FWD to trunk
D0: Call using DISA or TIE line service
RM: Remote maintenance (modem) (® 2.3.1 PC Programming)
NA: Not answered call
RC: Received call
AN: Answered call
VR: Received call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
VA: Answered call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
(10) Cost Shows the call charge.
[Programmable Items]
Item Description
Outgoing trunk call Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown. This setting
is common throughout the PBX. COS programming is also
required.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing
Call
® [804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing
Incoming trunk call Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Incoming
Call
® [805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing
Outgoing intercom call Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Intercom
Call
Log-in/Log-out status Controls whether the log-in/log-out status is recorded.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in /
Log-out
ARS dial Controls whether the user-dialled number or the modified number
is shown.
The Host PBX Access code ("=" followed by the access code) can
be shown (as supplementary information) only when the modified
number is selected in this setting. (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS))
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial
Caller’s identification Controls whether the caller’s identification number, name,
number and name, or nothing is shown. If "none" is selected, 
will not be shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Caller ID
Number & Name
Feature Guide 295

Item Description
DID/DDI number Controls whether the DID/DDI number, name, number and name,
or nothing is shown. If "none" is selected, <D> will not be shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—DDI/DID
Number & Name
Secret dialling Controls secret dialling. If enabled, the dialled number will be
shown as dots.
This setting is effective only when the modified number is selected
in ARS dial setting above. If the user-dialled number is selected
in ARS dial setting, the dialled number will be shown as dots
regardless of this setting.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Secret Dial
Privacy dial Enables or disables privacy dial. If enabled, the last four digits of
the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after
connection will be shown as "X". (e.g., 123-456-XXXX)
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Privacy Mode
Date order The date order is changeable: month/day/year, day/month/year,
year/month/day, year/day/month.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Date Format
Received call Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is
shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Condition
Code "RC"
Answered call Controls whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is
shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Condition
Code "AN"
Room status Controls whether room status changes are shown.
® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel
Application 1—Room Status Control
Timed Reminder call Controls whether Timed Reminder calls are shown (®
1.28.4 Timed Reminder).
Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Printing Message Specifies the messages that can be selected from an extension
(® 1.26.2 Printing Message).
Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Time format Controls whether time is displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Time Format
(12H / 24H)
Conditions
[General]
• SMDR Format
296 Feature Guide

The following SMDR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being
used in the printer:
a. Page Length: determines the number of lines per page.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)
® [802] SMDR Page Length
b. Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)
® [803] SMDR Skip Perforation
The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.
Explanation:
Page
Length
Skip
Perforation
Machine
Perforation
• SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset.

• If the PBX is reset during a conversation, the call will not be recorded on SMDR.
• The following calls are regarded as two separate calls for SMDR:
– Calls before and after the flash/recall/EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation
– Trunk-to-trunk calls by Call Transfer, FWD or DISA (recording each as "incoming call" and "outgoing
call")
• The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer
for outgoing trunk calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this
timer expires, the PBX starts counting the call. A display PT shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting
time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start
® [208] Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT
If the reverse signal detection has been set (® 1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit), the PBX will start counting the
call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer.
• Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters
The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port.
a. New Line Code: Select the code for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines
with carriage return, select "CR". If not, select "CR+LF".
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—NL Code
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code
b. Baud Rate: A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the PC or printer.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Baud Rate
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate
c. Word Length: A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Word Length
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length
d. Parity Bit: A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits
composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or
printer.
Feature Guide 297

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Parity Bit

® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit
e. Stop Bit Length: A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select
an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Stop Bit
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length
• If a call is transferred to an ICD group using Automatic Transfer, the condition code "TR" will not be recorded
on SMDR (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer).
[Host PBX Access Code]

• The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified
number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.
• When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are not
recorded on SMDR.
• A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a trunk port is
connected directly to the telephone company (not a host PBX). This is allowed when the long distance
code (e.g., "0") is assigned as the Host PBX Access code. All local calls (e.g., calls that do not require
a "0" to be dialled first) are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on
SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognises the telephone company as the host PBX. Therefore, only
long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.
[Output to a Telnet compatible Terminal Emulator]

• In order to activate a connection to a terminal emulator, the IP address of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card,
port number, user ID ("SMDR"), and password must be entered.
• If a terminal emulator user incorrectly enters the user ID or password 3 times consecutively, an alarm will
be sent and connection will not be possible for 10 minutes.
• Through system programming, it is possible to assign the PBX port number and password.
• The terminal emulator application must be running constantly. If the application is terminated, call records
that occur after the termination will be recorded in the PBX's memory. However, if the number of call records
exceeds the PBX's capacity, older records will be deleted. Also, when the application restarts or is
reconnected, duplicated call records may be output.
[Using SMDR with applications]

SMDR data can also be monitored by applications such as Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA). For
more information, see your application's documentation.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600
3.3.3 IPCMEC Card (KX-TDE0105)

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
→Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
→Charge— Charge Options—Currency
13.1 [11-1] Main
298 Feature Guide

→SMDR
→SMDR Options
→RS-232C

[800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length
[802] SMDR Page Length
[803] SMDR Skip Perforation
[804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing
[805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing

1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Feature Guide 299

1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management

Description
By connecting this PBX to a Syslog server over a LAN, it is possible to output local alarm information (major
alarms/minor alarms) to a external PC.
Conditions
• To be able to use this feature, through system programming, it is required to enable this feature, register
the IP address of the Syslog server, and to select whether major/minor are sent.

13.1 [11-1] Main— Syslog

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information
300 Feature Guide

1.26.2 Printing Message
1.26.2 Printing Message

Description
An extension user can select a message to be output on SMDR. Up to eight messages can be preprogrammed
in the Printing Message table, and are available to all extensions connected to the PBX. A message can contain
the "%" symbol, which requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected at an
extension.
Depending on the content of the preprogrammed messages, this feature can be used to record a variety of
information, which can be output on SMDR to, for example, a connected PC.
[Example]
If message 1 is preprogrammed as "Started work", and message 2 as "Finished work", employees can sign in
by selecting message 1 when starting work, and sign out by selecting message 2 when finishing. A connected
PC can then be used to generate employee work records.
Conditions
• Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Printing Message
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8


1.11.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
Feature Guide 301

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Description
The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party. The call charge
information is shown on the telephone display and SMDR.
1. Call Charge Signal Services

The type of call charge service that is used by the PBX is decided by the type of signal received from the
telephone company. The type of call charge signal received from the telephone company depends on the
trunk of the outgoing call. The services for each available trunk type are as follows:
Trunk Service
Analogue trunk Pay Tone*1

ISDN line Advice of Charge (AOC) (® 1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC))
E1 line Meter Pulse
*1
When the pay tone service is used, pay tone type (12 kHz/16 kHz) should be selected.
2. Call Charge Display
– Up to eight digits including a decimal (e.g., 12345.78)
– The decimal point position (the number of significant decimal digits) for currency is programmable.
– Up to three currency characters are programmable. (e.g., EUR or for Euro).
– Through PC programming, you can select whether the currency characters or symbol are placed in
front of or behind the call charge. (e.g., 45.12 or 45.12 )
3. Margin/Tax Rate Assignment
It is possible to add a margin and a tax to the call charges. The call charge rate per meter indication is
programmable on a trunk group basis.
[Calculation Method]
The margin or tax rate must consist of four digits, two digits before and after the decimal (xx.xx%). The
calculation method used by the PBX varies, depending on whether the telephone company sends the meter
indication or the actual call charge.
a. Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication:
[Meter indication received from the telephone company] [Call Charge Rate] [1 Tax Rate]
[1 – Margin Rate]
b. Call charge with tax and margin in charge:

[Charge received from the telephone company] [1 Tax Rate]
[1 – Margin Rate]
The calculation result is rounded up to the least significant decimal digit.

4. Total Call Charge
– A PT user can show the total call charges on the display.
– The call charge is totalled on an extension, trunk, or verification code basis.
– When a verification code is used, the call is charged on the verification code and not the extension that
the call was made on.
5. Budget Management
It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verification code.
For example, an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for telephone usage. If the amount of the
call charge reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further trunk calls. An extension assigned
as the manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge (® 1.9.2 Budget Management).
302 Feature Guide

6. Call Charge Management

An extension assigned as a manager can perform the following:
a. Clear the call charges for each extension and verification code.
b. Clear the call charges of all extensions and verification codes.
c. View the call charges (Call Charge Reference) for each trunk, extension, or verification code.
d. Set the call charge rate for each trunk group.
e. Print out the total call charges for all extensions and verification codes.
f. Set a budget for each extension and verification code.
[Examples of Call Charge Reference]
******************************************************
* Charge Meter Print Out - Total & All CO *
******************************************************
Total Charge: 00175.95
CO Line
001: 00194.00 002: 00073.00 003: 00161.00 004: 00033.00
*******************************************************
* Charge Meter Print Out - All Extensions *
*******************************************************
*775: 00194.00 *102: 00073.00 *776: 00161.00
104: 00194.00 105: 00073.00 106: 00161.00 107: 00033.00
Note
*: extension or verification code number
Conditions
[General]
• Call Charge Reference by Call Charge Reference Button
A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the Call Charge
Reference button. A flexible button can be customised as the Call Charge Reference button.
[Pay Tone Service]
• It is possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the
answer signal from the telephone company.
• It is possible to enable the PBX to send the flash/recall signal to the telephone company after a conversation
(in on-hook status) to receive the call charge information.

3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
→ Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency
→ Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
Feature Guide 303


→ Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
→ Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
→ Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
→ Charge Options—Currency
→ Charge Options—Currency Display Position
→ Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
→ Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

[010] Charge Margin
[011] Charge Tax
[012] Charge Rate per Unit
[130] Decimal Point Position for Currency
[131] Currency
[491] Pay Tone Signal Type


304 Feature Guide

1.27.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
1.27 Hospitality Features
1.27.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY

Description
This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel-type environment, where extensions correspond
to guest rooms.
Room Status Control An extension designated as the hotel operator can set the check-in
status of rooms remotely.
® 1.27.2 Room Status Control

Call Billing for Guest Room Charges for calls from guest rooms can be logged and output as a
guest bill.
® 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Remote Wake-up Call An extension designated as the hotel operator can set a timed
reminder for a room remotely.
® 1.28.4 Timed Reminder

SMDR for External Hotel Hospitality feature data, including check-in, check-out, and timed
Application reminder times, can be output to SMDR for use in a PC-based hotel
application.
® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Feature Guide 305

1.27.2 Room Status Control

Description
A PT with a 6-line display designated as a hotel operator extension can be used to view and set the Check-in/
Check-out/Cleaned-up (Ready or Not Ready) status of guest rooms associated with extensions.
Any wired extension can be used as a room extension without special programming.
Flexible buttons on the hotel operator’s extension can be set as Room Status Control buttons. The 3 types of
Room Status Control buttons are as follows:
• Check-in
Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check-out to Check-in.
Telephone charges are cleared and Remote Extension Dial Lock is turned off, allowing calls to be made
from the extension.
• Check-out
Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check-in to Check-out.
Room extension data, such as Timed Reminder or Last Number Redial data, is cleared, and Remote
Extension Dial Lock is turned on, restricting some calls. This can be useful to prevent the room extension
from being used when no guest is checked in.
When checking a room extension out, the operator can enter customer charges such as minibar charges.
A guest bill showing these charges, as well as call charges, can be printed. If necessary, the guest charge
data entered can be edited later, and the bill reprinted.
• Cleaned-up
Switches the status of selected room extensions between Ready and Not Ready.
When a guest checks out of a room, the room status becomes Checked-out and Not Ready. After the room
has been cleaned, the status can be changed to Checked-out and Ready using this button. It is also
possible to change the status back to Checked-out and Not Ready if necessary.
Room Status Control Mode

Pressing a Room Status Control button when the PT is idle allows the hotel operator extension to enter Room
Status Control mode. When in Room Status Control mode, the corresponding Room Status Control button’s
light flashes red. The Room Status Control button that was pressed determines which room status each room
extension can be switched to. For example, if the Check-in button was pressed, the Check-in button’s light
flashes red and the hotel operator can select which room extensions to check-in.
In addition, DSS buttons on the hotel operator’s extension or a paired DSS Console show the room status of
each extension as follows:
Light Pattern Status
Off Checked-out and Ready

Flashing Red Checked-out and Not Ready
Red on Checked-in
306 Feature Guide

[Example Use: Checked-in Mode]
DSS button
Room101 Rooms 101 and 103
Room102 are currently in
Room103 checked-in status.
Room104
Check-in button
Room105
Check-out button
Cleaned-up button
When in Room Status Control mode, the hotel operator’s extension is treated as a busy extension, similar to
when performing PT programming. Callers to that extension will hear a busy tone.
All other operations, including pressing other Room Status Control buttons, will be ignored. In addition, the
lights of fixed and flexible buttons do not show their normal display pattern. In order to perform other operations,
the hotel operator must exit Room Status Control mode.
Conditions
• SVM voice messages and messages left on the extension’s Voice Mail (VM) will be cleared at Check-out.
• A maximum of four hotel operators can be assigned.
• Only one of each type of Room Status Control button can be assigned.
• Extensions associated with rooms must be one of the following types:
PT (including IP-PT), SLT, ISDN Extension, T1-OPX
PSs cannot be checked in and out as room extensions.
• It is recommended that the extension number of a room extension is the same or similar to the room
number, for convenience.
• The previous guest’s billing data is only cleared when an extension is set back to Check-in status. Thus,
it is possible to edit guest charge data and reprint the bill at any time until another guest is checked in to
the same room.
• If enabled through system programming, the check-in and check-out information is recorded on SMDR.

8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
→Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
→Bill— Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Feature Guide 307

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Description
Separately from SMDR, it is possible to output a record of calls along with charges (e.g., telephone charges,
minibar, etc.), which can be used in billing a guest.
Charge Items
This feature provides three types of programmable charge items (Charge Item 1, Charge Item 2, and Charge
Item 3) which can be used for billing guests for various services (e.g., telephone charges). Each charge item
can be customised in the following ways:
– A name that appears on the call billing print out.
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Bill
® Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone"
® Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Minibar"
® Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others"
– A name that appears on the display telephone of the hotel operator.
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Bill
® Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
® Checkout Billing—LCD for "Minibar"
® Checkout Billing—LCD for "Others"
– A tax rate.
® Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
® Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
® Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)
Charge Item 1 can also be assigned a margin rate, which is useful for charging guests an additional rate for
using the telephone services.
® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Charge— Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
It is possible to print out a bill for a guest. The bill will show the following items:
308 Feature Guide

[Example of Call Billing Sheet]
****************************************
(1) * Hotel *
****************************************
(2) Check in : 01.JAN.00 06:31PM
(3) Check out : 03.JAN.00 07:03AM
(4) Room : 202 : Mr. Smith
(5) 01/01/00 06:52PM 202 01 Call amount:0012 01:24'30 00084.50 001

02/01/00 06:07PM 202 01 123456789 00:10'12 00010.20 1234567890
02/01/00 07:30PM 202 01 012345678901234 00:06'36 00006.60 12345
02/01/00 08:45PM 202 01 0011234567890123 00:03'00 00003.00 12345
(6) Telephone 104.30 (Tax 10.000% = 9.48)

Minibar 4.00 (Tax 10.000% = 0.36)
Others 0.00 (Tax 15.000% = 0.00)
(7) Total FR 108.30 (Tax Total = 9.84)
(8) Sheet : 002
(9) ======= Hotel TDEPBX =======
Tel: +41 3 12 34 56 78 Fax: +41 3 12 34 56 78
E-Mail: 12345678 hoteltdepbx.ch
1. A programmable title (e.g., hotel name).

® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Bill— SMDR for External Hotel Application—Header 1–3
2. The check-in time.
3. The check-out time.
If the guest has already been checked out, the check-out time will be shown. If not, the time that the bill
was printed will be shown.
4. The extension number and name.
5. A list of all calls made and call charges (using the same format as SMDR output Pattern B [®
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)]).
6. The total charge for each charge item and tax, including the preprogrammed tax rate.
7. The combined charges of all three charge items, currency of the charge, and tax.
8. The sheet number (the number of times that the current guest’s charge data has been printed out and then
cleared).
9. A programmable footer (e.g., the contact information of the hotel).
® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Bill— SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3
It is possible to select the language used on the guest bill.

® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Bill— SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)
Walking COS
If guests are given extension personal identification numbers (PINs), it is possible for calls made from other
extensions (e.g., an extension in a hotel restaurant) to be charged to the guest’s room extension by using the
Walking COS feature (® 1.9.5 Walking COS).
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
Feature Guide 309

Conditions
• If the total number of call records exceeds 90 % of available memory, call records from the extension with
the largest number of records will be automatically printed out, and the records printed out will be combined
in memory into one aggregate record to save space.
• With the KX-TDE600, when an IPCMEC card is installed, the number of call records that can be stored will
increase.

8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Bill— Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
→ Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
→ Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
→ Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
→ Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)


310 Feature Guide

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
1.28 Extension Controlling Features

Description
Each extension user can have his own PIN through system programming or personal programming (Extension
PIN [Personal Identification Number]) to set features or access his own telephone remotely.
The following features cannot be used without the PIN:
a. Live Call Screening (LCS)*1 (® 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
b. Display Lock (® 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System, 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(SVM), 1.18.2 Incoming Call Log)
c. Walking Extension (® 1.28.3 Walking Extension Features)
d. Extension Dial Lock (® 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock)
e. Walking COS (® 1.9.5 Walking COS)
f. Walking COS through DISA (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
*1
If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN, this feature cannot be used without the PIN.
Conditions
CAUTION
• Extension PIN Lock
preprogrammed number of times successively, that extension will become locked, and even entering the
correct PIN will not unlock it. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the
PIN will be unlocked and cleared. This feature is also known as Station Password Lock.
• Remote Extension PIN Clear
If an extension user forgets his PIN, a manager can clear the PIN. Then the extension user can assign a
new PIN.
• Extension PIN Display
It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming. By
default, it is shown as dots.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension PIN Set / Cancel
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
Feature Guide 311


[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

312 Feature Guide

1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

Description
Extension users can clear all the following features set on their own telephone at once. This feature is also
known as Station Programme Clear.
Features After Setting
Absent Message Off

BGM Off
FWD*/DND* Off
Call Pickup Deny Allow
Call Waiting* Disable (In Canada, the default setting is "Enable" [Call
Waiting tone].)
Data Line Security Off
Executive Busy Override Deny Allow
Log-in/Log-out Log-in
Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be
cleared.
Paging Deny Allow
Parallelled Telephone Paired SLT will ring.
Hot Line* Off
Timed Reminder Cleared
Note
The features with "*" can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature.
Conditions
• Extension Dial Lock (® 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock) and the extension personal identification number (PIN)
(® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)) will not be cleared by this feature.
• For Users in Canada only
If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear:
After performing Extension Feature Clear, Call Waiting will be enabled if "Extension Clear: Call
Waiting" is set to "Clear" through system programming. In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when
going off-hook. (® 1.29.1 Dial Tone)

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension Feature Clear
→ Extension Clear—Call Waiting
→ Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
→ Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Feature Guide 313


1.8.13 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
314 Feature Guide

1.28.3 Walking Extension Features
1.28.3.1 Walking Extension

Description
It is possible to use any extension and have your extension settings available to you. Settings such as extension
number, one-touch dialling memory, and COS are all available to you at the new location. This feature is also
known as Walking Station.
[Example] This feature is useful when:
• Moving location
• There is no specific desk for your use.
Conditions
• This feature allows extension settings to be switched between PTs (including IP-PTs), and SLTs. Moving
between tenants is also possible.
• Incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location.
• An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (® 1.28.1 Extension
Personal Identification Number (PIN))
• If a DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the PT after Walking
Extension has been activated, the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the paired
extension through system programming.
• If PC programming is being performed for extensions whose extension settings are being transferred by
the Walking Extension feature, the Walking Extension feature may not work properly (® 2.3.1 PC
Programming).
• If this feature is performed using an extension with a Bluetooth wireless headset connected, the Bluetooth
device cannot be used with the new extension. To use the Bluetooth wireless headset, register it to the
new extension.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension

[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

1.12.1 Walking Extension
Feature Guide 315

1.28.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension

Description
It is possible to use the Walking Extension feature with extensions in Service-in (functions normally) and
Service-out (cannot make trunk calls or receive calls) modes, allowing extensions and locations (i.e.,
telephones) to be utilised more efficiently. Extensions can be set to Service-out mode when the extension user
is not using the extension or to prevent calls from being made or received when no one is using the location.
The extension can then be changed to Service-in mode when the extension user wishes to use the extension.
Enhanced Walking Extension can be utilised as follows:
– When a single extension user uses multiple telephones
Extension users can switch locations with a Service-out extension. This allows extension users to use their
settings at another location while the previous location is in service-out mode. This is ideal for when
extension users need to work at multiple locations, such as another department, branch office, or at home.
– When multiple extension users use the same telephone
Extension users can change the service status of their Service-out extension to Service-in mode and switch
locations with another extension with a simple operation. This is ideal for when the same telephone is used
by multiple extension users who work in shifts.
Service-out mode
When an extension is in Service-out mode, the DND and Extension Lock features are set on the extension,
preventing the extension from making trunk calls and receiving calls.
[Example]
Extension settings can be used at other locations as follows:
Main Office
Extn. 101 Service-out Extn. 101 Service-in Extn. 102
Service-in Service-out Service-out
Branch Office
Service-out Service-out Service-in
Extn. 102 Extn. 102 Extn. 101

Explanation:
The extension user of extension 101 changes to Service-out mode at the main office. He then changes his
extension to Service-in mode and switches extension settings at the branch office.
Virtual Locations
Instead of assigning all extensions to telephones, it is possible to store unused extensions (i.e., Service-out
mode) on a preinstalled extension card (i.e., settings are made but no physical location is utilised). When the
extension needs to be used, the extension can switch locations and service status with an extension on a
physical location (i.e., a location with a telephone).
[Example]
316 Feature Guide

Extension settings can be switched allowing multiple extension users to use the same telephone as
follows:
Virtual
Location
Extn. 101 Service-out Extn. 101 Extn. 101
Service-in Service-out Service-in
Virtual Virtual
Location Location
Extn. 102 Extn. 102 Service-in Extn. 102
Explanation:
The extension user of extension 101 changes to service out mode. The extension user of extension 102
switches extension settings and changes his extension to Service-in mode.
Conditions
• This feature is not available for PSs, ISDN extensions, T1 OPX extensions, and SIP extensions.
• An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (® 1.28.1 Extension
Personal Identification Number (PIN))

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension

1.28.3.1 Walking Extension

1.12.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
Feature Guide 317


Description
An extension can be preset to ring at a certain time, to act as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be
programmed to activate only once, or daily. If the user answers the alarm call, a prerecorded voice message
will be heard. If a message is not assigned, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard.
Timed reminders can be set in one of two ways:
• By the extension user, from his own extension.
• Remotely, by the hotel operator (Remote Wake-up Call)
Conditions
• Be sure that the PBX clock works.
• Only one timed reminder can be set for an extension at a time. Setting a new reminder clears the previous
reminder. If both the extension user and the hotel operator set a timed reminder for the same extension,
the timed reminder that was set most recently is effective.
• Programmable Time
The Alarm Ringing Duration time, the number of alarm repeat times, and intervals are programmable
through system programming.
• To use the voice message feature:
An extension assigned as the manager can record messages (® 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)). A
different message can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 2.2.4 Time Service).

→ Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
→ Timed Reminder—Interval Time
→ Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
→ Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
→ Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2— Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)


1.8.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
318 Feature Guide

1.29.1 Dial Tone
1.29 Audible Tone Features
1.29.1 Dial Tone

Description
The following distinctive dial tones inform extensions about features activated on their extensions.
Each dial tone type has two frequencies (e.g., dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B).
Type Description
Tone 1A/1B A normal dial tone is heard when:

a. No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been
set, or
b. ARS is used.
Tone 2A/2B This tone is heard when:
• There are messages that have previously been listened
to and no new messages for the Built-in Simplified Voice
Message (SVM) feature.*1
• Any of the features below are set.
• Absent Message
• BGM
• FWD
• Call Pickup Deny
• Call Waiting
• DND
• Extension Dial Lock
• Executive Busy Override Deny
• Hot Line
• Timed Reminder
Tone 3A/3B This tone is heard when:
• A called PS is being searched for.
• The recording time used by the Built-in Simplified Voice
Message (SVM) feature reaches the limit.*1
• Any of the features below are performed.
• Account Code Entry
• Consultation Hold
• Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message
• Answering a sensor call
Tone 4A/4B This tone is heard when new messages have been recorded
for the extension.
*1
Active even when distinctive dial tones are disabled.
Conditions
• Dial Tone Type A/B
It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4. If "Type A" is selected, all dial tones
1 through 4 will become dial tone type A.
Feature Guide 319

1.29.1 Dial Tone
The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately. If "Type A" is selected for the ARS,
dial tone 1A will be heard. If "Type B" is selected, dial tone 1B will be heard.
• Distinctive dial tones can be disabled. When disabled, dial tone 1 will be heard in all cases except those
marked with "*1" in the table above.
• Dial Tone Patterns
All dial tone patterns have a default (® 3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).
• Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM (DPT/DTMF) group. (® 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM)
Group)

→ Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
320 Feature Guide

1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Description
At the end of feature operations, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone
to extension users.
Type Description
Tone 1 a. Sent when the setting is accepted.

b. Sent when a call is received in voice-calling mode
(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). The caller’s
voice will be heard after the tone.
Tone 2 a. Sent from an external paging device or an extension
before being paged.
b. Sent when a call is received in Hands-free
Answerback mode.
Tone 3-1 a. Sent before a conversation is established when
using the Paging feature.
b. Sent when a conversation is established with the
extension in the following modes after the call
making operation:
• Hands-free Answerback mode
• Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/
Voice)
c. Sent when making a call to or from a doorphone.
Tone 3-2 Sent just before a conversation is established when
accessing the following features by the feature numbers:
• Call Park Retrieve
• Call Pickup
• Hold Retrieve
• Paging Answer
• TAFAS
Tone 4-1 Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party
call. (e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference,
Privacy Release, Two-way Record.)
Tone 4-2 Sent when moving from a three-party call to a two-party
call. (e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference,
Privacy Release, Two-way Record.)
Tone 5 Sent when a call is placed on hold (including
Consultation Hold).
Conditions
• Confirmation Tone Patterns
All confirmation tone patterns have a default (® 3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones).
• It is possible to eliminate each tone.
Feature Guide 321


→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from Doorphone
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
322 Feature Guide

1.30 Networking Features

Description
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations. The TIE lines can be used to call through
the PBX to reach another switching system (PBX or telephone company). By using TIE lines, the PBX can
support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private
network where the PBX is included.
Interface
The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network:
Interface Network Type
E&M Analogue
T1 (TIE [E & M]) Digital (64 kbps ´ 24 channels)
E1 (E & M) Digital (64 kbps ´ 30 channels)
BRI/PRI (QSIG) Digital (ISDN 2B+D/30B+D/23B+D)
VoIP Internet Protocol (IP)
The available interfaces depend on the cards installed in the PBX.

® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property
® 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property
® 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property
® 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Trunk Property
® 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Trunk Property


1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 323

1.30.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call

Description
One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call.
<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>

Dial the [Extension Number] only.
[Example]
PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX-3
TIE Line TIE Line

Interface Interface Interface Interface
Extn.1011 Extn.1012 Extn. 2011 Extn. 3011
Dials "3011". Dials "2011".
Explanation:
To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX
(e.g., 10XX for PBX-1, 20XX for PBX-2) to allow calls to be routed properly.
Case 1:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2011".
® Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 2011 of PBX-2.
Case 2:
324 Feature Guide

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>

Dial the [TIE Line Access Number] + [PBX Code] + [Extension Number].
® 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
® 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Own PBX Code
[Example]
PBX-1 PBX-2 PBX-3
PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 PBX Code 953
TIE Line TIE Line

Interface Interface Interface Interface
Extn.1011 Extn.1012 Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011
Dials "7-953-1011". Dials "7-952-1011".
[PBX code]
[TIE line
access no.]
[Extn. no.]
Explanation:
To use this method, it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension.
Case 1:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension number "1011".
Case 2:
Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "953", and extension number "1011".
Feature Guide 325

1.30.1.2 TIE Line and Trunk Connection

Description
To connect the TIE line with the trunk, the following patterns are available:
1. Trunk-to-TIE Access
2. TIE-to-Trunk Access
3. Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access
Trunk-to-TIE Access
It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX.
It is also possible to forward calls using a virtual PS. Using this method, trunk calls received at PBX-1 are
forwarded directly to the extension at PBX-2, even when using the PBX Code method.
a. Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment
[Example]
Telephone Company
Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
Trunk DID No: 4567
Destination: 2011
TIE Line
Interface Interface
Outside Caller
Dials "123-4567". Extn. 2011

Extn. 1011
Explanation:
An outside caller dials "123-4567". The call is sent to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line
according to the assignment of the DID call destination of PBX-1. (® 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI))
® 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [453] DID Destination
326 Feature Guide

b. FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the TIE Line

[Example]
Telephone Company
Trunk TIE Line Network

PBX Code: 951 PBX Code: 952
Trunk PBX-1 PBX-2
TIE Line
Interface Interface
Forwarded/Transferred
/Intercepted to 7-952-2011
Outside Caller
Extn. 1011 Extn. 2011
Dials "123-4567".
Explanation:
An outside caller dials "123-4567". The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-1), and the
call is forwarded, transferred, or intercepted to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line.
Feature Guide 327

TIE-to-Trunk Access
The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks of another PBX through the TIE lines.
a. Trunk Call through Other PBXs
[Example]
Telephone Company
Trunk 211-4567 Trunk

TIE Line Network
PBX-1 PBX-2
9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line Interface
TRG 2
Outside Party
Extn. 1011 Extn. 2011 (211-4567)
Dials "802-9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group
number "02" (TRG2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "211-4567".
® 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Trunk Group Access
2. PBX-1 sends the call to PBX-2 through the trunk group (TRG) 2 (TIE line).
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "211-4567".
328 Feature Guide

Telephone Company

TIE Line Network
PBX-1 PBX-2
PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952
952-9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line Interface
TRG 2
Outside Party
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011 (211-4567)
Dials "7-952-9-211-4567" or
"802-952-9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Line Access
number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "211-4567"; or dials the Trunk Group Access number of
PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), PBX code "952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9",
and telephone number "211-4567".
2. The call is connected to the outside party "211-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952".
Feature Guide 329

Trunk Call through Other PBXs—by the ARS feature

[Example]
<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code) using ARS>
Telephone Company

TIE Line Network
PBX-1 PBX-2
9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line Interface
TRG 2
Outside Party
Extn. 1011 Extn. 2011 (211-4567)
Dials "9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone
number "211-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2
through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.
330 Feature Guide

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code) using ARS>
Telephone Company

TIE Line Network
PBX-1 PBX-2
952-9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line Interface
TRG 2
Outside Party
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011 (211-4567)
Dials "9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone
number "211-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call
to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS
programming of PBX-1.
b. Blocking trunk calls made through another PBX and how to override it:
Whether an incoming TIE line call can make a trunk call through this PBX (i.e., PBX-2), depends on the
COS that is assigned to the trunk group of this PBX, that the incoming TIE line is connected to. If the COS
of the trunk group is unable to make outgoing calls by the Toll Restriction/Barring feature or External Call
Block feature, trunk calls made through this PBX will be prohibited.
To override this prohibition, an extension of PBX-1 must enter a verification code assigned to PBX-2 to
change the COS temporarily. It is also possible to override the prohibition by specifying an extension at
PBX-2 with the Walking COS feature, to temporarily switch to that extension’s COS.
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® 4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
® 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
® [500] Trunk Group Number
Feature Guide 331

[Programming Example of PBX-2]
Trunk Group No. COS No.

1 3
2 2
3 2
: :
TRG of Incoming Outgoing Call

Call TRG 1 TRG 2 TRG 3 …
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
: : : : :
: Block
[Example]
<Extension Number Method (Access Without PBX Code)>
Telephone Company

TRG 3
TIE Line Network of PBX-2
PBX-1 PBX-2
9-211-4567
TRG 1 (COS 3)
TIE Line of PBX-2
Interface Interface
TRG 2
of PBX-1
verification code entry feature no.
+ + verification code + verification code
PIN + 9-211-4567
Outside Party
(211-4567)
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012 Extn. 2001
Dials "8-02-9-211-4567". Dials "8-02+verification code entry feature

no. + + verification code + verification code
PIN + 9-211-4567".
Explanation:
332 Feature Guide

Case 1:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", TIE line trunk group
number (TRG 2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".
2. The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX-2 because the COS of TRG 1 (COS 3) is
blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
Case 2:
1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", TIE line trunk group
(TRG2), verification code entry feature number, , verification code, verification code personal
identification number (PIN), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone
number "211-4567".
2. If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX-2, the call is connected to the outside party
through PBX-2, because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
Telephone Company

TRG 3
PBX-1 PBX-2
952-9-211-4567
TRG 1 (COS 3)
TIE Line of PBX-2
Interface Interface
TRG 2
of PBX-1
952+verification code entry feature no.
PIN + 9-211-4567
Outside Party
(211-4567)
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012 Extn. 1001
Dials "7-952-9- Dials "7-952+verification code entry feature

211-4567". no. + + verification code + verification code
PIN + 9-211-4567".
Explanation:
Case 1:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Line Access
number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".
2. The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX-2 because the COS of TRG 1 (COS 3) is
blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
Case 2:
1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", verification code entry
feature number, , verification code, verification code personal identification number (PIN), Idle Line
Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".
Feature Guide 333

2. If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX-2, the call is connected to the outside party
through PBX-2, because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
c. Override using an Itemised Billing Code for ARS

By assigning an Itemised Billing Code for ARS to PBX-1, an extension's verification code can be sent to
PBX-2 automatically, without the extension having to dial the verification code.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Note
When the number dialled after ARS modification is over 20 digits:
– With the VoIP interface, this feature can be available if the software of the IP-GW card is upgraded.
334 Feature Guide

[Example]
Extn. No. Itemised Billing Code

1012 11112222
1013 33334444
Carrier Name TIE Line Telephone Company

Trunk Group 2
Carrier Access Code 47
Removed No. of Digits
0
Modify Command CI9H
TRG 3
of PBX-2
TIE Line Network
PBX-1 Outside Party
PBX-2
(211-4567)
TRG 1 (COS 3)
TIE Line of PBX-2
Interface Interface
TRG 2
of PBX-1 [Programming Example
verification code entry feature no. of PBX-2]
PIN+9-211-4567
Veri. Code Veri. PIN COS
1111 2222 2
3333 4444 2
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012 Extn. 2001
Dials "9-211-4567".
[SMDR Output Example]

Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration
06/04/18 03:21PM 1001 03 2114444 00:01'23
06/04/18 04:32PM *1111 04 2114567 00:23'45
Explanation:
1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and the telephone
number "211-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the verification code entry feature number, verification code and
verification code PIN, and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2
through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.
Feature Guide 335

Extn. No. Itemised Billing Code

1012 11112222
1013 33334444
Carrier Name TIE Line Telephone Company

Trunk Group 2
Carrier Access Code 952 47
Removed No. of Digits Trunk 211-4567 Trunk
0
Modify Command CI9H
TRG 3
PBX-1 PBX-2
PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 Outside Party
(211-4567)
TRG 1 (COS 3)
TIE Line of PBX-2
Interface Interface
TRG 2
of PBX-1 [Programming Example
952+verification code entry feature no. of PBX-2]
PIN+9-211-4567
Veri. Code Veri. PIN COS
1111 2222 2
3333 4444 2
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012 Extn. 1001
Dials "9-211-4567".
[SMDR Output Example]

Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration
06/04/18 03:21PM 1001 03 2114444 00:01'23
06/04/18 04:32PM *1111 04 2114567 00:23'45
Explanation:
1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and telephone
number "211-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952", the verification code entry feature number, verification code and
verification code PIN, and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which
has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of
PBX-1.
336 Feature Guide

d. FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the Trunk

[Example]
Telephone Company
Forwarded/Transferred/
Trunk Intercepted to 211-4567 Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1 PBX-2
952-1011
TIE Line
Interface Interface
Outside Party
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011 (211-4567)
Dials "7-952-1011".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension
number "1011".
2. The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-2) through the TIE line, and the call is
forwarded, transferred or intercepted to the outside party "211-4567" through the trunk.
Feature Guide 337

Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access
An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature.
[Example]
Telephone Company Telephone Company

(area code: 09) (area code: 01)
Trunk Trunk Trunk 23-4567 Trunk

TIE Line Network
PBX-1 PBX-2
PBX-Code 951 PBX-Code 952
952-9-01-23-4567
DISA Interface TIE Line Interface
TRG 2
Outside Caller Outside Party

(23-4567)
Dials "(DISA phone
number)-9-01-23- Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011
4567".
Explanation:
1. The outside caller dials the "DISA phone number of PBX-1", Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and
telephone number "01-23-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to
PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS
programming of PBX-1.
3. PBX-2 sends the modified call to the outside party "23-4567" according to its ARS programming.
338 Feature Guide

1.30.1.3 TIE Line Programming

Description
To Make a TIE Line Call
The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an
extension user makes a TIE line call.
It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network.
The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number.
There are two system programmes for the tables:
TIE Line Routing Table: used to assign the leading numbers (PBX code or extension number) and trunk group
hunt sequence.
® 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits/Added Number: used to remove digits from and add a number to
the dialled number of the TIE line call. This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network
configuration.
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
® Removed Number of Digits
® Added Number
® Trunk Group
[Programming Examples]
Your PBX is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network. To identify the trunk route as illustrated,
you should make the following tables.
a. Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension— Dial
TIE Line Network
PBX-4 PBX-3
Extn. 4xxx Extn. 3xxx
b-2nd) 3xxx
If you dial: TRG 2 c) 4xxx
a) 2xxx
b) 3xxx TRG 1
c) 4xxx
Extn. 1xxx a) 2xxx Extn. 2xxx
(2, 3, 4: Other PBX
Extension Number
b-1st) 3xxx
[TIE] in the Flexible
PBX-1 PBX-2
Numbering Plan)
Feature Guide 339

[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]
Priority 1 Priority 2 ..
Location Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification ..

No. No.
TRG Removed TRG Removed
Added Added
No. of No. of ..
No. No.
Digits Digits
01 2 1 0 ..
02 3 1 0 2 0 ..
03 4 2 0 ..
: : : : : : : : :
Explanation:
Location 01:
The hunt sequence by dialling [2XXX]:
The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 2XXX
Location 02:
The 2nd route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 3XXX
Location 03:
b. PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

® 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
® 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Own PBX Code
TIE Line Network
PBX-4 PBX-3
Extn. xxxx Extn. xxxx
b-2nd) 953#-xxxx
If you dial: TRG 2 c) 954#-xxxx
a) 7-952-xxxx
b) 7-953-xxxx TRG 1
c) 7-954-xxxx
Extn. 1xxx a) 952-xxxx Extn. xxxx
(7: TIE Line Access
Number in the b-1st) 953-xxxx
Flexible PBX-1 PBX-2
Numbering Plan) PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952
340 Feature Guide

[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]

No. No.
Added Added
No. of No. of ..
No. No.
Digits Digits
01 952 1 0 ..
02 953 1 0 2 3 953# ..
03 954 2 3 954# ..
: : : : : : : : :
Explanation:
Location 01:
The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 952+XXXX]:
The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1
Sending no. to PBX-2: 952–XXXX
Location 02:
Sending no. to PBX-2: 953–XXXX
The 2nd route — trunk group (TRG) 2
Sending no. to PBX-4: 953#–XXXX
Location 03:
Sending no. to PBX-4: 954#–XXXX
Feature Guide 341

To Receive a TIE Line Call

a. Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
[Example] 1 A TIE line call is sent to
TIE Line Network
PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the
number sent from PBX-1
PBX-4 PBX-3 is an extension number of
3 PBX-2 (e.g., 2011), the
call will be received at
Extn. 3011
extension "2011". If not,
PBX-2 checks the
number in the TIE Line
2 3011 Routing and Modified
Table of PBX-2.
1 3011 2 If the match is found in
the table, the call will be
Extn. 1011 Extn. 2011 modified according to the
table and send to the
Dials "3011". PBX-1 PBX-2 corresponding PBX
(PBX-3).
3 The number sent from
PBX-2 "3011" is an
extension number of
PBX-3. The call is
received at extension
"3011".
Note
When a TIE line call is sent from one PBX to another, the receiving PBX first modifies the received
number according to the assignment for the trunk port: the number of digits removed, and the number
added, are determined by this assignment. Then the PBX checks whether the completed number is
an existing extension number at that PBX.
342 Feature Guide

b. PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

[Example] 1 A TIE line call is sent to
TIE Line Network
PBX-2 from PBX-1. If
the number sent from
PBX-4 PBX-3
PBX Code 954 PBX Code 953 PBX-1 has the PBX
3
code of PBX-2 "952",
the call will be received
at the corresponding
Extn. 1011
extension of PBX-2
(e.g., 1011of PBX-2). If
2 953-1011 not, PBX-2 checks the
number in the TIE Line
1 953-1011
Routing and Modified
Table of PBX-2.
2 If the match is found in
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011
the table, the call will
PBX-1
Dials "7-953-1011". PBX Code 951
PBX-2 be modified according
PBX Code 952
to the table and send to
the corresponding
PBX (PBX-3).
3 The number sent from
PBX-2 "953-1011" has
the PBX code of PBX-3
"953". The call is
received at extension
"1011" of PBX-3.
Note
When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX, first the PBX modifies the number sent to the
PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX: the removed number of digits from
and/or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment. Then the PBX
starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX.
Feature Guide 343

TIE Line Routing Flowchart

[Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension]
A TIE line call is made as follows:

PBX Code Method: 7-abc-xxxx
Extension No. Method: dexx
Is the dialled number

identified as a TIE line access no. No Not treated as
or an other PBX extension no. in
a TIE line call.
the flexible numbering
plan of the own PBX?
Yes:
A TIE line access no.: 7
Other PBX extension no.: de
Is the leading
No
number (abc or de) found in the TIE Line Reorder tone
Routing and Modification Table
of the own PBX?
Yes
Selects the corresponding trunk group, and

the dialled number is modified if a removed
number of digits and/or added number is assigned.
No
Is the trunk group Reorder tone
available?
Yes
No
Is there an idle trunk Busy tone
in the trunk group?
Yes
Routes to other PBX or trunk.
344 Feature Guide

[Receiving a Call through a TIE Line]

<Extension Number Method <PBX Code Method
(Access without PBX Code)> (Access with PBX Code)>
A call is received through a A call is received through a

TIE line as follows: TIE line as follows:
# 1021 ## 0511033
The received number is modified as The received number is modified as

programmed for each trunk port. programmed for each trunk port.
Removed number of digits: 1 Removed number of digits: 3

Added number: None Added number: 9
Received number: # 1021 Received number: ## 0511033
Modified number: # 1021=1021 Modified number: ##0511033= 9511033
Remove the first 1 digit. 1) Remove the first 3 digits. 2) Add "9".
Does the modified number have No

the own PBX code "951"?
Yes: 9511033 Goes to A

Removes the own PBX ( A is in the
code "951". flowchart of [Making
a TIE Line Call from an
1021 1033
Extension].)
Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX.
Operator Call No. Extension No. Extension No. Idle Line Others
of the Own PBX of Other PBX Access No.
Directs the call or Reorder tone.
Goes to A Trunk Group
to the operator.
( A is in the flowchart of Access No.
Does the corresponding No [Making a TIE Line Call
extension exist? from an Extension].)
Is the trunk
Yes group of the outgoing
call from the own PBX enabled No
against the COS of the trunk group of
No Is the corresponding the incoming call
extension idle? to the own PBX?
Reorder
Yes Sends reorder tone
Yes
tone, or sends the
Calls the extension. call to the operator TRS/Barring applies.
(Intercept Routing
Call Waiting —No Destination).
Busy tone Sends the call to
Intercept Routing the trunk.
—Busy/DND
Conditions
• A trunk which is used for a private network should be assigned "Private" as the networking type. (®
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY)
Feature Guide 345

• To establish a QSIG network (® 1.30.4 QSIG Standard Features), each ISDN (QSIG) connection in a TIE
line network must have the port on one PBX assigned as a master port, and the port on the other PBX
assigned as a slave port. PBXs that support this feature are KX-TDE series, KX-TDA series, and
KX-NCP series PBXs.
[TIE Line Network Connection Example]
Extn.1000 PBX-1 PBX-2 Extn. 2000

(A) Master (A) Slave
: :
Extn.1999 Extn. 2999
QSIG Network
(B) Master (C) Slave
(B) Slave (C) Master
PBX-3 Extn. 3000

:
Extn. 3999
• When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting, the caller will hear a busy
tone. If required, Intercept Routing—Busy/DND can be activated.
• The Inter-digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE

3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Trunk Property
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port— Trunk Property
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE
→ Idle Line Access (Local Access)
→ Trunk Group Access
→ TIE Line Access
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Activation Key
Required)
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
→DIL— Trunk Property
→DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
programmed.)
346 Feature Guide


[453] DID Destination
Feature Guide 347

1.30.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

Description
Two PBXs can have extensions with the same leading number. TIE Line calling is available using extension
numbering.
PBX-1 PBX-2
TIE Line
Interface Interface
Extn.1011 Extn.1012 Extn.1013
Dials "1013".
Explanation:
If a dialled number is not found at the local PBX, the call can be sent to the remote PBX.
When an extension number is dialled, the PBX first searches local extensions for a matching number. If there
is no match, the PBX then checks the TIE Line Routing Table for a corresponding entry. If an entry is found,
the call is sent to the connected PBX.
Case 1:
® The dialled number is found at the local PBX, so extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1011
of PBX-1.
Case 2:
® The dialled number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line, and
extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1013 of PBX-2.
Conditions
• System programming is required to enable this feature.
348 Feature Guide

1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

Description
The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into
IP packets (VoIP) and sent through this network.
VoIP networks support private network communications using TIE line service.
[Example]
Telephone Company
TRG 1
PBX-1 PBX-2
Extn.1000 Extn.2000
Private IP
: IP-GW IP-GW :
Network
Router Router
Extn.1999 Extn.2999
TRG 2
Dials "2999".
PBX-3
Extn.3000
IP-GW :
Router
Extn.3999
Feature Guide 349

Required Programming
• PBX
For making a call:
ARS programming (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) or TIE line service programming
For receiving a call:
TIE line service programming
[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table]

No. No.
Added Added
No. of No. of ..
No. No.
Digits Digits
2 ..
01 2 (VoIP 0
port)
02 3 2 0 ..
: : : : : : : : :
[Explanation]
Calls to destinations with leading number "2" or "3" are automatically routed through the VoIP ports,
designated as trunk group 2.
• IP-GW
IP address assignment for the local PBX and other PBXs.
Destination
Leading No. IP Address
2 200.45.11.35
3 199.176.64.1
: :
[Explanation]
Calls are routed to the IP address of each IP-GW card based on the leading number dialled.
Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks

When a VoIP call cannot be completed successfully, the PBX can automatically attempt to make the call using
a public trunk instead. This provides a backup method of making calls in cases when IP network transmission
cannot be completed successfully.
350 Feature Guide

[Example]
Telephone Company Telephone Company

(area code: 098) (area code: 012)
012-345-1011
PBX-1 PBX-2
Extn.1000 IP-GW Private IP IP-GW Extn.1011

Network (012-345-1011)
Dials
"7-20-1011". PBX code: 30 PBX code: 20
The leading numbers of extensions accessed through the VoIP network are added as entries to the Quick
Dialling table, in addition to being registered as Other PBX Extension Numbers, as shown below:
Number to dial to call an extension at another PBX using VoIP network:
7 (TIE line access number) + 20 (PBX Code) + 1011 (extension number)
Number to dial to call that extension using a public trunk:
9 (trunk access number) + 012-345-1011
[Quick Dialling Table]
Quick Dialling No. Destination No.
720 9012345
If the call cannot be completed using the VoIP network, and the dialled leading number is found in the Quick
Dialling Table, the call will be automatically rerouted to a trunk as specified by the corresponding destination
number.
When a call is made using the VoIP network, if the PBX does not receive a reply from the other PBX within
about 4 seconds of making the call, or an error is returned, the call is rerouted to a public trunk as specified.
Sending Faxes Through the Network

Through system programming, it is possible to select whether faxes are sent using analogue or T.38 protocol
signals.
Conditions
• Some QSIG services are available. (® 1.30.4 QSIG Standard Features)
• TRS/Call Barring settings apply to calls rerouted to public trunks.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
3.5.11 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484)
3.5.12 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490)
KX-TDE600
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
3.7.11 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484)
3.7.12 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490)
Feature Guide 351


3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port

352 Feature Guide

1.30.2.1 Gateway Groups

Description
It is possible to automatically reroute outgoing VoIP calls according to preassigned gateway groups.
A gateway device can be assigned a gateway group number based on its IP Address. When a call is made
using a leading number allocated to a gateway group, it is routed to the lowest-numbered available device
within that group. In other words, if the lowest-numbered device is busy or not available, the call slides to the
next available device.
[Example]
Office A (GW Group-1)
Gateway Settings List PBX-2

1. IP-GW(1): GW Group-1 IP-GW(1)
2. IP-GW(2): GW Group-1 Leading Number
Dials "123XXX"
3. IP-GW(3): GW Group-2 List
4. IP-GW(4): GW Group-2 1. 1xx: GW Group-1
2. 2xx: GW Group-2
Busy IP-GW(2)
PBX-1
Rerouted Office B (GW Group-2)
V-IPGW
Private IP
PBX-3
Network
IP-GW(3)
IP-GW(4)
When "123XXX" is dialled, the call is routed to GW Group-1. However the lowest-numbered device
(IP-GW(1)) is busy or not available, so the call is rerouted to IP-GW(2).
Note
For information about assigning groups when using the IP-GW card, refer to the Programming Guide of
the VoIP Gateway Card.
Feature Guide 353

1.30.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

Description
Multiple PBXs in separate locations, connected in an IP network, can share a common block of extensions
designated in a gateway group.
2) Ext. 105 not PBX B in Office B
found in PBX B
Ext. 102
V-IPGW Ext. 202
Ext. 203
1) Ext. 105 dialled 3) Rerouted
PBX A in Office A
PBX C in Office C
Ext. 101 Private IP
Ext. 105
Ext. 103
V-IPGW Network
V-IPGW Ext. 201
Ext. 104
Ext. 303
4) Check next PBX in

Gateway Group settings 5) Ext. 105
found in PBX C
Explanation:
In the same way as when connected by a TIE Line, if a dialled number is not found at the local PBX, the call
can be sent to other PBXs connected via an IP network. When an extension number is dialled, the PBX first
searches local extensions for a matching number. If there is no match, the PBX then checks the TIE Line
Routing Table for the Gateway Group for a corresponding entry. If an entry is found, the call is sent to the
connected PBX.
Conditions
• System programming is required to enable this feature.
• If the called extension does not exist at the called PBX, the next PBX in the same gateway group is called
automatically.
• The Routing to Operator setting in system programming must be disabled to use this feature.
• To use this feature, all PBXs in the IP network have to be KX-TDE series PBXs, version 3.0000 or later.

programmed.)
354 Feature Guide

1.30.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

Description
It is possible to set which virtual port receives each call depending on the telephone number of the called party.
By assigning each port to a Call Distribution Port Group (CDPG), it is possible to select which group receives
each call. CDPG settings cover all V-IPGW cards in the PBX, which allows for ports on different cards to be
assigned to the same CDPG. In other words, two 8-port cards can be used as one 16-port card.
Programming Example:
To enable this feature, it is necessary to programme the following 2 tables through system programming:
• CDPG Table
- in order to assign ports to Call Distribution Port Groups.
• Hunt Pattern Table
- in order to programme a priority list of CDPG destinations for each leading number.
[Programming Example of the CDPG Table]
V-IPGW Card Number Port Number Call Distribution Port Group*1
1 1 CDPG 1
1 2 CDPG 2
1 : :
1 8 CDPG 2
2 1 CDPG 1
2 : :
2 8 CDPG 3
*1
® 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port— Call Distribution Port Group
[Programming Example of the Hunt Pattern Table]

Leading Call Distribution Port Call Distribution Port Call Distribution Port
No. …
Number*1 Group (1st)*2 Group (2nd)*2 Group (16th)*2
1 10 CDPG 1 CDPG 4 … -
2 20 CDPG 1 CDPG 2 … CDPG 3
: : : : … :
32 300 CDPG 8 CDPG 11 … -
*1
® 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—Hunt Pattern 1–16— Leading Number
*2
® 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—Hunt Pattern 1–16— Call Distribution Port Group—1st–
16th
Note
The same CDPG can be set for several leading numbers.
Feature Guide 355

Explanation:
As shown in the CDPG table above, CDPG 1 consists of Port 1 of the first card and Port 1 of the second card.
When "1023-456-7890" (leading number: 10) is dialled:
The leading number (10) is The call is routed to The call is rerouted to The call is
searched for in the Hunt Pattern Port 1 of the first card. Port 1 of the second answered.
Table. card.
CDPG 1 is the 1st priority Port 1 of the first card Port 1 of the second
CDPG. is busy. card is available.
If all the ports belonging to CDPG 1 are busy, the call is rerouted to the lowest-numbered available port
belonging to CDPG 4, which is set as the second priority for this leading number.
356 Feature Guide


Description
Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it
were a private line. There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the telephone company.
Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line.
Public/Private Discrimination:
a. When making a call: The public/private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled
number to the telephone company. The public/private discrimination number can be dialled manually, or
automatically by ARS programming (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) and/or TIE line service
programming.
b. When receiving a call: The telephone company distinguishes the call type. If it is a private call, the call is
received by the TIE line service method. If it is a public call, the call is received by the Incoming Trunk Call
Distribution method (DIL/DDI/MSN) which is assigned on the trunk.
[Example]
Public ISDN
<Public VPN
Discrimination>
9-0-01-23-4567
01-23-4567
Public No.
Dials
<Private "01-45-6789".
PBX-1 Discrimination> PBX-2 PBX-3
PBX Code 111 PBX Code 112 PBX Code 113
113-401
Head Branch Branch
Office Private No. Office Office
Extn. 201 Extn. 202 Extn. 301 Extn. 302 Extn. 401 Extn. 402
(DDI No.:
01-45-6789)
Dials "9-01-23-4567". Dials "401".
(ARS) (TIE)
Note: Public Call
Private Call
Conditions
• Each BRI/PRI port can be set to public or VPN through system programming. To use this service, select
VPN.
• Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service, it is possible to use the same kind of
service when making a call by TIE line service programming, and/or Quick Dialling programming (®
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling).
Feature Guide 357

[Quick Dialling Programming Example]

Location No. Quick Dialling No. Desired No.
Quick Dialling 01 2345 (extension no. of other PBX) 9-123-4321 (Public no. of
extension 2345)
: : :
Explanation:
When an extension user dials "2345", he is connected to extension "2345" of other PBX whose public number
is "123-4321".

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Leading Number
→ Leading Number
→ Removed Number of Digits
→ Added Number

358 Feature Guide

1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY

Description
QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network.
The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method.
The following features are available for an ISDN-QSIG or VoIP private network. For ISDN, system programming
is required to specify whether each feature (excluding Calling Line Identification Presentation [CLIP]) is
available for each port of the private network.
[Service Table]
Calling Line Identification Sends the caller’s number to the QSIG network when making a call.
Presentation (CLIP)
(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
Connected Line Sends the number of the answered party to the QSIG network when
Identification Presentation answering a call.
(COLP)
Calling Line Identification Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the
Restriction (CLIR) caller.

Connected Line Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.
(COLR) ® 1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
Calling Name Identification Sends the caller’s name to the QSIG network when making a call.
Presentation (CNIP)
Connected Name Sends the name of the answered party to the QSIG network when
Identification Presentation answering a call.
(CONP)
Feature Guide 359

Calling Name Identification Prevents the caller’s name being presented to the called party by
Restriction (CNIR) the caller.

Connected Name Prevents CONP being sent by the answered party.
(CONR) ® 1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
Call Forwarding (CF)—by Forwards a call to the QSIG network.
QSIG
® 1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG Transfers a call to the QSIG network.
® 1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Completion of Calls to Busy Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on the QSIG
Subscriber (CCBS)—by network becomes free.
QSIG
® 1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by
QSIG

360 Feature Guide

1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/

COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/
CONP)—by QSIG
Description
Calling Line/Name Identification Presentation (CLIP/CNIP):
The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when an extension
user makes a call. The called party can see the number and/or name on his telephone display before answering
the call.
Connected Line/Name Identification Presentation (COLP/CONP):

The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when the extension
user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number and/or name of the answering party on his
telephone display when the call is answered.
[CLIP/CNIP Example]
2) "John
101"
1) Dials "202". is displayed.
PBX-1 CLIP: 101 PBX-2
CNIP: John
Caller Called party

(Extn. No.: 101 (Extn. No.: 202)
Extn. Name: John)
[COLP/CONP Example]
1) Dials "203". Called party

(Extn. No.: 203
PBX-1 PBX-2 Extn. Name: Tom)
FWD, IRNA, etc.
Caller Answering party

COLP: 204
CONP: Paul (Extn. No.: 204
3) "Paul Extn. Name: Paul)
204"
is displayed.
2) Answers the call.
CLIP/COLP Number:
The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned for each extension through
system programming.
CNIP/CONP Name:
The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP/CONP can be assigned for each extension through
system programming.
Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing
the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.
Feature Guide 361

Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR/CONR):

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network. When CLIR
is activated, CNIR becomes active automatically. When COLR is activated, CONR becomes active
automatically.
Conditions
• These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:
– CLIP/COLP: ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services.
– CNIP/CONP: ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services.
• COLP/CLIR/COLR/CNIP/CONP/CNIR/CONR Assignment for Each Port
Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.
• CLIR Button and COLR Button
It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by
pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button.

→ COLR Set / Cancel
→ CLIR Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
→ Extension Name
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
→ Extension Name



1.8.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
1.8.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line
Identification Restriction [COLR])
1.8.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR])
362 Feature Guide

1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Description
The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network. The destination can be
set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of trunk calls (® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)).
If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call, the following situation will be
possible.
[Example] 1 Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials
extension number "2000", and the call
QSIG
is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2
PBX-1 PBX-2 through QSIG network.
1 Call to 2000 2 The call is forwarded to the forward
destination of trunk calls of extension
2000, which is extension "1001" of
2 Forwarded PBX-1.
to 1001
3 The call between PBX-1 and PBX-2 is
released, and the call is connected
directly to the forward destination of
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000 extension 2000.
(Forward Destination
Dials "2000". of Trunk Calls: 1001)
QSIG
PBX-1 PBX-2
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000
Conditions
• This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specification ETS 300 257,
Diversion supplementary services.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.
Feature Guide 363



364 Feature Guide

1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Description
The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network.
If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call, the following situation will be
possible.
[Example] 1 Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials
extension number "2000", and the call
QSIG
is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2
PBX-1 PBX-2 through QSIG network.
1 Call to 2000 2 The call is transferred from extension
2000 to extension "1001" of PBX-1.
3 The call between PBX-1 and PBX-2 is
2 Transferred released, and the call is connected
to 1001
directly to the transfer destination of
extension 2000.
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000
Dials "2000".
QSIG
PBX-1 PBX-2
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000
Conditions
• This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specification ETS 300 261, Call
transfer supplementary service.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis.
• Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible (® 1.12.1 Call
Transfer).

Feature Guide 365


366 Feature Guide

1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

Description
If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in QSIG network and the called party is busy, an
extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers
the callback ringing, that party’s number is automatically dialled.
Conditions
• This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specification ETS 300 366, Call
completion supplementary services.
• This feature is available under the following conditions:
a. The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS.
b. The called party’s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.
• To receive and send CCBS, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN (QSIG)
port basis through system programming.
• An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.
• The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not
answered within 10 seconds.


Feature Guide 367

1.30.5 QSIG Enhanced Features
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Description
When PBXs are networked using ISDN or IP-GW cards, it is possible to assign flexible buttons as Network
Direct Station Selection (NDSS) buttons. These buttons are used to monitor the status of extensions connected
to up to seven other PBXs in the network, and to make or transfer calls to those extensions with one touch,
like normal DSS buttons. This allows operator functions to be centralised even when there are offices in remote
locations.
NDSS buttons show the status of the monitored extension as follows:
Off The monitored extension is idle.

Red on The monitored extension is busy or has set DND for trunk calls.
[Example Network]
1001 (busy) 2001 (busy)

PBX-1 PBX-2
Network Network
Monitor ID 1 ID 2
2002 (idle)
extension
Extn. 2001
Extn. 2002
Extn. 4001
4001 (idle)
PBX-3 PBX-4
Network Network
ID 0 ID 3
Monitor extension
Extn. 1001
Extn. 2002
[Programming Procedure]
1. Routing Table Assignment
TIE Line Routing and Modification tables must have been programmed in advance for all PBXs in the
network, to allow calls to be made and transferred between PBXs (® 1.30.1 TIE Line Service).
In the programming example that follows, the PBXs in the network use the Extension Number method, as
shown in the illustration above. However, the PBX Access Code method can also be used.
2. Network PBX ID Assignment
Assign a Network PBX ID to each PBX in the network.
® 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator
Feature—Network PBX ID
• IDs 1-8: Can monitor extensions at other PBXs, and transmit monitor data about local extensions. Each
ID number can be assigned to one PBX within the network.
• ID 0: Retransmits monitor data throughout the network. This ID number can be assigned to multiple
PBXs.
3. QSIG Port Setting [Monitored PBX]
368 Feature Guide

ISDN-QSIG (PBX Direct Connection)

Each QSIG port of a BRI or PRI card that will be used to transmit extension status information must be set
to do so through system programming. Even if a port is set to not transmit information, it will still receive
information from other PBXs.
® 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data Transfer
® 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer
Transmit Extension Status Information Functions
Enabled • Transmit information on own PBX extensions

• Receive information from other PBXs; forward it to other QSIG ports of
the PBX
• Re-transmit information received by other QSIG ports of the PBX
Disabled • Receive information from other PBXs; forward it to other QSIG ports of
the PBX
Set the transmission setting for each port according to the layout of your network, so that extension status
information can travel between NDSS monitor PBXs.
[Example ISDN Network Port Setting]
PBX-1 OFF OFF PBX-2

Network Network
4001 NDSS ID 1 ID 0
Idle
ON OFF
Busy
4001
Busy
ON OFF
PBX-3 OFF ON PBX-4

Network
4001 ID 3
Busy 4001
ON Idle Busy
4001
Busy
PBX-5
IP-GW-QSIG
IP data is routed through the network according to the routing tables of the IP-GW cards. When using VoIP,
it is necessary to identify the monitor PBXs, to which to transmit extension status information, for each card
that will be used. This is done by specifying the extension number of any extension (for example, the PBX
operator) at the monitor PBX as a Network Operator extension for that IP-GW card.
Feature Guide 369

[Example VoIP Network]

PBX-1 PBX-2
Network
ID 1
4001 NDSS 4001 NDSS
Idle Idle
Busy IP Network
Busy
PBX-3 PBX-4
Network
ID 2
IP-GW
4001
Idle Busy
Mixed Network
When using the NDSS feature over a mixed network containing both VoIP portions and ISDN line portions,
it is possible to set whether status information will be transferred between VoIP and ISDN cards within
each PBX. For example, if the monitor PBX is on a VoIP network, and monitored PBXs are on an ISDN
network, the PBX that acts as a gateway between the VoIP and ISDN networks must have this setting
enabled for ISDN to VoIP.
4. Network Monitor Extension Registration [Monitor PBX]
Register the extensions (attached to other PBXs) that will be monitored. A maximum of 250 extensions
can be registered. Only extensions that have been registered here can be assigned to NDSS buttons.
® 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table— Network Extension No.
Network Monitor Extensions Table

Index No. Network Extn. No. Network Extn. Name
001 2001 Branch 1: T. Durden

002 2002 Branch 1: M. Singer
003 4001 Branch 2: R. Paulson
: : :
250
When using the PBX Access Code numbering method, the relevant access code must be added before
the extension number registered here.
5. NDSS Button Customisation [Monitor PBX]
At any extension attached to a monitor PBX, customise a flexible button as an NDSS button for an extension
registered above. Then go off-hook, press this button once, and go on-hook again. This activates the
monitoring function. The monitored PBX will begin to transmit information about the status of that extension,
and the monitor PBX will begin to receive the information. The button light will display the status of the
extension connected to another PBX.
Removing or Editing a Registered Extension [Monitor PBX]
To monitor a new extension when 250 extensions are already being monitored, it is necessary to remove
the registration of an existing extension.
The NDSS Monitor Release feature is used to stop monitoring a certain extension. When this feature is
performed at a monitor PBX:
370 Feature Guide

• If no other PBXs are monitoring the selected extension, the monitored PBX stops transmitting status
information for that extension.
• The monitor PBX stops receiving status information for the selected extension. All NDSS buttons for
that extension stop displaying status information.
However, the related information is not deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table. Therefore, if
an extension user at a monitor PBX subsequently goes off-hook and presses the NDSS button for that
extension, monitoring will be reactivated. To completely remove monitoring of an extension, the registration
data must also be deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table at each monitor PBX.
The monitor destination of each NDSS button is determined by the registration information for a particular
index number in this table. Therefore, if the registration information for an index number is changed (for
example, the Network Extension Number assigned to Index No. 001 in the example above is changed
from "2001" to "4002"), any NDSS buttons that have been set for that extension will automatically point to
the new monitor destination.
Conditions
for all KX-TDE series PBXs that will monitor extensions or have extensions monitored.
• Hardware Requirements:
If using an IP-GW4E card (KX-TDA0484), the firmware (not LPR) of the card must be version 1.2 or later.
If using a PRI23 card (KX-TDA0290), the LPR software of the card must be version 1.009 or later.
• All PBXs in the network must be KX-TDE series, KX-TDA series, or KX-NCP series PBXs. For information
on the hardware requirements for KX-TDA/KX-NCP series PBXs that will monitor extensions or have
extensions monitored, refer to the corresponding Feature Guide.
• Each of Network PBX IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX within a network. Assigning the same
Network PBX ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.
• It is only possible to assign NDSS buttons for extensions that have been previously registered in the
Network Monitor Extensions Table.
® Type
® Dial (for NDSS)
® Type
® Dial (for NDSS)
® Type
® Dial (for NDSS)
• Extensions connected to one PBX can monitor a maximum of 250 extensions at other PBXs. One extension
can be monitored by multiple extensions at multiple PBXs.
• To reduce NDSS data traffic, it is recommended that 8 or less extensions in a single Incoming Call
Distribution Group be monitored.
• Activation of an NDSS button is only required the first time that a button for a newly registered extension
is created. Once an NDSS button has been activated by being pressed the first time, any further NDSS
buttons for the same monitored extension will automatically display the extension status without needing
to be activated.
• To use the NDSS Monitor Release feature, an extension must be assigned as a manager.
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager
® [511] Manager Assignment
• A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information
("ON").
• Through system programming, it is possible to assign a maximum number of "hops" (transfers between
PBXs) that extension status information can travel. Each time a piece of extension status information is
forwarded to another PBX, its counter is increased by one. When this counter reaches the assigned
Feature Guide 371

maximum, the data is discarded. This is used to prevent data from circling unnecessarily around the
network.
® 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator
Feature—Data Transmission Counter
• If it is not possible to remotely turn off transmission of extension status information using the NDSS Monitor
Release feature because of network conditions, it is possible to perform the same operation directly through
system programming at the monitored PBX.
® 6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
® 6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
• When using a VoIP network, if extension status information is lost by the network, in some cases an NDSS
button may not be able to display the status of the relevant extension.
• NDSS can not be used when two PBXs are networked using the [TIE Call by Own PBX Extension
Number] feature (® 1.30.1 TIE Line Service).

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data Transfer
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer
→ Type
→ Dial (for NDSS)
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
→ Type
→ Dial (for NDSS)
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
→ Type
→ Dial (for NDSS)
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table



1.2.1 Basic Calling
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
372 Feature Guide

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Description
Up to 8 PBXs connected in a VoIP or ISDN private network can share the services of a VPS connected to
another PBX in DPT integration. This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs
in the network, as if the VPS were connected to the local PBX. In addition, the VPS can send Message Waiting
notifications to extensions at any PBX, and users can access their mailboxes directly using the Message
Waiting button.
The VPS features available at extensions in a network are shown below.
No. Feature Remote VPS Local VPS
1 Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup No Yes

2 FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS Yes Yes
3 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS Yes Yes
4 Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS No Yes
5 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS No Yes
6 Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Yes Yes
Mailbox Access)
7 VPS Trunk Service & Automatic Time Mode Yes Yes
Notification for Incoming Call
8 Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS Yes Yes
9 DID Number Notification to the VPS Yes Yes
10 Status Notification to the VPS Yes Yes
11 Paging by the VPS No Yes
12 Live Call Screening (LCS) No Yes
13 Two-way Recording into the VPS No Yes
14 VPS Data Control by the PBX No Yes
15 Remote FWD Setting by the VM No Yes
16 VM Menu No Yes
17 Message clear on Check Out No Yes
18 Voice message number display Yes Yes
Feature Guide 373

[Trunk Call Answered by the VPS, Transferred to Extension at Other PBX (Extension Number
Method)]
Outside Caller
Telephone Company
TIE Line Network

PBX-1 PBX-2
Private network PBX-3

PBX-4
PBX-5
PBX-6
Hello. PBX-7
Please enter
PBX-8
Mailbox 101 extension number.
Extn. Mailbox 201
101 Extn. Extn.
Mailbox 202
201 202
VPS
[Explanation]
A trunk call is answered by the AA service of the VPS. The caller enters extension number 201, so the call is
transferred over the private network to extension 201.
If extension 201 does not answer, mailbox 201 in the VPS will answer it and play the appropriate message.
[Trunk Call to an Extension Not Answered, Forwarded to Mailbox (Extension Number

Method)]
Telephone Company Outside Caller
TIE Line Network

PBX-1 PBX-2

PBX-4
PBX-5
PBX-6
PBX-7
PBX-8
Mailbox 101 Mailbox 201:
Extn. "Hello. I am not at
Mailbox 201 my desk right now."
101
Mailbox 202
Extn. 201 Extn.
VPS Fwd to VPS 202
[Explanation]
374 Feature Guide

Extension 201 does not answer the trunk call, so the call is forwarded to the VPS, and answered by mailbox
201. If the outside caller leaves a message, the VPS sends a Message Waiting notification to the extension
using Enhanced QSIG information over the private network.
When forwarding the call, PBX-2 sends any received call information (Caller ID number/name, DDI number)
along with the VM trunk group number to use, applicable time mode, and extension number and forwarding
reason of the original destination extension to PBX-1 as Enhanced QSIG information.
PBX Code Method
Telephone Company Outside Caller
TIE Line Network

PBX-1 (PBX PBX-2 (PBX
Code: 20) Code: 30)

PBX-4
PBX-5
PBX-6
PBX-7
Mailbox 101 Mailbox 730102: PBX-8
Mailbox 201 "Hello. I am not at
Extn. my desk right now."
101 Mailbox 730101
Mailbox 730102 Extn. 102 Extn.
VPS Fwd to VPS 101
"7-30-102"
[PBX
code]
[TIE line [Extn. no.]
access no.]
[Explanation]
Extension 102 does not answer the trunk call, so the call is forwarded to the VPS, using a VPS mailbox number
containing the TIE line access number, the PBX code of the PBX that received the call, and the extension
number that received the call.
This mailbox number is the same as if an extension connected to PBX-1 called extension 102 of PBX-2. This
mailbox number should be programmed as the mailbox number and owner extension number on the VPS.
Multiple VPSs
More than one PBX in the network can have a VPS connected, and each VPS can provide voice mail services
for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.
Conditions
for the KX-TDE series PBX connected to the VPS, and for all KX-TDE series PBXs that will use this feature.
• All PBXs in the network must be KX-TDE series, KX-TDA series, or KX-NCP series PBXs. For information
on the hardware requirements for KX-TDA/KX-NCP series PBXs that share the same VPS, refer to the
corresponding Feature Guide.
Feature Guide 375

• Only KX-TVM series VPSs connected using DPT integration support this feature.
• Mailboxes for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network must be set up manually.
• An extension can receive Message Waiting notifications from multiple VPSs connected to PBXs in the
network. When multiple notifications of the number of unheard messages in an extension user’s message
box are sent from different VPSs, the most recent notification will be displayed.
• A flexible button cannot be customised as a Message Waiting button for another extension at a different
PBX.
• Whether or not Enhanced QSIG information is transmitted can be set in the TIE table.
• When PBXs are connected by PRI23 cards, the card must be set to ISDN Standard mode. If set to T1
mode, the card must be removed and reinstalled to allow the mode to be changed. When the card is
reinserted into the PBX, it is possible to choose whether the card will be set to T1 mode or ISDN Standard
mode. The default is ISDN Standard.
• PBX Code Method
The number used in this method must be no more than 8 digits.
• When using a mailbox number containing more than 5 digits, the version of the KX-TVM series VPS must
be 2.1 (Main Software Version 2.50) or later.
• Transfer to Mailbox
It is possible to transfer calls to a mailbox of a VPS at another PBX, by creating a flexible button containing
the following:
[T] + extension number of VPS at other PBX + [P] + [#] + 6
Then, the extension user can transfer calls to a mailbox by pressing this key, entering the mailbox number,
and going on hook.
• The VM Menu feature cannot be used in a Centralised Voice Mail network. When extensions belonging to
a PBX that is not connected to the VPS have a mailbox in the VPS, the VM Menu feature should be disabled
for the mailbox using the Class of Service (COS) setting of the VPS. Otherwise, there may be an answering
delay of about 6 seconds.

3.62 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Centralised VM
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
13.1 [11-1] Main—Maintenance
→ Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
→ Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

376 Feature Guide


Description
An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group can include up to 4 destinations at other PBXs in a private network,
including the floating extension number of another ICD Group. This is done by assigning a virtual PS as a
member of the ICD Group, and then setting the number of a destination at another PBX as the forwarding
destination for that virtual PS. This allows multiple ICD groups at remote locations to receive calls together.
Telephone Company
PBX-1 PBX-2 ICD

Group
Private network
ICD Group
PBX-3 ICD
Group
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 2 PBX-4 ICD

Group
Virtual PS 3
PBX-5 ICD
Group
Virtual PS 4
Conditions
for all PBXs that will support virtual PSs.
• The conditions for 1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group also apply to this
feature.

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
Feature Guide 377


1.25.6 Virtual PS
378 Feature Guide

1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

Description
One PS can be registered to up to 4 PBXs in a private network, and a Network ICD group created for the PS
at each PBX, with virtual PSs set to forward to the other PBXs in the network. When a call to the PS is received
at one of the PBXs, the call rings simultaneously at all PBXs in the network to which that PS is registered.
Telephone Company
PBX-1 PBX-2
Private network
ICD Group
PBX-3
Virtual PS1
Virtual PS2 PBX-4
Virtual PS3
Each virtual PS is set to forward calls to the extension number of the actual PS as registered at one of the
other PBXs.
Then, an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group is created containing the registered PS and the virtual PSs.
When a call is received at one of the PBXs, it is forwarded to all of the other PBXs. One private network channel
is used to forward an incoming call to one other PBX. Therefore, if a PS is registered at 3 other PBXs, 3 private
network channels are needed to forward a single call to all of the PBXs.
Each PBX can store the current communication status of each PS (In Range or Out of Range). If the status of
the PS is set to Out of Range when a call is received, the call will be refused and the private network channel
will be released immediately. Since the PS can only be set to In Range at a single PBX at one time, any other
PBXs to which the call is transferred will refuse the call, releasing the VoIP or ISDN channels.
Conditions
for all PBXs that will support virtual PSs.
• If no signal is received from a PS for the preprogrammed length of time when an incoming call is received,
the communication status of the PS is set to Out of Range, if enabled through system programming.
• When a PS comes within range of a certain PBX, Out of Range status is automatically released.
However, in some negative wireless network conditions, Out of Range status may not be released
automatically. In this case, the PS user can manually release Out of Range status by pressing the TALK
button and confirming that a dial tone can be heard from the PBX.
Feature Guide 379

• If the status of a PS is set to Out of Range at all PBXs that it is registered to, the call will be redirected to
the overflow destination of the ICD Group.
• Handover from one PBX to another PBX during a conversation is not possible.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

380 Feature Guide

1.31 IP Telephone Features

Description
This PBX supports the connection of IP-PTs, which function almost identically to normal PTs. However, they
connect to the PBX over a LAN, and make and receive calls using IP.
IP-PTs have two Ethernet ports for connection, primary and secondary. They are connected to the PBX through
a network hub or other splitting device, and can have a PC connected to the secondary Ethernet port.
[Connection Example]
PBX
IP-PT
IP-EXT Private IP
Network
IP-PT PC
IP-PT
Primary Secondary
Ethernet Port Ethernet Port
Main Office Branch Office
Conditions
• A V-IPEXT card or IP-EXT card is required to use IP-PTs.
• IP-PT registration is required through system programming before an IP-PT can be used with the PBX. An
IP-PT cannot be used unless an extension number is assigned. For details on how to register IP-PTs, see
the IP Networking Guide.
• The following features cannot be used with an IP-PT:
– XDP (® 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone)
– Digital XDP (® 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone)
– OHCA (® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA))
– Using PC Phone or PC Console on a connected PC (® 1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console)
• The KX-NT265 does not have a secondary Ethernet port.
• The following optional devices are available for the KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) IP-PT:
– KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth Module
– KX-NT303 Add-on 12 Key Module (not available for KX-NT400 or KX-NT366)
– KX-NT305 Add-on 60 Key Module (not available for KX-NT400 or KX-NT366)
• KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth Module
A Bluetooth wireless headset can be registered to a KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) IP-PT
containing the KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth Module through personal programming. When Headset
Mode is off, the Bluetooth headset can be used to answer calls or redial. In this case, Headset Mode will
turn on automatically, and will turn off after you hang up.
This Bluetooth Module is also compatible with KX-DT343/KX-DT346 DPTs.
Feature Guide 381

• Calls made using a Bluetooth wireless headset will not be disconnected immediately when the user
wanders out of range. However, if the Bluetooth wireless headset user remains out of range for a specified
time period, the call will be disconnected.
• Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX
A KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series IP-PT can automatically connect to a secondary PBX, when the primary
PBX becomes disconnected.
• IP-PTs can be connected to the V-IPEXT/IP-EXT card as follows:
V-IPEXT Card IP-EXT Card
KX-NT136 ü
KX-NT265 ü
KX-NT265 (version 2.00 or later) ü ü
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT366/KX-NT305) ü ü
KX-NT400/KX-NT366/KX-NT305 ü
ü: Available

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
3.6.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470)
KX-TDE600
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
3.8.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470)

3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
382 Feature Guide

1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Description
This PBX supports the connection of SIP supported IP telephones (hardphones and softphones). SIP
extensions make and receive calls using Internet Protocol (IP).
For information about SIP extension compatibility with feature numbers, see 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed
Numbering.
Below are some of the features supported by SIP extensions:
– Account Code Entry (® 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry)
– Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (® 1.10 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features)
– Call Forwarding (FWD) (® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
– Call Hold (® 1.13.1 Call Hold)
– Call Transfer with Announcement (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer)
– Conference*1 (® 1.14.1 Conference Features)
– Conference Group Call*1 (® 1.15.1 Conference Group Call)
– Direct Inward System Access (DISA) (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
– Doorphone Call (® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call)
– Emergency Call (® 1.5.4.2 Emergency Call)
– Idle Line Access (® 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access)
– Operator Call (® 2.2.5 Operator Features)
– Personal Speed Dialling (® 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System)
– Quick Dialling (® 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling)
– S-CO Line Access (® 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access)
– System Speed Dialling (® 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System)
– TIE Line Call (® 1.30.1 TIE Line Service)
– Trunk Group Access (® 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access)
*1
As a member only (not as an originator).
KX-HGT100 extensions support the following additional features:

– Message Waiting
– Personal Speed Dialling (Internal)
– Voice Mail
– Automatic Date and Time Adjustment
– Showing/preventing the telephone number when making outside calls
– SVM
– Call Transfer without Announcement
For details, refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-HGT100.
Conditions
• This PBX supports SIP devices that use RFC 3261, 3264, 3310, 2327, or 4028.
• Some SIP phones may not be compatible with this PBX.
• Before a SIP extension can be used with the PBX, the IP address of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card,
password, and extension number must be assigned on the SIP extension and on the PBX.
For details on how to register, refer to the Information on IP Networking Guide.
• When registering the SIP extension, the user ID must be the extension number of the SIP extension.
• When a SIP extension uses the Call Hold feature, the target call is put on Consultation Hold.
Feature Guide 383


KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
KX-TDE600
3.4.1 Virtual Cards

3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
384 Feature Guide

1.31.3 Peer-to-Peer Connection
1.31.3 Peer-to-Peer Connection

Description
This PBX automatically establishes peer-to-peer communication between peer-to-peer compatible IP
extensions (i.e., IP-PTs and SIP extensions). Non-peer-to-peer IP extension calls are routed through the
DSP card. However, with peer-to-peer calls, the call is routed directly from one IP extension to another without
going through a DSP card. In other words, peer-to-peer calls can be made without using the PBX’s resources.
Conditions
• Peer-to-peer calls can only be made between extensions connected to the PBX through the IPCMPR/
IPCEMPR card.
• The following IP telephones are peer-to-peer compatible for calls between each other:
– KX-NT265 (version 2.00 or later)*1
– KX-NT300 Series
– KX-NT400
– SIP Extensions
*1
For details about checking the version of the KX-NT265, refer to the Installation Manual.
• Three codecs are used for peer-to-peer calls: G.722, G.711, and G.729A. The speech quality of the codecs
varies as follows: (High) G.722, G.711, G.729A (Low).
When the preferred codec of each party differs, the call will be established using the lower codec. For
example, if the caller prefers G.711 while the called party prefers G.729A, the call will be established using
G.729A.
• G.722 is only available for calls between KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series IP-PTs and some SIP extensions
that support this codec during peer-to-peer communication.
• Through system programming, it is possible to assign a specific type of codec to be used for each extension.
• For SIP extensions, the priority of the codec that will be used can be specified on a SIP extension basis.
• For non-peer-to-peer calls via the DSP card, calls cannot be made or received when all of the card’s
resources are being used.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600

3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Option— IP Codec Priority

Feature Guide 385

1.31.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only)

Description
The KX-NT366 IP-PT features 12 flexible buttons, with an LCD screen next to the buttons. Each item can be
named on the LCD screen through personal/system programming to reflect the function of its corresponding
flexible button. Additionally, the flexible buttons can be organised into 4 "pages", allowing you to assign a total
of 48 items to the 12 flexible buttons. You can toggle between pages by pressing the NEXT PAGE key, as
follows:
CO 12 Bank
CO 11 Home
CO 10 London offc.
CO 09 NY offc.
CO 08 Sales
CO 07 Chris Walace
CO 06 Andre Romel
CO 05 Sean Carter
CO 04 Keith Murray
CO 03 Log-in/out
CO 02 LCS
CO 01 CO 13
NEXT PAGE is pressed
Conditions
• Up to 12 characters can be assigned to the LCD of each flexible button through personal/system
programming.
• When an incoming trunk call is answered or a trunk is seized, the corresponding CO button will turn Green
and the LCD display will switch to the page that the corresponding CO button is registered in.
• It is not recommended to assign the System Alarm button when using this feature, because if an alarm
occurs when the System Alarm button is not on the visible page, the alarm will not be noticed.

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Label Name

386 Feature Guide


Feature Guide 387

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
1.32 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

Description
The PBX supports a CTI interface using the LAN port of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card. The CTI interface allows
extension users to make or receive calls with advanced features:
– Extension users can make calls easily from a phone book in their PC.
– When an extension user receives an incoming call, detailed caller information can be displayed on the PC
automatically.
A PC and CTI server application software, such as Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA), are required to
use CTI features. The PC running the application monitors the status of the PBX and controls the PBX via the
CTI Server.
PBX
CTI Server
IPCMPR LAN
Card
PC PC
LAN
Conditions
• CTI application software must be installed on the connected PC. In addition, some features may require a
KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version).
• CTI Call control is not supported for SIP extensions.
For example, a SIP extension user cannot make or transfer a call using a CTI application.
• Application Programming Interface (API)/Protocol
Type API/Protocol
Third Party Call Control • ECMA CSTA Phase 3

• TAPI 2.1
• A KX-TDE Series PBX can connect to one CTI server only.

• For details about specific CTI features, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection
388 Feature Guide

KX-TDE600

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI)
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
Feature Guide 389

1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console

Description
Panasonic PC Phone/PC Console is supported by a PC with a KX-DT343/KX-DT346 or KX-T7633/
KX-T7636 DPT (equipped with USB module) through USB ports. By using the KX-TDA0350 PC Phone or
KX-TDA0300 PC Console CTI application, users can enjoy many of the KX-TDE series PBX features while
utilising the benefits of a CTI solution. PC Console gives users access to certain administrative level features
that are not available with PC Phone.
The extensions that use PC Console must be assigned through system programming. A CTI server is not
required to use PC Phone/PC Console.
PBX
USB
DPT PC
Along with many KX-TDE PBX features, PC Phone and PC Console offer many specific features, including
the following:
• Phone Book:
A list of telephone numbers including detailed information pertaining to each entry. This feature allows the
user to make calls and send e-mails to each entry.
• Outlook Integration:
The Microsoft® Outlook® Address Book can be integrated to be used with the PC Phone or PC Console.
• Pop-up Screen:
An image containing information about the caller appears when a call is received.
• Voice Memo:
Conversations are recorded at any time and can be saved, sent by e-mail, etc.
• Text Memo:
A user can type a short message during a conversation which can be saved, sent by e-mail, etc.
[For PC Phone Only]

• TAM (Telephone Answering Machine):
If a call is not answered within a preprogrammed time, callers can leave a message after hearing a greeting
message.
• Message:
TAM messages are played back and/or automatically transferred by phone or by e-mail.
[For PC Console Only]

• Incoming Group Screen:
Names, extension numbers, and the status (e.g., busy) of each extension can be monitored on a single
screen. Calls can also be made and received on this screen.
390 Feature Guide

Conditions
• Hardware Requirements: KX-DT343/KX-DT346 or KX-T7633/KX-T7636 DPT and USB Module

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
KX-TDE600

→ DPT Type—Type
→ DPT Type—Location No.

[601] Terminal Device Assignment

Feature Guide 391

1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)

Description
Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA) is a CTI application usable with any telephone (except SIP
extensions). A CTI server is not required to use CA. CA Client has 4 operating modes: Basic, Pro,
Supervisor, and Operator Console.
• Basic Mode:
Only basic features are available, such as call control.
• Pro Mode:
A pro user can see the presence (phone status and absent message) of other extensions.
• ICD Group Supervisor Mode:
A supervisor can use this feature to monitor users within an ICD group from a PC.
• Operator Console Mode:
An operator or secretary can manage and redirect multiple calls simultaneously with a graphical interface.
Conditions
• Activation keys are required to enable the application, some of which are preinstalled on the IPCMPR/
IPCEMPR card.
• For details, refer to the documentation for CA.


3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant
392 Feature Guide

1.33.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY
1.33 Cellular Phone Features

Description
This PBX provides features to support the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX.
Calls can be forwarded from virtual PSs to outside destinations such as cellular phones, and then answered
as if the user was at an extension within the PBX.
The following features can be used with cellular phones and other outside extensions:
Outside Destinations in Up to 4 cellular phones can be assigned as members of an

Incoming Call Distribution Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group, and receive calls to the
Group group.
® 1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution

Group
Cellular Phone XDP Parallel A PT user can set up to 4 cellular phones to ring in parallel for
Mode incoming calls.
® 1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution

Group
DISA Automatic Walking COS Registered cellular phones are automatically recognised as PBX
extensions when calling through DISA.

DISA Call Transfer From A cellular phone user who answers a trunk call forwarded from the
Outside Destination PBX using DISA can transfer that call to an extension within the
PBX. It is also possible to establish a Conference call, perform Call
Splitting, and page with a call on hold to transfer the call.
Conditions
• The KX-NCS4910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) for the KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200, or the KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) for the
KX-TDE600 is required to use this feature.

1.25.6 Virtual PS
Feature Guide 393

394 Feature Guide

Section 2
System Configuration and Administration
Features
Feature Guide 395

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
2.1 System Configuration—Hardware

Description
There are three types of extension ports as follows:
a. DPT Port: DPT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS (DPT [Digital] Integration), or PT-interface CS (e.g.,
KX-TDA0141) can be connected.
b. SLT Port: SLT or Panasonic VPS (DTMF Integration) can be connected.
c. Super Hybrid Port: DPT, APT, SLT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS, or PT-interface CS can be connected.
EXtra Device Port (XDP) of Super Hybrid Ports:
A DPT and SLT can be connected to one Super Hybrid port (TR: SLT, HL: DPT). In this case, the SLT port
(TR) of the Super Hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a sub telephone. There are
two modes for the XDP port as follows:
Mode Description
Parallel Mode The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they
can act as one extension. They use the main telephone’s (DPT’s)
extension data (e.g., extension number, COS).
(® 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone)
XDP Mode The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they
can act as completely different extensions. To use XDP mode, XDP
mode must be enabled (on) the port through system programming.
Conditions
• Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port
A DPT, SLT, or PT-interface CS connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically without
any programming. An APT connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically when the XDP
mode has been disabled.
• A DSS Console or a Panasonic VPS (DPT [Digital] Integration) can also be connected with an SLT in XDP
mode.
• APT and SLT in Parallel Mode
An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a Super Hybrid port and used in parallel mode.
• Digital XDP
A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as a completely different extension. (® 1.11.9 Parallelled
Telephone)
• Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
A PS can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone.
(® 1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
• DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment
When a DSS Console is connected, a paired extension must be assigned through system programming.
Only a PT can be a paired extension.

396 Feature Guide

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension

[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone
[600] EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode
Feature Guide 397

2.2 System Configuration—Software

Description
Each extension must belong to a Class of Service (COS). By assigning certain extensions to a COS, it is
possible to control the behaviour and privileges of extension users (allowing or denying certain extensions
access to various features, extensions, and trunks) depending on the duties appointed to them.
Many extensions can belong to the same COS by assigning each extension the same COS number, allowing
the same restrictions and privileges to apply to a group of extensions.
The following features are controlled on a COS basis:
a. ® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
b. ® 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
c. ® 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)—DND Override
d. ® 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
e. ® 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
f. ® 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
g. ® 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
h. ® 1.8.3 Call Monitor
i. ® 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
j. ® 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
k. ® 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
l. ® 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
m. ® 1.9.5 Walking COS
n. ® 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
o. ® 1.12.1 Call Transfer
p. ® 1.17.2 Door Open
q. ® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
r. ® 1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
s. ® 1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
t. ® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)—SMDR for Outgoing Trunk Calls
u. ® 2.2.4 Time Service—Time Service Switching
v. ® 2.2.6 Manager Features
w. ® 2.3.2 PT Programming
x. ® 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension—SDN Key
mode, SDN Walking COS, and assigning SDN buttons through PT programming
Conditions
• Walking COS
Extension users can temporarily use their own COS at another extension with a less-privileged COS to
access features, extensions, or trunks that are normally inaccessible due to that extension’s COS.

398 Feature Guide


2.1.8 COS Programming
[602] Class of Service


Feature Guide 399

2.2.2 Group
2.2.2 Group
Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.
1. Trunk Group
Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups (e.g., for each carrier, trunk type, etc.).
Several settings can be assigned on a trunk group basis. All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the
assignment determined for that trunk group.
® 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
® [402] LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number
One trunk can belong to only one trunk group on a port or channel basis.
Port basis: ELCOT/LCOT/DID/E & M/ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI23/ISDN-PRI30
Channel basis: E1/T1
2. Extension User Group
The PBX supports extension user groups, each of which is used to compose the following groups:
a. Tenant (® 2.2.3 Tenant Service)
b. Call Pickup Group (See below.)
c. Paging Group (See below.)
Every extension must belong to one extension user group, but cannot belong to more than one extension
user group.
® 5.7 [3-2] User Group
® [603] Extension User Group
Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extension/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX
[Example]
Call Pickup Group

Using the Group Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within a specified group.
One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups.(® 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup)
® 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
® 5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
® [650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3

Paging Group
Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging groups or answer a page to their
own groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups.
400 Feature Guide

2.2.2 Group
(® 1.16.1 Paging)
® 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
® 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
® 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
® [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[Example]
Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Paging Group 4
Extension Extension Extension

User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2
3. Idle Extension Hunting Group

If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle
member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system
programming. Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type:
Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting (® 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting).
® 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
® 5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
® [680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
® [681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
4. Incoming Call Distribution Group
An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the
group. Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group
number) and name. One extension can belong to multiple groups.
® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
® 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
® [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extension/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX/PS Ring Group
(® 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features)
[Example]
Incoming Call Incoming Call

Distribution Group 1 Distribution Group 2
(Floating Extn. No. 601, (Floating Extn. No. 602,
Extn. 103 Extn. 104

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107
5. VM Group
There are two types of VM groups as follows:
Feature Guide 401

2.2.2 Group
Type Description
VM (DTMF) Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF
One SLT port can belong to only one group.
VM (DPT) Group A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
One DPT port can belong to only one group.
(® 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group)

® 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
® 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
® 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
® 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
® 5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
® [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
[Example]
PBX
DPT SLT DPT DPT DPT DPT SLT SLT SLT SLT
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port
VM (DPT) Group VM (DTMF) Group
VPS VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration) (DTMF Integration)
6. PS Ring Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each group
has a floating extension number and name through system programming. One PS can belong to multiple
groups.
(® 1.25.2 PS Ring Group)
® 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
® 5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
PS Ring Group 1 PS Ring Group 2

(Floating Extn. No. 301, (Floating Extn. No. 302,
PS01 PS04
PS03 PS06
PS02 PS05
402 Feature Guide

2.2.2 Group

Section 5 [3] Group

[402] LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number
[603] Extension User Group
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member

Feature Guide 403


Description
This PBX can be shared with a certain number of tenants.
1. Tenant Configuration
Tenant Member
The tenant members consist of extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to only one
tenant. Therefore, one extension can belong to only one tenant.
(® 2.2.2 Group)
Time Service
Each tenant has a Time Table. The Start and/or End time of each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) can
be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively.
(® 2.2.4 Time Service)
[Example]
Tenant 1 Tenant 2
Extension Extension
User Group 1 User Group 5
Extension Extension
Extension
User Group 3
Extension
User Group 4
Use Time Table 1 Use Time Table 2
2. System Management
Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant.
a. Tenant Operator (extension number/floating extension number of incoming call distribution group/
none) (® 2.2.5 Operator Features)
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
b. ARS Mode (Off/Local Access/All Access/System) (® 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— ARS Mode
c. Music Source for Music on Hold (System/BGM Number/Tone)
(® 1.13.4 Music on Hold)
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Music On Hold
d. System Speed Dialling (System/Tenant Exclusive)
(® 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System)
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial
System Speed
Tenant No. Operator ARS Mode Music Source
Dialling
1 Extn.101 Local Access System*3 System*4
Extended/
2 None*1 System*2 Tone
Tenant Exclusive
Floating extn. Extended/
3 Off BGM1
no. 200 Tenant Exclusive
404 Feature Guide

System Speed
Tenant No. Operator ARS Mode Music Source
Dialling
: : : : :
*1
Follows the system assignment of a PBX operator.
® 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [006] Operator Assignment
*2
Follows the system assignment of the ARS mode.
® Section 10 [8] ARS
® [320] ARS Mode
*3
Follows the system assignment of the music source for the Music on Hold.
® 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
® [711] Music on Hold
*4
Follows the system assignment for System Speed Dialling.
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Conditions
• Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block
The following features can be restricted based on the COS for each extension (not based on the tenant)
by the Internal Call Block feature (® 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block):
– Calling extensions or doorphone(s) in the restricted tenant(s)
– Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant(s)
– Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant(s)
[Example]
Tenant 1 Tenant 2
Extension Extension

COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4
Extension
Tenant 3 Extension
User Group 2 Extension User Group 4
User Group 5

Extn. 108 Extn. 109
COS 5 COS 6
Extension
User Group 6
Extn. 110 Extn. 111
Feature Guide 405

Called Party
Caller
COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6 ...
COS 1 ...
COS 2 ...
COS 3 ü ü ...
COS 4 ü ü ...
COS 5 ü ü ü ü ...
COS 6 ü ü ü ü ...
: : : : : : : :
ü: Block
Explanation:
1. Assign each extension in a tenant to a certain COS number. Each tenant must have unique COS
numbers.
Tenant 1: COS 1 and COS 2
2. Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block enables by the Internal Call Block feature.
a. Tenant 1 (COS 1 and COS 2) can make calls to both Tenant 2 (COS 3 and COS 4) and Tenant 3
(COS 5 and COS 6) as well as Tenant 1.
b. Tenant 2 (COS 3 and COS 4) can make calls to Tenant 1 (COS 1 and COS 2) and Tenant 2.
c. Tenant 3 (COS 5 and COS 6) can make calls to Tenant 3 itself only.
• An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are
determined on a tenant basis (® 1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY):
– Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue
– The Time Table which determines the overflow destination

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
→ PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
5.7 [3-2] User Group
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Tenant Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— Tenant Number
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor— Tenant No.
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Section 10 [8] ARS
10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
406 Feature Guide

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Tenant Number

12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— Tenant Number
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table—MSN— Tenant Number

[320] ARS Mode
[711] Music on Hold

Feature Guide 407

2.2.4 Time Service
2.2.4 Time Service

Description
This PBX supports day, night, lunch, and break modes of operation. TRS/Barring can be arranged separately.
The destination of incoming calls can be set differently for each mode.
1. Time Service Switching Mode
Day/lunch/break/night mode can be switched either automatically or manually. The switching mode can
be assigned for each tenant.
The switching mode can also be changed by pressing the Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/
Manual) button. This can be performed by only an extension assigned as the manager, or preprogrammed
extension on a COS basis.
Type Description
Automatic The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time Table.
Manual A manager, or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis can switch
mode by dialling the feature number or pressing the Time Service button.
Even while in the Automatic Switching mode, day/lunch/break/night mode can be changed manually.
2. Time Table
Each tenant has a Time Table used for the Automatic Switching mode. The Start and/or End time of each
mode can be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers
respectively.
[Time Table Example]

Time Table No. (Tenant No.)
Time Schedule
1 2 3 4 …
MON Day 1 start 08:00 11:00 08:00 08:00 …
Lunch start 12:00 NONE 16:00 12:00 …
Day 2 start 13:00 NONE NONE NONE …
Break 1 start NONE NONE NONE NONE …
Break 1 end (Day restart) NONE NONE NONE NONE …
Night start 16:00 20:00 12:00 NONE …
TUE Day 1 start 08:00 11:00 08:00 08:00 …
Lunch start 12:05 NONE 13:00 13:00 …
Day 2 start 13:00 NONE NONE NONE …
Break 1 start NONE NONE NONE NONE …
Break 1 end (Day restart) NONE NONE NONE NONE …
Night start 16:31 20:00 17:00 NONE …
: : : : : : …
<Time Service Image of Monday>
Time Table No. 00:00 08:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 16:00 20:00 24:00 08:00
1 Night Day 1 Lunch Day 2 Night Day 1
2 Night Day 1 Night
3 Night Day 1 Night Lunch Day 1
4 Night Day 1 Lunch Day 1
408 Feature Guide

2.2.4 Time Service
3. Features Using Time Service

The following features can be set in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night):
a. Destination of incoming trunk calls (DIL/DID/DDI/MSN) (® 1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features)
b. Destination of the Intercept Routing (® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing)
c. Queuing Time Table for incoming call distribution groups (® 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature)
d. Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups (® 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature)
e. Destination of incoming doorphone calls (® 1.17.1 Doorphone Call)
f. PBX operator (® 2.2.5 Operator Features)
g. COS for TRS/Barring and for Trunk Access
h. Outgoing Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder (® 1.28.4 Timed Reminder)
i. Intercept time for Intercept Routing—No Answer (® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing) and for DISA Intercept
Routing—No Answer (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
[Programming Examples of DID/DDI Table and DIL Table]

DID/DDI table can be programmed for each DID/DDI number, and a tenant (Time Table) number is
assigned to each DID/DDI number. DIL table can be programmed for each trunk, and a tenant (Time Table)
number is assigned to each trunk.
<DID/DDI Table>
Location DID/DDI No. Tenant DID/DDI Destination
(Time Table)
No. Day Lunch Break Night
001 123-4567 1 105 100 105 100

(VPS) (VPS)
002 123-2468 1 102 100 102 100
(VPS) (VPS)
: : : : : : :
<DIL Table>
Trunk No. Tenant (Time Table) No. DIL Destination
01 1 101 100 101 100

(VPS) (VPS)
02 2 102 100 102 100
(VPS) (VPS)
: : : : : :
Explanation:
If a trunk call with a DID number (123-4567) is received at 20:00;
1. Tenant (Time Table) number 1 will be used.
2. The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1.
3. The call will be routed to the extension 100 (VPS).
4. Holiday Mode
The holiday mode activates automatically using the Automatic Switching mode. Up to 24 holidays (start
and end dates) can be stored, and one time mode can be selected for all holidays.
5. Time Service Button
Feature Guide 409

2.2.4 Time Service
A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons:

a. Day/Night button
b. Day/Night/Lunch button
c. Day/Night/Break button
d. Day/Night/Lunch/Break button
Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes. For example, pressing the Day/Night button
switches between day and night modes. All of these buttons show the current status as follows:
Light Pattern Status
Off Day mode

Red on Night mode
Green on Lunch mode
Slow green flashing Break mode
Slow red flashing Holiday mode
Note
Any extension user (except extension users allowed to change the mode) can only check the current
status on the display by pressing the Time Service button.
Conditions
• PT programming can set the Start and/or End time of the following:
– Day-1 (Day Start time)
– Lunch (Lunch Start time)
– Day-2 (Lunch End time)
– Night (Night Start time)
PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day.
– Break-1 Start
– Break-1 End (Day restart)
– Break-2 Start
– Break-3 Start
• Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button.

4.6 [2-4] Week Table
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Time Service Switch
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
410 Feature Guide

2.2.4 Time Service
→ Type
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
→ Type
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

[101] Time Service Switching Mode
[102] Time Service Starting Time
[514] Time Service Manual Switching


1.8.10 Checking the Time Service Status
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
Feature Guide 411


Description
Any extension or Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group can be designated as an operator.
This PBX supports the following types of operators:
Type Description
PBX operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a

PBX operator for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Tenant operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a
tenant operator. The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming
call distribution group of another tenant.
[Example] Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3.
Operator Call:
An extension user can call an operator by dialling the preprogrammed Operator Call feature number. The
destination of the Operator Call depends on the following:
– If the Tenant Service is not in use:
The call is directed to the PBX operator according to the corresponding time mode.
– If the Tenant Service is in use:
The call is directed to the extension’s tenant operator. If a tenant operator is not assigned, the call is directed
to the PBX operator. In this case, the current time mode of the extension’s tenant is used to determine the
PBX operator that the call is directed to.
If neither a tenant operator nor a PBX operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
Conditions
• A single extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both a tenant operator and the
PBX operator.
• Tenant operators can be assigned individually for multiple tenants.

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)



1.2.1 Basic Calling
412 Feature Guide


Description
An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) is allowed to use the specified features. COS
programming determines the extensions which can use the following manager features:
Manager
Password
Manager Manager Changes the manager password. Required
Programming Password
Change
Call Charge Sets, displays, clears, and prints the call Required
Management charge data.
® 1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Verification Code Sets a verification code PIN for each Required
Personal verification code.
Identification
Number (PIN) Set ® 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
Remote PIN Clear Clears the extension PIN of an extension Required
remotely, and a verification code PIN. PIN
Lock is also unlocked.
® 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification

Number (PIN)
® 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
Remote Sets or cancels the Extension Dial Lock on Required
Extension Dial an extension remotely.
Lock
® 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
Dial Tone Transfer Changes the TRS/Barring level of the Not required
extension temporarily.
[Example] An extension user can call a
manager to release the restricted outgoing
call (e.g., international call).
® 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Outgoing Message (OGM) Records and plays back outgoing messages Not required
(OGMs).
® 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Time Service Switches the time mode (day/lunch/break/ Not required
night) manually.
® 2.2.4 Time Service

BGM—External Sets the External BGM on and off. Not required
® 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
Feature Guide 413

Manager
Password
Trunk Busy Out Clear Clears the Busy Out status of a trunk. Not required
® 1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

NDSS Monitor Release Removes the monitor function from an NDSS Not required
button.
® 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection

(NDSS)
Conditions
CAUTION
• Manager Password
One manager password can be assigned per PBX.

13.1 [11-1] Main—Password— Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

[112] Manager Password


2.1 Control Features
414 Feature Guide

2.3.1 PC Programming
2.3 System Data Control
Description
This PBX can be programmed and administered using a PC. There are two programming methods:
1. On-site Programming: System programming/diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to
the PBX directly.
2. Remote Programming: System programming/diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote
location.
1. On-site Programming:
Method Description
Using the Serial Interface The PBX has a Serial Interface (RS-232C) port which can be used
(RS-232C) port for either system administration or SMDR (® 1.26.1.1 Station
Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
Using the USB port The PC is connected to a USB port (USB Module) attached to a DPT.
Using the LAN interface Available via the MNT port of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.
Using a modem through An RMT card must be installed. Assign the floating extension number
an SLT port*1 of the analogue remote maintenance (default: 599), and dial this
number from the PC to connect to the PBX.
Using an ISDN TA Assign the floating extension number of the ISDN remote
interface (64 kbps) maintenance (default: 699), and dial this number from the PC to
through an ISDN connect to the PBX. The RMT card is not required for this method.
Extension Line*1 This method is available only when a user-supplied ISDN TA that
supports CAPI is used.
*1
If remote access is disabled through system programming, then this on site programming cannot be done.
2. Remote Programming:
Method Description
Using a modem (RMT card) An RMT card must be installed. The floating extension number of
the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned (default: 599).
PC programming, using a telephone connected in parallel with the
modem, can be done in the following ways:
• Direct Access
Dial the DIL/DID/DDI number whose destination is the floating
extension number of the analogue remote maintenance.
• Through DISA
Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote
maintenance using the DISA feature. (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward
System Access (DISA))
• Call Transfer
Call an extension (probably the operator), and request a transfer
to the floating extension number of the analogue remote
maintenance. (® 1.12.1 Call Transfer)
Feature Guide 415

Method Description
Using an external modem An external modem can be used instead of an RMT card to perform
(Not RMT card) the remote programming. An external modem can be connected to
the Serial Interface (RS-232C) of the PBX. Connect the modem to
an extension port which is assigned as the DIL/DID/DDI/MSN
destination or to a trunk directly to connect to the PBX from the PC.
An AT command can be sent to the modem automatically when it is
connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port. AT commands
can be programmed beforehand through system programming to
initialise the modem. An AT command can also be sent manually in
the PT system programming mode.
Using an ISDN TA interface The floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance
(64 kbps) through an ISDN must be assigned (default: 699), and dial the DIL/DID/DDI/MSN
Trunk number whose destination is the floating extension number of the
ISDN remote maintenance. The RMT card is not required for this
method.
This method is available only when an user-supplied ISDN TA that
supports CAPI is used.
Conditions
• Only one system programming session can be in progress at a time, whether using a PC or a PT.
• Programmer Code and Password for System Programming
To access system programming, a programmer code and its password must be entered. For more details,
see Section 2.3.3 Password Security in this Feature Guide.
• Remote Programming Limitation
It is possible to disable remote access through system programming.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
3.3.3 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)
4.1 Overview
4.2 PC Connection
4.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console
KX-TDE600
3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card
3.3.4 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)
4.1 Overview
4.2 PC Connection
4.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console

13.1 [11-1] Main
→Remote
→Password— System Password - PC Programming—User Level
416 Feature Guide

→Password— System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level

→Password— System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level

[801] External Modem Control
[810] Remote Programming
[811] Modem Floating Extension Number
[812] ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

Feature Guide 417

2.3.2 PT Programming
Description
A PT user can perform the following programming:
a. Personal Programming: Customising the extension according to his needs.
b. System Programming: Customising the PBX according to organisational needs.
c. Manager Programming: Customising specified frequently changing items (e.g., Charge Management and
Remote Extension Dial Lock).
Conditions
• COS programming determines what programming can be performed:
– System programming and personal programming
– Personal programming only
– No programming
• The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal
programming and system programming regardless of the COS.
• The extension(s) assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming.
• During programming, the PT is considered to be busy.
• Only one system programmer or one manager programmer is allowed to perform system or manager
programming at one time. The maximum number of simultaneous programmers that each PBX supports
is as follows:
– one system programmer + 63 personal programmers
– one manager programmer + 63 personal programmers
– 64 personal programmers
• System Programming Password Level
To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. For more details, see Section
2.3.3 Password Security in this Feature Guide.
• Personal Programming Data Default Set
A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default.

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Programming Mode Level
13.1 [11-1] Main—Password
→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level
→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level
→ Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

2.1 PT Programming
[516] Programming Mode Limitation

418 Feature Guide


3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.2 Manager Programming
3.3 Customising Your System (System Programming)
Feature Guide 419

2.3.3 Password Security

Description
To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the
PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of
programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:
Password Description Format
PT System Password Used to access user-level PT programming. The specific 4 – 10

(PT) for User PT programming items that may be programmed at user digits
level can be selected through system programming item.
System Password Used to access administrator-level PT programming. All PT
(PT) for programming settings are available.
Administrator
PC System Password Used with the user-level programmer code to access 4 – 10
(PC) for User user-level PC programming. The installer can specify charact
which system programming settings are available. ers
System Password Used with the administrator-level programmer code to
(PC) for access administrator-level PC programming. The installer
Administrator can specify which system programming settings are
available.
System Password Used with the installer-level programmer code to access
(PC) for Installer installer-level PC programming. All system programming
settings are available.
The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console. For more
information about programmer codes, see Section 2.1.2 Access Levels in the PC Programming Manual. The
required format of each code is as follows:
Item Length
User Level Programmer Code 0 – 16 characters

Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters
Installer Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
programme the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, refer to Section 1.1.2 Entering Characters in the PC Programming Manual.
420 Feature Guide


2.1.2 Access Levels
13.1 [11-1] Main—Password

Feature Guide 421

2.3.4 Quick Setup
2.3.4 Quick Setup

Description
It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a PC. When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time
with the Installer Level Programmer Code (® 2.3.1 PC Programming), Quick Setup display will appear
automatically. The following items can be programmed as desired:
Item Parameter Description
Date & Time Year/Month/Date/Hour/ The date and time set on the PC will be used.
Minute
System Password 4–10 characters Enter the system password for installer (®
2.3.3 Password Security).
Manager Extension Extension Number Assign an extension as a manager extension (®
and Operator 2.2.6 Manager Features) and an extension as a PBX
operator (® 2.2.5 Operator Features).
Flexible Numbering 1. Type 1 If "Type 1 (with )" is selected, " " must prefix all
—Feature (with ) feature numbers (except access numbers) when an
2. Type 2 extension user wants to use a feature.
(without ) [Example] Call Pickup feature number
Type 1 (with ): 41
Type 2 (without ): 41
For default of the flexible numbers, refer to the [Flexible

Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]
(® 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering).
Flexible Numbering KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Determines the number from which default extension
—Extension from 101/from 201 numbers begin.
KX-TDE600:
from 1001/from 2001
Flexible Numbering 0/9 The feature number for Operator Call can be selected.
—Operator
Flexible Numbering 0/1/9 The feature number for Idle Line Access can be
—CO Access selected.
DHCP Client Enable/Disable Determines whether to use a DHCP server to assign
IP address information automatically or not.
LAN Connection*1 • IP Address for Manually enter the LAN information when not using a
IPCMPR/IPCEMPR DHCP server.
Card
• IP Address for
VoIP-DSP
• Subnet Mask
• Default Gateway
Virtual Card – Select whether to install a V-IPEXT, V-SIPEXT, or
V-SIPGW card.
*1
If the DHCP Client setting is set to Enable, this parameter can not be set.
Note that the programmable items may vary depending on the version of Maintenance Console being used.
422 Feature Guide

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

Description
There are two automatic setup features as follows:
1. Automatic ISDN Configuration
2. Automatic Time Adjustment
1. Automatic ISDN Configuration

The ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically through system programming.
The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for
each ISDN (BRI) port:
a. L1 Active Mode
b. L2 Data Link Mode
c. Access Mode (Point-to-Point/Point-to-Multipoint)
d. TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00–63/Automatic)
2. Automatic Time Adjustment
It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways:
a. Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) Setting:
The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed. The PBX clock will be adjusted (one
hour forward or backward) at 2:00 AM of the programmed date, if enabled through system
programming. It means 2:00 AM will become 3:00 AM on the start date of the summer time, and 2:00
AM will become 1:00 AM on the end date.
Note
If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set;
– On the summer time start date, the setting between 2:00 AM and 3:00 AM will not happen.
– On the summer time end date, the setting between 1:00 AM and 2:00 AM will ring twice.
b. Time Information from Telephone Company:
Time information can be received on the following calls:
• An incoming or outgoing call through an ISDN line
• An incoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information.
The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3:05 AM, if enabled through system
programming.
Note
If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set, the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending
on the adjustment.
c. Time Information through Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP):
By connecting the PBX to an SNTP server, it is possible to receive and update the time setting.
The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday at 3:05 AM, if enabled through system programming.
Conditions
[General]
• Through system programming, it is possible to specify SNTP, ISDN, or neither method as the selected
method of automatic time adjustment.
• SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at
the end of summer time. (® 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR))
Feature Guide 423

[SNTP Time Information]

• The time set through SNTP will apply the same to all PTs and IP-PTs connected to the PBX, regardless if
an IP extension is located in another time zone.

2.5 Tool—2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
424 Feature Guide


Description
To dial another extension user or to access PBX features, the access numbers (extension numbers or feature
numbers) are required.
There are three types of numbering plans:
1. Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
2. Flexible Numbering (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
3. Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking)
1. Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)

Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised
for easy use. The numbers must not conflict. It is also possible to use default (Type 1 or Type 2) shown in
the following table:
a. Extension Numbers: Extension numbers consist of leading numbers and additional numbers.
Extension numbers (consisting of "0" through "9") can be assigned as follows:
• Numbering schemes: 1-64
• Leading number: up to three digits
• Additional number: up to two digits (default: two digits)
b. Feature Numbers: A number of up to four digits, consisting of "0" through "9", " ", and "#"
c. Other PBX Extension Numbers (Other PBX Extension Number [TIE] -1 through 16): A number of
up to three digits, consisting of "0" through "9", " ", and "#"
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]

Feature Default
Type 1 Type 2
(with ) (without )
KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE600
KX-TDE200
Extension Numbering Scheme 1—Leading 1/2 10 / 20 10
Number
Number
Number
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 5—Leading None 14 / 24 14
Number
Number
Number
Number
Feature Guide 425

Feature Default
Type 1 Type 2
(with ) (without )
KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE600
KX-TDE200
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 10—Leading None 19 / 29 None
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 20—Leading None 29 / 39 None
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 21—Leading 5 5 19
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 22—Leading 6 6 29
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 23–64—Leading None None None
Number
Operator Call*1 9/0 9/0 0
Idle Line Access (Local Access)*1 0/1/9 0/1/9 9
Trunk Group Access*1 8 8 8
TIE Line Access*1 7 7 None
Redial*1 # # #
Speed Dialling—System/Personal*1
426 Feature Guide

Feature Default
Type 1 Type 2
(with ) (without )
KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE600
KX-TDE200
Personal Speed Dialling—Programming*1 30 30 30
Doorphone Call*1 31 31 31
Conference Group Call 32 32 None
Group Paging 33 33 33
External BGM on/off*1 35 35 35
Outgoing Message (OGM) playback/record/clear 36 36 36
S-CO Line Access*1 37 37 37
SVM—Personal Greeting Message playback/ 38 38 None
record/clear*1
Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel 39 39 39
Group Call Pickup 40 40 40
Directed Call Pickup 41 41 41
TAFAS—Calls through an External Pager 42 42 42
Group Paging answer 43 43 43
Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel 46 46 46
User Remote Operation/Walking COS/ 47 47 47
Verification Code Entry
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel 48 48 48
Account Code Entry *1
49 49 49
Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve 50 50 50
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Holding 51 51 51
Extension Number
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve 52 52 52
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Held Trunk 53 53 53
Number
Door Open 55 55 55
External Relay 56 56 56
External Feature Access 60 60 60
ISDN Hold 62 62 None
Preventing (not showing) the telephone number
67
when making outside calls (KX-HGT100 only)*2
Feature Guide 427

Feature Default
Type 1 Type 2
(with ) (without )
KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE600
KX-TDE200
Showing the telephone number when making
68
outside calls (KX-HGT100 only)*2
COLR set/cancel*1 7 0 7 0 7 0
CLIR set/cancel*1 7 1 7 1 7 1
Switch CLIP/COLP of the Trunk/Extension*1 7 2 7 2 7 2
MCID 7 3 7 3 None
ISDN-FWD set/cancel/confirm 7 5 7 5 None
Message Waiting set/cancel/callback*1 70 70 70
FWD/DND set/cancel—Both*1 710 710 710
FWD/DND set/cancel—External*1 711 711 711
FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal*1 712 712 712
FWD/DND No Answer Timer set*1 713 713 713
Group FWD set/cancel—Both*1 714 714 714
Group FWD set/cancel—External*1 715 715 715
Group FWD set/cancel—Internal *1
716 716 716
Call Pickup Deny set/cancel*1 720 720 720
Paging Deny set/cancel 721 721 721
Walking Extension/Enhanced Walking Extension 727 727 727
Data Line Security set/cancel 730 730 730
Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call off/BSS/ 731 731 731
OHCA/Whisper OHCA
Automatic Call Waiting set/cancel 732 732 732
Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel 733 733 733
Not Ready Mode on/off*1 735 735 735
Log-in/Log-out*1 736 736 736
Incoming Call Queue Monitor 739 739 739
Hot Line programme/set/cancel 740 740 740
Absent Message set/cancel *1
750 750 750
BGM set/cancel 751 751 751
Remote Wake-up Call 76 76 76
Timed Reminder set/cancel 760 760 760
428 Feature Guide

Feature Default
Type 1 Type 2
(with ) (without )
KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE600
KX-TDE200
Printing Message 761 761 761
Extension Dial Lock set/cancel*1 77 77 77
Time Service Switch*1 780 780 780
Remote Extension Dial Lock off*1 782 782 782
Remote Extension Dial Lock on*1 783 783 783
NDSS Monitor Release 784 784 784
Trunk Busy Out Clear 785 785 None
Extension Feature Clear*1 790 790 790
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) 799 799 799
set/cancel*1
Dial Information (CTI) None None None
Other PBX Extension Number (TIE) 1–16 None None None
Quick Dialling*3 None None None
*1
SIP extension users can use these feature numbers. If these feature numbers do not work properly with the KX-HGT100, ensure
that the firmware of the KX-HGT100 and the MPR software file version of the PBX are updated to their latest versions.
*2
These settings are unrelated to PBX feature numbers and are set directly via the telephone. If the number set to the telephone
is also used as a PBX feature number, the number functions as the telephone's feature number, and not as a PBX feature
number. See 4.4.1 Registering IP Telephones in the IP Networking Guide for programming details.
*3
It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers. This is used for the Automatic
Rerouting of VoIP Calls To Public Trunk feature.
2. Flexible Numbering (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
Feature numbers which are available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard can be customised for
easy use. The numbers should be one digit ("0" through "9", " ", or "#") and must not conflict. For default,
refer to the following table:
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)]
Feature Default
Call Waiting/DND Override*1 1 or 2*2

Executive Busy Override 3
Message Waiting set *1
4
Call Monitor 5
Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS 6
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
*1
SIP extensions cannot perform DND Override or Message Waiting but can be the recipient of them.
*2
To use Call Waiting/DND Override, both "1" and "2" are available by default.
Feature Guide 429

3. Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking)

The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in the following
table:
[Fixed Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)]

Feature Fixed Numbering
Pulse to Tone Conversion

Conference*1 3
Door Open 5
*1
SIP extensions cannot establish conferences but can participate in them.
Conditions
• All features have a default feature number.
• The following are examples of feature number conflicts: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and
321, etc.
• Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)
Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call
Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature
number should be followed by "0".
• If a feature number includes " " or "#", rotary SLT users cannot use it.
• ISDN extension users cannot use the following features:
– OGM playback/record
– Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve (held at its own extension)
– ISDN Hold
– MCID
– Walking Extension
– Call Waiting
– Hot Line
– Timed Reminder
– Executive Busy Override
– Call Monitor
– Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS
• PS users cannot use the following features:
– Personal Speed Dialling
– OGM playback/record
– S-CO Line Access
– Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel
– Walking Extension
– BGM set/cancel
– Timed Reminder

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
→Extension
→Features
430 Feature Guide

→Other PBX Extension

4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

[100] Flexible Numbering


4.2.1 Feature Number Table
Feature Guide 431

2.3.7 Floating Extension

Description
Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions. This feature is
also known as Floating Station.
These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming
calls etc.
Resource Description Default
Device External Pager Used as the destination for TAFAS feature. 600
(® 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station
(TAFAS))
Outgoing Message Used to send messages for DISA feature. 5 + two-digit
(OGM) (® 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access OGM number
(DISA))
Built-in Simplified Used to access message boxes associated
Voice Message with extensions. (® 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified 591
(SVM) Voice Message (SVM))
Analogue Remote Used to access the PC programming mode
599
Maintenance through a modem on a PC.
ISDN Remote Used to access the PC programming mode
699
Maintenance through the ISDN interface on a PC.
Group Incoming Call Used to call an incoming call distribution 6 + two-digit
Distribution Group group. (® 1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution group
Group Features—SUMMARY) number
PS Ring Group Used to call a PS ring group. (® 1.25.2 PS
—
Ring Group)
VM (DPT) Group Used to call a VM (DPT) group. 500 (VM
[DPT] Group
1)
VM (DTMF) Group Used to call a VM (DTMF) group. —
Conditions
• It is possible to give names to floating extension numbers.

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
→ Floating Extension Number
→ Group Name
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No.
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Floating Ext. No.
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number
7.2 [5-2] External Pager— Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number
13.1 [11-1] Main—Remote
432 Feature Guide

→ Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number

→ Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number
[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
[811] Modem Floating Extension Number
[812] ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

Feature Guide 433

2.3.8 Software Upgrading
2.3.8 Software Upgrading

Description
It is possible to upload software from a PC to the PBX to upgrade the following:
Data File Storage Area
Main Processing (IPCMPR/IPCEMPR) Operating system data area on IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

software data
Default data of system programming for Country/area data area on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.
each country/area
Language data for PT display Each language data area on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.
There are two types:
Type 1: PT display except for PT system programming (®
2.3.2 PT Programming) (5 languages max.)
Type 2: PT system programming data (one language max.)
LPR (software on a slot card) software data Flash ROM on the slot card (e.g., BRI8)
Cell Station (CS) software data Flash ROM on the CS
Conditions
• The software version of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR can be confirmed through system programming.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
KX-TDE600
3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card

3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary— Card Type

[190] Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference
434 Feature Guide

2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics

Description
When the power supply to the PBX fails, specific SLTs and/or ISDN terminal devices are automatically
connected to specific trunks (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from normal operation to the
Power Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.
Only the trunks handled by Power Failure Connections can be used during a power failure.
Conditions
[General]
• Only trunk calls can be made during a power failure. All other features do not work.
• DC Power Source
If the DC power is available from backup batteries, even if the AC power fails, the PBX will remain fully
operational.
• The BRI8 (one PFT port) and BRI4 (one PFT port) cards can also be used for Power Failure Connections.
For details about Power Failure Connections, refer to the Installation Manual.
[KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200]
• The analogue trunk cards and extension cards, as well as the number of PFT ports (ports which can be
used for Power Failure Connections) are as follows:
Trunk Cards: LCOT16 (4 PFT ports), LCOT8 (2 PFT ports), and LCOT4 (2 PFT ports)
Extension Cards: MSLC16 (4 PFT ports), CSLC16 (4 PFT ports), SLC16 (4 PFT ports), DHLC8 (2 PFT
ports) and SLC8 (2 PFT ports)
Only connect one extension card to each trunk card.
Note
Through system programming, it is possible to allow trunk calls that are established during a power
failure to be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal
configuration from the Power Failure Connection. However, if no special programming is performed,
the connection will be dropped when power returns.
[KX-TDE600]
• The analogue trunk cards and extension cards, as well as the number of PFT ports (ports which can be
used for Power Failure Connections) are as follows:
Trunk Cards: ELCOT16 (4 PFT ports)

Extension Cards: ECSLC24 (4 PFT ports), EMSLC16 (4 PFT ports), CSLC16 (4 PFT ports), ESLC16 (4
PFT ports), DHLC8 (2 PFT ports) and SLC8 (2 PFT ports)
Only connect one extension card to each trunk card.
Note
Power Failure Connections must be made within the same shelf. An extension card cannot have a
Power Failure Connection with a trunk card of another shelf.
Through system programming, it is possible to allow trunk calls that are established during a power
failure to be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal
Feature Guide 435

configuration from the Power Failure Connection. However, if no special programming is performed,
the connection will be dropped when power returns.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
3.2.6 Backup Battery Connection
3.15.1 Power Failure Connections
KX-TDE600
3.2.11 Backup Battery Connection
3.14.1 Power Failure Connections

13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer
436 Feature Guide

2.4.2 Power Failure Restart
2.4.2 Power Failure Restart

Description
When turning the electricity back on, the PBX restarts the stored data automatically and the PBX will record
the event (System Restart) in the error log.
Conditions
• In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium battery. There is no
memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) (® 1.8.1 Automatic Callback
Busy (Camp-on)) and Call Park (® 1.13.2 Call Park).
Feature Guide 437


Description
When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it, the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension,
which is allowed to use this feature through system programming (a maximum of two extensions per PBX),
turns on red. Pressing the button will show the error number on the display. If multiple errors occur, the error
number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest. The System Alarm button light turns off
automatically after all error numbers have been displayed.
For details about the errors and their solutions, refer to the Installation Manual.
[Error Example]
ERR #100 (*10001)
(1) (2)
[Explanation]
Number in the
Item Description
Example
(1) Error Code Shows three-digit error code.
(2) Sub Code Shows six-digit sub code (WXYYZZ).
W: Shelf type (Physical shelf: blank, Virtual shelf: *)
X: Shelf number (1–4)
YY: Slot number (00–11)
ZZ: Physical port number (01–16)
Conditions
• System Alarm Button
A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button.
• If an extension allowed to utilise this feature uses PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be
displayed on the PC, and can be sent to the preprogrammed destination via PC Console or PC Phone. PC
Console and PC Phone use e-mail to send the information.
• The alarm information will be recorded on SMDR, if enabled through system programming.
• The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log
KX-TDE600
5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log
438 Feature Guide


2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
13.1 [11-1] Main
→SMDR— Print Information—Error Log
→Maintenance— Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Set
→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Hour
→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Feature Guide 439

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor
2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System

Monitor
Description
It is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information,
such as alarm information and general system activity using SNMP. Management Information Bases (MIBs)
are sent to a PC (i.e., the SNMP manager) connected to the PBX over a LAN and can then be stored and
analysed using SNMP manager software.
The two features for managing information using SNMP are as follows:
– Polling:
A bilateral transaction of information. Polling allows the manager to request information from the PBX.
PBX
Request
PC
Response Manager
– TRAP:
An automatic relay of information from the PBX when a status change occurs or an alarm is detected.
PBX
Sends Information
PC
Manager
TRAP Implementation
The PBX will send the two types of TRAP as follows:
Type TRAP Name Description
Standard TRAP coldStart Information is sent after turning on the power of the PBX
or resetting the PBX.
Authentication Failure Information is sent when an unregistered Community
Name and/or Manager IP address is entered.
Enterprise Specific Major Alarm Information is sent when a major alarm is detected.
TRAP*1
Minor Alarm Information is sent when a minor alarm is detected.
*1
Enterprise Specific TRAPs are original TDE exclusive information (Enterprise Specific MIB)
Conditions
• Through system programming, it is possible to enable or disable this feature.
440 Feature Guide

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor
• Up to 2 SNMP managers can be assigned.

• This PBX supports SNMP Protocol Version 1.0 and SNMP Version 1.0-TRAP.
• This PBX can only receive read-only MIBs. Write MIBs are not supported.
• This PBX supports MIB II.
• For more information regarding major and minor alarms, refer to 5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log in the
Installation Manual.
• For a list of the MIB object groups supported by this PBX, refer to 3.3 Supported Management Information
Base (MIB) Table in the Appendix.
• Through system programming, it is possible to select whether each type of TRAP (e.g., ColdStart) is sent
to the SNMP manager or not.

13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting
13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager

Feature Guide 441

2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment
2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

Description
It is possible to assign this PBX as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client, allowing IP addresses
to be received from a DHCP server over a LAN.
Conditions
• It is possible to enable this feature through system programming.
Notice
It is important to set your DHCP server to not change the IP addresses of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR and
DSP cards once IP telephones are registered to the PBX. The IP telephones will not operate properly if
these IP addresses are changed.

3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR—LAN Setting
→ DHCP Client
→ IP Address for IPCMPR Card
→ IP Address for VoIP-DSP
442 Feature Guide

2.4.6 Packet Internet Groper (PING) Confirmation

Description
It is possible for this PBX to confirm the connection of IP telephones, routers, and hubs within or outside the
private network using PING. The PBX will send an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request
through the PC programming terminal and receive an ICMP message confirming connection.
Conditions
• This PBX performs PING as follows:
– Test packet length: 56 bytes
– Ping attempts: 5
– Time out length: 1 second
– Ping interval time: 1 second

2.6.18 Utility—Ping
Feature Guide 443

444 Feature Guide

Section 3
Appendix
Feature Guide 445


System
Item KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600
Absent Message—Extension 1 x 16 characters

Absent Message—System 8 x 16 characters
Call Park Zone 100
Conference 3-8 parties per conference (32 Each shelf: 3-8 parties per
parties total) conference (32 parties total)
COS 64
DID/DDI Table 32 digits, 1000 entries
Extension number 1 – 5 digits
Extension Personal Identification Number 10 digits, 1 entry/extension
(PIN)
Host PBX Access Code 10 digits, 10 entries/trunk group
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) 10 entries per ISDN-BRI port
Number of Characters of Name 20
Printing message 8
Queuing Time Table 64 128
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 8
Simultaneous Programmers • one system programmer + 63 personal programmers
• one manager programmer + 63 personal programmers
• 64 personal programmers
SMDR Call Storage 200 calls (10 000 calls w/ 1000 calls (20 000 calls w/
IPCMEC card) IPCMEC card)
Special Carrier Access Code 16 digits, 20 entries 16 digits, 100 entries
Tenant 8 32
Time Service Holiday 24
Verification Code 4 digits, 1000 entries
Verification Code Personal Identification 10 digits, 1000 entries
Number (PIN)
Dialling
Emergency Call 32 digits, 10 entries

Hot Line 32 digits
446 Feature Guide

Key Pad Protocol Dial (ISDN Service 32 digits

Access)
Personal Speed Dialling 32 digits, 100 entries/extn.
Quick Dialling 8 digits, 4080 entries
Redial 32 digits
System Speed Dialling 32 digits, 1000 entries/tenant
Groups
Conference Group 8 (8 members/group for Conference Group Mode,

32 members/group for Broadcast Mode)
Call Pickup Group 64 96
Idle Extension Hunting Group 64 (16 extensions/group) 128 (16 extensions/group)
Incoming Call Distribution Group 128 (32 extensions/group) 128 (128 extensions/group)
Paging Group 32 96
PS Ring Group 32
Trunk Group 64 96
VM (DPT) Group 2 groups x 12 ports (24 8 groups x 12 ports (24
channels) channels)
VM (DTMF) Group 2 groups x 32 channels 8 groups x 32 channels
TRS/Barring
TRS/Barring Level 7
TRS/Barring Denied Code 16 digits, 100 entries/level
TRS/Barring Exception Code 16 digits, 100 entries/level
ARS
Routing Plan Table 16 entries 48 entries

Leading Number Table 16 digits, 1000 entries
Leading Number Exception Table 16 digits, 200 entries
ARS Carrier 10 48
Feature Guide 447

Itemised Billing Code 10 digits

Authorisation Code for Tenant 16 digits
Authorisation Code for Trunk Group 10 digits
Call Log and Message Waiting

Outgoing Call Log—PT 100 records/extn. 100 records/extn.

1520 records/system 3200 records/system
Outgoing Call Log—PS 100 records/extn. 100 records/extn.
Incoming Call Log—PT 100 records/extn. 100 records/extn.
Incoming Call Log—PS + Incoming Call 100 records/extn. or group 100 records/extn. or group
Distribution Group Total 2048 records/system Total 6400 records/system
Message Waiting—PS + Incoming Call
256 640
Distribution Group
Message Waiting—PT + SLT 512 1032
Voice Message
Outgoing Message (OGM) 64

OGM Total Recording Time MSG4 Card: 8 minutes; ESVM2/ESVM4 Card: 20 minutes (at
High recording quality)
Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) IPCMPR/IPCEMPR Card: 125 messages;
ESVM2/ESVM4 Card: 250 messages per card/block
SVM Total Recording Time 20, 60, or 120 minutes
(depending on the recording quality)
Hospitality and Charge Management Features

Billing items for guest rooms 4000 records/PBX (8000

4000 records/PBX
records w/ IPCMEC card)
Hotel Operator 4
Charge Rate 7 digits including a decimal
Charge Denomination 3 currency characters/symbols
448 Feature Guide

Networking
TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 32 entries

Leading Number 3 digits
PBX Code 7 digits
NDSS: Monitored PBXs 8
NDSS: Registered Extensions for Monitor
250
PBX
CTI
Item KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600
PC Console 8
PC Phone 64 128 128
Password
System Password for Installer 4 – 10 characters

System Password for Administrator—for
4 – 10 characters
PC Programming
System Password for User—for PC
4 – 10 characters
Programming
System Password for Administrator—for
4 – 10 digits
PT Programming
System Password for User—for PT
4 – 10 digits
Programming
Manager Password 4 – 10 digits
Programmer Code
Installer Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters

Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters
User Level Programmer Code 0 – 16 characters
Feature Guide 449

3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
3.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Tone Patterns (Default)
1s
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Confirmation Tone 5
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone 1
Ringback Tone 2
DND Tone
Trunk Call Limit Warning

Tone
450 Feature Guide

Tone Patterns (Default)

15 s
Hold Alarm Tone
Call Waiting Tone 1
1s
Call Waiting Tone 2

OR
Ring Tone Patterns (Default)*

1s
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
* The duration of a ring tone may vary by country/area.
Feature Guide 451

3.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table
3.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB)

Table
System Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.1)
Object ID Item Description
1 sysDescr Information of Hardware type and Software version of the Device.

2 sysObjectID Object identifier of this product.
3 sysUpTime Elapsed time since the system was restarted.
4 sysContact Device Administrator.
5 sysName Name of Device.
6 sysLocation Installation Location of Device.
7 sysService Support Layer.
Interface Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.2)
1 ifNumber The number of Network Devices.

2 IfTable (NA) Management Table by each Network Device.
2.1 IfEntry (NA) Components of ifTable.
2.1.1 ifIndex Each interface identifier.
2.1.2 ifDescr Explanation of Interface.
2.1.3 ifType Type of Interface.
2.1.4 ifMtu Maximum Datagram Length which can be sent/received.
2.1.5 ifSpeed Maximum Transfer Speed.
2.1.6 ifPhysAddress Physical Address (MAC Address).
2.1.7 ifAdminStatus The desired state of the interface.
2.1.8 ifOperStatus The current operational state of the interface.
2.1.9 ifLastChange The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current
operational state (up or down).
2.1.10 ifInOctets The number of Octets received.
2.1.11 ifInUcastPkts The number of Unicast Packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
2.1.12 ifInNUcastPkts The number of Non Unicast Packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
2.1.14 ifInErrors The number of inbound Packets that contained errors.
2.1.15 ifInUnKnownProtos The number of Packet received which are discarded because of an
unknown/unsupported protocol.
452 Feature Guide

2.1.16 ifOutOctets The number of Octets transmitted.

2.1.17 ifOutUcastPkts The number of Unicast Packets which are received from upper
protocol.
2.1.18 ifOutNUcastPkts The number of Non Unicast Packets which are received from upper
protocol.
2.1.21 ifOutQLen The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
2.1.22 ifSpecific Relevant MIB object identifier.
IP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.4)
1 ipForwarding The value which indicates operation availability as a router

(whether Datagram is transferred or not).
2 ipDefaultTTL Default value for IP Packet TTL (Time to Live).
3 ipInReceives The total number of Packets received (including packet received in
error).
4 ipnHdrErrors The number of Packets discarded due to errors in their header.
5 ipInAddrError The number of Packets discarded because IP Address of the
destination was invalid.
7 ipInUnknownProtos The number of Packets discarded because the protocol was
unknown/unsupported.
8 ipInDiscards The number of incoming Packets discarded because of an
insufficient reception buffer.
9 ipInDelivers The total number of Packets received (including ICMP) normally.
10 ipOutRequests The total number of IP Packets (ICMP) which are tried to be
transmitted (relay Packet is not included).
13 ipReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds required in the buffer to rebuild
a fragmented Packet.
14 ipReasmReqds The number of Packets that required rebuilding from a fragmented
state.
15 ipReasmOKs The number of Packets that were rebuilt correctly from a
fragmented state.
16 ipReasmFails The number of Packets that could not be rebuilt correctly from a
fragmented state.
17 ipFragOKs The number of Packets that were fragmented correctly.
18 ipFragFails The number of Packets that could not be fragmented correctly.
19 ipFragCreates The number of IP datagrams created due to fragmentation.
20 ipAddrTable (NA) Management Table of addressing information relevant to this
entity’s IP addresses.
20.1 IpAddrEntry (NA) Components of ipAddrTable.
Feature Guide 453

20.1.1 IpAdEntAddr IP Address.

20.1.2 IpAdEntIfindex Index value of the Interface which is assigned to IP address.
20.1.3 IpAdEntNetMask The Subnet Mask associated with IP address.
20.1.4 ipAdEntBcastAddr Broadcast Address Value associated with IP Address.
20.1.5 IpAdEntReasmMaxSiz The size of the largest IP Datagram which can be sent/received
e through IP Address.
ICMP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.5)
1 cmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages received (excluded, with

error).
2 icmpInErrors The total number of ICMP messages received which contained
error.
8 icmpInEchos The total number of ICMP echo request messages received.
9 icmpInEchoReps The total number of ICMP echo answering messages received.
14 icmpOutMsgs The number of ICMP messages which were sent.
15 icmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages which were not sent because of
error.
21 icmpOutEchos The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent.
22 icmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.
TCP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.6)
1 tcpRtoAlgorithm The algorithm used to determine the timing of retransmitting when

a response was unacknowledged.
2 tcpRtoMin Minimum value permitted for retransmission timeout (in
milliseconds).
3 tcpRtoMax Maximum value permitted for retransmission timeout (in
milliseconds).
4 tcpMaxConn Maximum number of TCP connections which can be supported.
5 tcpActiveOpens The total number of Active open TCP connections.
6 tcpPassiveOpens The total number of Passive open TCP connections.
7 tcpAttemptFails The total number of connections error.
8 tcpEstabResets The total number of resets.
10 tcpInSegs The total number of segments received.
11 tcpOutSegs The total number of segments sent.
12 tcpRetransSegs The total number of segments retransmitted.
454 Feature Guide

14 tcpInErrs The total number of segments received in error.

15 tcpOutRsts The total number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag
(reset connection).
UDP Group (1.3.6.1.2.7)
1 udpInDatagrams The total number of UDP Datagrams received.

2 udpNoPorts The total number of received UDP Datagrams for which there was
no application at the destination port.
3 udpInError The total number of received UDP Datagrams which contained
error.
4 udpOutDatagrams The total number of UDP Datagrams sent.
SNMP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.11)
1 snmpInPkts The total number of SNMP messages received.

2 snmpOutPkts The total number of SNMP messages sent.
3 snmpInBadVersions The total number of received SNMP messages of which version is
unsupported.
4 snmpInBadCommunity The total number of SNMP messages with unknown Community
Names Name.
6 snmpInASNParseErrs The total number of SNMP messages with incorrect OID type.
13 snmpInTotalReqVars The total number of Objects which have been retrieved value
successfully.
15 snmpInGetRequests The total number of Get-Request which have been accepted and
processed (e.g. Data extract by using snmpget/snmpwalk
command).
16 snmpInGetNexts The total number of Get-Next which have been accepted and
processed (for at the time of following a layer-tree by using
snmpwalk command).
20 snmpOutTooBigs The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error
of "TooBig".
21 snmpOutNoSuchNam The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error
es of "NoSuchName".
24 snmpOutGenErrs The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error
of "GenErr".
28 snmpOutGetResponse The total number of GetResponse sent.
s
29 snmpOutTraps The total number of TRAP sent.
Feature Guide 455

30 snmpEnableAuthenTr Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is permitted to

aps generate authentication failure traps.
456 Feature Guide

3.4.1 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx
3.4 Revision History
3.4.1 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version

2.0xxx
New Contents
• 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
PBX Code Method
Changed Contents
• 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
• 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
• 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
• 3.1 Capacity of System Resources
Feature Guide 457

3.4.2 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx

2.01xx
New Contents
• 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX
Changed Contents
• 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
Bluetooth compatibility
• 1.12.1 Call Transfer

Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement
• 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

KX-HGT100 compatibility
• 1.32 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

KX-DT300 series DPT compatibility
• 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

KX-HGT100 Feature Numbers
458 Feature Guide

3.4.3 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx

3.0xxx
New Contents
• 1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Trunk-to-TIE Access—Override using an Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• 1.30.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs
• 1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
Changed Contents
• 1.13.4 Music on Hold
Added support for OGMs
• 1.15.1 Conference Group Call
• 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)


Music on Hold and BGM features added

– Walking COS Through DISA
– DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination
• 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
• 1.27.2 Room Status Control
• 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
• 1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console
• 2.3.4 Quick Setup

Updated for the latest software version

Added Support for SIP extensions
• 3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Cyclic Tone deleted
Feature Guide 459

3.4.4 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx
3.4.4 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx

New Contents
• 1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Trunk-to-TIE Access—Override using an Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• 1.30.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs
• 1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
Changed Contents
• 1.13.4 Music on Hold
• 1.15.1 Conference Group Call
• 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)


Music on Hold and BGM features added

– Walking COS Through DISA
– DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination
• 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
• 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
• 1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console
• 2.3.4 Quick Setup

Updated for the latest software version

Added Support for SIP extensions
• 3.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Cyclic Tone deleted
460 Feature Guide

Index
Feature Guide 461

Index
A Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG 363

Call Forwarding (FWD) 66, 67
AA ® Automated Attendant 195 Call Hold 167
Absent Message 225 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN 251
Account Code Entry 88 Call Hold Retrieve Deny 167
Advice of Charge (AOC) 246 Call Hold, Automatic 167
Alarm Information, Local 438 Call Log, Incoming 219
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 84 Call Log, Outgoing 106
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 84 Call Monitor 120
Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override 80 Call Park 170
ANI ® Automatic Number Identification 214 Call Park Recall 170
Answering Features 76 Call Park Retrieve Deny 170
Answering, One-touch Direct 76 Call Pickup 78
AOC ® Advice of Charge 246 Call Pickup Group 78, 400
Appendix 445 Call Pickup, Directed 78
ARS ® Automatic Route Selection 142 Call Splitting 172
Audible Tone Features 319 Call Transfer 163
Authorisation Code 146 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 252
Automated Attendant 195 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG 365
Automatic Call Hold 167 Call Transfer with Announcement 163
Automatic Call Park 170 Call Transfer without Announcement 163
Automatic Call Waiting 41 Call Transfer—Screened ® Call Transfer with
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 118 Announcement 163
Automatic Extension Release 83 Call Transfer—Unscreened ® Call Transfer without
Automatic Log-out 62 Announcement 163
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 214 Call Waiting 41
Automatic Privacy 179 Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID) 41
Automatic Redial 106 Call Waiting Tone 124
Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks 350 Callback Busy, Automatic (Camp-on) 118
Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX 382 Caller ID 214
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 142 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 26
Automatic Setup 423 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 214, 243
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)—by
B QSIG 361
Background Music (BGM) 190 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) 243
Barring 127 Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)—by
QSIG 361
BGM ® Background Music 190
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 162
BGM—External 190
Capacity of System Resources 446
Billing Code, Itemised 146
Carrier Access Code, Special 97
Billing for Guest Room Calls 308
Block, Internal Call 36 CCBS ® Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber 254
Bluetooth Module 381 CCBS by QSIG ® Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber—
Boss & Secretary feature 69 by QSIG 367
Budget Management 135 CDPG ® Call Distribution Port Group 355
Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) 204 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY 393
Busy on Busy 59 Cellular Phone XDP Parallel 53
Busy Override Deny, Executive 119 Centralised Voice Mail 373
Busy Override, Executive 119 Centrex Service, ISDN 240
Buttons, Fixed 227 CF by ISDN (P-MP) ® Call Forwarding—by ISDN
Buttons, Flexible 230 (P-MP) 247
Buttons, PS Feature 285 CF by ISDN (P-P) ® Call Forwarding—by ISDN (P-P) 249
CF by QSIG ® Call Forwarding—by QSIG 363
Charge Management, Call 303
C Charge Services, Call 302
CA ® Communication Assistant 392 Circular Hunting 43
Call Billing for Guest Room 308 Class of Service (COS) 398
Call Charge Management 303 CLI ® Calling Line Identification Distribution 26
Call Charge Services 302 CLIP ® Calling Line Identification Presentation 214, 243
Call Directory—Extension Dialling 84 CLIP by QSIG ® Calling Line Identification Presentation—by
Call Directory—Speed Dialling 108 QSIG 361
Call Distribution Port Group 355 CLIR ® Calling Line Identification Restriction 243, 361
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 247
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 249
462 Feature Guide

Index
CNIP by QSIG ® Calling Name Identification Presentation— DISA AA Service ® DISA Built-in Automated Attendant
by QSIG 361 Number 195
CNIR ® Calling Name Identification Restriction 362 DISA Automatic Walking COS 197
Code Entry, Verified 140 DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA
COLP ® Connected Line Identification Presentation 243 Service) 195
COLP by QSIG ® Connected Line Identification Presentation DISA Intercept Routing—Busy 196
—by QSIG 361 DISA Intercept Routing—DND 196
COLR ® Connected Line Identification DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer 196
Restriction 243, 361 DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial 195
Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs 348 DISA Security Mode 196
Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs 354 Display Information 236
Communication Assistant (CA) 392 Display Lock 108, 209, 219
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 255 Distribution, Group Call 49
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by DND ® Do Not Disturb 66, 71
QSIG 367 DND Override 71
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 388 DND, Paging 71, 184
Conference 176, 177 Do Not Disturb (DND) 66, 71
Conference Group 180 Door Open 188
Conference Group Call 180 Doorphone Call 186
Confirmation Tone 321 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) 243 Assignment 442
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)—by
QSIG 361
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) 243
E
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP)—by E1 Line Service 259
QSIG 361 EFA ® External Feature Access 155
CONP by QSIG ® Connected Name Identification Electronic Station Lockout ® Extension Dial Lock 136
Presentation—by QSIG 361 Emergency Call 87
CONR ® Connected Name Identification Restriction 362 Enhanced Walking Extension 316
Consultation Hold 155, 165, 172 Exception Code Tables 127
COS ® Class of Service 398 Exclusive Call Hold 167
CPC ® Calling Party Control Signal Detection 162 Executive Busy Override 119
Executive Busy Override Deny 119
CTI ® Computer Telephony Integration 388
Extension Controlling Features 311
Extension Dial Lock 136
D Extension Feature Clear 313
Data Line Security 152 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) 311
DDI ® Direct Dialling In 20 Extension PIN Lock 311
Delayed Ringing 49 Extension Port Configuration 396
Denied Code Tables 127 Extension Release, Automatic 83
DHCP ® Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 422, 442 Extension User Group 400
Diagnostics 435 Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration 157
Dial Tone 319 External Feature Access (EFA) 155
Dial Tone Transfer 137 External Relay Control 213
Dial Type Selection 90 External Sensor 211
Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 157 EXtra Device Port (XDP) 396
Dialling, One-touch 104
DID ® Direct Inward Dialling 20 F
Digital XDP 159 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 435
DIL ® Direct In Line 18 Feature Clear, Extension 313
Direct Dialling In (DDI) 20 Fixed Buttons 227
Direct In Line (DIL) 18 Flash/Recall/Terminate 153
Direct Inward Dialling (DID) 20 Flexible Buttons 230
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 195 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering 425
Direct One-touch Answering 76 Floating Extension 432
Direct Recording 207 Full One-touch Dialling 104
Direct Trunk Access 100 FWD ® Call Forwarding 66, 67
Directed Call Pickup 78 FWD—All Calls 67
Directory, Call—Extension Dialling 84 FWD—Busy 67
Directory, Call—Speed Dialling 108 FWD—Busy/No Answer 67
Directory, PS 284 FWD—Follow Me 67
DISA ® Direct Inward System Access 195 FWD—No Answer 67
Feature Guide 463

Index
FWD, Multiple 68 Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution

FWD/DND Button Types 73 Group 59
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button 73 Intercept Routing, DISA—Busy 196
FWD/DND Setting by Fixed FWD/DND button 73 Intercept Routing, DISA—DND 196
Intercept Routing, DISA—No Answer 196
Intercept Routing, DISA—No Dial 195
G Intercom Call 84
Gateway Groups 353 Internal Call Block 36
Group 400 Internal Call Features 34
Group Call Distribution 49 Interrupt Redial 106
Group Call Pickup 78 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) 381
Group FWD Button Types 73 IRNA ® Intercept Routing—No Answer 28
Group, Call Distribution Port 355 ISDN ® Integrated Services Digital Network 238
Group, Call Pickup 78, 400 ISDN Centrex Service 240
Group, Conference 180 ISDN Extension 256
Group, Extension User 400 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 258
Group, Idle Extension Hunting 43, 401 Itemised Billing Code 146
Group, Incoming Call Distribution 45, 401
Group, Paging 183, 400
Group, PS Ring 280, 402 L
Group, Trunk 400 Last Number Redial 106
Group, Voice Mail (VM) 263, 401 LED Indication 112, 233
Line Preference Override 99
Line Preference—Incoming 77
H Line Preference—Outgoing 99
Handover 278 Live Call Screening (LCS) 275
Hands-free Answerback 80 Local Alarm Information 438
Hands-free Operation 148 Lock, Display 108, 209, 219
Handset/Headset Selection ® Headset Operation 151 Lock, Extension Dial 136
Headset Operation 151 Lock, Extension PIN 311
Hold Recall 167 Lock, Remote Extension Dial 136
Hold Retrieve Deny, Call 167 Log-in/Log-out 61
Hold, Call 167 Log-in/Log-out Monitor 62
Hold, Call (HOLD)—by ISDN 251
Hold, Consultation 155, 165, 172
Hold, Exclusive Call 167 M
Hospitality Features 305 Making a TIE Line Call 324
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Making Calls with an SDN Button 112
Company from a Host PBX) 95 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 254
Hot Line 111 Manager Features 413
Hotel Operator 306 Manual Queue Redirection 56
Hunting, Circular 43 MCID ® Malicious Call Identification 254
Hunting, Idle Extension 43 Memory Dialling Features 102
Hunting, Priority 49 Message Features 221
Hurry-up Transfer ® Manual Queue Redirection 56 Message Waiting 221
Message, Absent 225
Message, Outgoing (OGM) 192
I Message, Printing 301
ICD Group ® Incoming Call Distribution Group 45, 401 Monitor, Call 120
Idle Extension Hunting 43 MSN ® Multiple Subscriber Number Ringing Service 23
Idle Extension Hunting Group 43, 401 Multiple FWD 68
Idle Line Access (Local Access) 100 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 23
Idle Line Preference 99 Multiple VPSs 375
Incoming Call Distribution Group 45, 401 Music on Hold 173
Incoming Call Indication Features 38 Music, Background (BGM) 190
Incoming Call Log 219 Mute 150
Incoming Call Queue Monitor 64
Incoming Trunk Call Features 14
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 238 N
Intercept Routing 28 NDSS ® Network Direct Station Selection 368
Intercept Routing—Busy 28 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) 368
Intercept Routing—DND 28 Network ICD Group 377
Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 28 Networking Features 323
Intercept Routing—No Destination 33
464 Feature Guide

Index
No Line Preference 77, 99 PS Feature Buttons 285

Numbering, Fixed/Flexible 425 PS Ring Group 280, 402
PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 379
PT ® Proprietary Telephone Features 227
O PT Programming 418
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 125 Pulse to Tone Conversion 90
Off-hook Monitor 149
OGM ® Outgoing Message 192
OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement) 125 Q
OHCA, Whisper 126 QSIG Enhanced Features 368
One-touch Answering, Direct 76 QSIG Standard Features 359
One-touch Dialling 104 Queue Redirection, Manual 56
One-touch Dialling, Full 104 Queuing Feature 55
One-touch Transfer 165 Quick Dialling 110
Operator Call 412 Quick Setup 422
Operator Features 412
Operator, Hotel 306
Outgoing Call Log 106 R
Outgoing Message (OGM) 192 Recall 153
Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Record Log Features 291
Group 53 Recording into the VPS, Two-way 275
Overflow Feature 59 Recording, Direct 207
Redial, Automatic 106
Redial, Interrupt 106
P Redial, Last Number 106
Packet Internet Groper (PING) Confirmation 443 Relay Control, External 213
Paging 183 Remote Control 64
Paging Deny 183 Remote Extension Dial Lock 136
Paging DND 71, 184 Reverse Circuit 92
Paging Group 183, 400 Revision History 457
Parallelled Telephone 159 Ring 49
Password 420 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 39
Pause Insertion 94 Ring Tones 450
PC Console 390 Ringing Line Preference 77
PC Phone 390 Room Status Control 306
PC Programming 415 Route Selection, Automatic (ARS) 142
PDN ® Primary Directory Number 112
Peer-to-Peer Connection 385
Personal Identification Number (PIN), Extension 311 S
Personal Identification Number (PIN), Verification S-CO Line Access 100
Code 140 Screening, Live Call (LCS) 275
Personal Speed Dialling 108 SDN ® Secondary Directory Number 112
Pickup, Group Call 78, 400 SDN Direct Dial 112
PIN ® Extension Personal Identification Number 311 SDN Walking COS 112
PIN ® Verification Code Personal Identification Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 122
Number 140 Secondary Directory Number (SDN) 112
PIN Lock, Extension 311 Security Mode, DISA 196
PING ® Packet Internet Groper 443 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only) 386
Port Configuration, Extension 396 Sending Faxes Through the Network 351
Portable Station (PS) Connection 278 Sensor, External 211
Portable Station (PS) Features 278 Service-out mode 316
Power Failure Connections 435 Setup, Automatic 423
Power Failure Restart 437 Setup, Quick 422
Power Failure Transfer 435 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System
Predialling 82 Monitor 440
Primary Directory Number (PDN) 112 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) 423
Prime Line Preference 77, 99 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension 383
Printing Message 301 SMDR ® Station Message Detail Recording 291
Priority Hunting 49 SNMP ® Simple Network Management Protocol 440
Privacy Release 179 SNTP ® Simple Network Time Protocol 423
Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 227 Software Upgrading 434
PS ® Portable Station Features 278 Special Carrier Access Code 97
PS Directory 284 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 108
Feature Guide 465

Index
Splitting, Call 172 Upgrading Software 434

Station Hunting ® Idle Extension Hunting 43 User-to-user Signalling Type 1 (UUS-1) 239
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 291
Station Programme Clear ® Extension Feature Clear 313
Station Speed Dialling ® Personal Speed Dialling 108
V
Subaddressing 239 Verification Code Entry 140
Supervisory Feature 64 Verification Code Personal Identification Number
Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table 452 (PIN) 140
SVM ® Built-in Simplified Voice Message 204 VIP Call 58
SVM Log 207 Virtual Locations 316
Syslog Record Management 300 Virtual Private Network (VPN) 357
System Configuration and Administration Features 395 Virtual PS 289
System Configuration—Hardware 396 Voice Mail (VM) Group 263, 401
System Configuration—Software 398 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 273
System Data Control 415 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 266
System Speed Dialling 108 Voice Mail, Centralised 373
System Speed Dialling, TRS/Barring Override by 127 Voice Message Features 263
Voice Message, Built-in Simplified (SVM) 204
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 349
T VoIP ® Voice over Internet Protocol Network 349
T.38 Protocol 351 VPN ® Virtual Private Network 357
T1 Line Service 261 VPS Data Control by the PBX 276
TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) 189
Tenant Service 404
Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block 405 W
Terminate 153 Walking COS 138
Terminated Hunting 43 Walking COS Through DISA 197
Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN 253 Walking COS, DISA Automatic 197
TIE Line and Trunk Connection 326 Walking Extension 315
TIE Line Programming 339 Walking Extension Features 315
TIE Line Service 323 Walking Extension, Enhanced 316
Time Service 408 Whisper OHCA 126
Timed Reminder 318 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 286
Toll Restriction (TRS) 127 Wrap-up 61
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 127
Tone, Audible 319 X
Tone, Call Waiting 124
XDP ® EXtra Device Port 396
Tone, Confirmation 321
XDP Parallel Mode, Wireless 286
Tone, Dial 319
XDP, Digital 159
Tones/Ring Tones 450
Transfer Recall 164
Transfer, Call 163
Transfer, One-touch 165
Transferring Features 163
TRAP Implementation 440
TRS/Barring ® Toll Restriction/Call Barring Features 127
TRS/Barring Level 127
TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 127
Trunk Access 100
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 189
Trunk Busy Out 93
Trunk Call Features 86
Trunk Call Limitation 157
Trunk Group 400
Trunk Group Access 100
Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration 157
Two-way Recording into the VPS 275
U
UCD ® Uniform Call Distribution 49
Unattended Conference 177
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 49
466 Feature Guide

Notes
Feature Guide 467

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use
only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
Communications Co., Ltd.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2007
PSQX4191SA KK0607GJ7069

Feature Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Feature Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Feature Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Feature Guide

Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 3.0000 or later

Section 1, Call Handling Features

Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features

References Found in the Feature Guide

PC Programming Manual References

PT Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References

User Manual References

About the other manuals

The KX-TDE100UK/KX-TDE200UK, KX-TDE100NE/KX-TDE200NE, KX-TDE100GR/KX-TDE200GR,

Contact to Authorised Representative:

1.13.4 Music on Hold ...............................................................................................................173

1.25.2 PS Ring Group .............................................................................................................280

1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console .................................................................................................390

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

1. Available Networking Type for Each Card Type

ü*: Enable (default); ü: Enable

Method Description & Reference

® 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

® 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

3. Destination Change with the Caller’s Identification Number

Feature Description & Reference

® 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

4. Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type

ü*: Enable (default); ü: Enable

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX) ü

Feature Description & Reference

® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

® 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

® 1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

PC Programming Manual References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

A trunk call is received.

Does the call have its CLI* No

Yes Is the CLI destination

Is the DIL destination of No

*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:

[Programming Example of DIL Table]

01 Enable Disable ... 101 100 ...

PC Programming Manual References

PT Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Is the DID/DDI number found in No

Yes Does the DID/DDI Yes

CLI works. Does the DID/DDI

Is the DID/DDI destination No The call is routed

*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:

[Programming Example of DID/DDI Table]

Day Lunch ... Day Lunch ...

0001 123-4567 John Enable Disable ... 105 100 ...

Removed number of digits: 6 Modified DID/DDI number: 876543 21 = 1021

Received Number Destination Explanation

PC Programming Manual References

PT Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References